Guia de Usuario Plant 3d

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010
User’s Guide
February 2009
© 2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be
reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.
The data from DIN Standards are used by permission of DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. They conform with the current version of the
DIN Standards concerned (December 1, 2007, Autodesk)
The JIS symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under permission from JIS.
ISA Symbols © ISA
© Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin
ISO 10628:1997 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
ISO 14617-5:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
DIN 2481:1979-06 Symbols © Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (DIN)
JIS Z 8204:1983 Symbols © Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS)
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,
3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD
Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk
Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch,
AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner,
Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next>
(design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio,
Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF,
Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax,
Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor
LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox,
MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall,
Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ,
Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo),
SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual
Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo).
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries:
Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA
(design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert.
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 Mclnnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
P&ID Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
ISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
JIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Overview: Create and Configure the Working Environment . . . . . . . 7
Set Up a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Configure General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Set or Change Project Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Configure Drawing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Configure Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Configure AutoCAD P&ID DWG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Configure End Connections and Line Behavior . . . . . . . . . . 33
Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) . . . . . . . . . 40
Set P&ID Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) . . . . 53
Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines . . . . . . . . 57
Set Up Symbol and Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
iii
Set Up Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Set Up Tag Formatting (P&ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Set Up Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Set Up Off-Page Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Configure Plant 3D DWG Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . 140
Set Plant 3D Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant
3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Set Up File Names and File Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Configure the Display of Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Configure the Display of Isometric Sloped Lines . . . . . . 160
Set Up Isometric Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Configure the Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments . . . . . . . 171
Configure Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties . . . . . . . . . . 182
Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Set Up Properties (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Set Up Tag Formatting (Plant 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Set Up Annotations for Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . 231
Point Users to the Project Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Overview: Organize Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Set Up the Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Create a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Include Referenced Drawings (Xrefs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Organize Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Set Drawing Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Overview: The Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Work with Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Open a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Get Ready to Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Add Project Data to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Add Status Notes About a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Save Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Manage Work History Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Manage Project Files Remotely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Share Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Audit and Compress Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
iv | Contents
Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Work with the AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . 273
Switch Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
AutoCAD Plant 3D Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
AutoCAD Plant 3D Substitution Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
AutoCAD Plant 3D Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . 290
Understand the Work History Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Control the Display of the Drawing Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Understand P&ID Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Create a Drawing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Add Components to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other
Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining Its
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Create and Use Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Connect Schematic Lines to Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking
Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines . . . . . . . . . 329
Edit Schematic Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tag Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Annotate Components and Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Contents | v
Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . 349

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Understand the P&ID Line List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Edit Size Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Validate the 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Correct Validation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Create Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Create User-Fabricated Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment . . . . . 383
Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Position and Manipulate Equipment in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Reorient Equipment in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Copy Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Attach Graphics to Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Detach Graphics from Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Understand Structural Modeling in AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . . . . . . 393
Set the Structural Model Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Work With Structural Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Work with Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Specify Member Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Create a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Edit a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Change the Length of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Cut a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Miter Two Structural Members Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Trim or Extend a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Edge Cut a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Restore a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Work with Structural Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Work with Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Work with Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Work with Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
vi | Contents
Explode Structural Trim Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Work with Footings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Work with Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Export Structural Objects to SDNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Select a Pipe Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Set Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Create Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Route Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Route pipe at a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Create a Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Modify Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Lock Pipe Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Select Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Place Pipe Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Place Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Create Custom and Placeholder Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Assign Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Insulate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Copy Plant 3D objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Add Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Modify Pipe Support Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Edit Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Create Custom Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Work with Sloped Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Chapter 12 Control the Plant 3D Model Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Control the Visual Style of the Plant 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Work with the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Place Annotations in a P&ID Drawing from the Data
Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Control the Display of the Tree View . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Filter Information in the Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Sort Records in the Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Contents | vii
Control the Display of Columns in the Data Table . . . . . 517
View Read-Only Data and Property Acquisition Data . . . . . . . 520
Print Data from the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Export and Import Data in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Export Data from the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Export To Piping Component Format (PCF) . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Modify Exported Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Import Data to the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Generate Reports in the Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
View Data in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Export Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Import Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
View Report Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Print Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Understand Isometric Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Create Isogen Messages and Information Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Create an Isogen Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Create an Isogen Information Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Generate a Production Isometric Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Review Isometric Results Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Export a Piping Component File (PCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Overview: Generate Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Create an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Link or Copy Orthographic Drawings to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Annotate an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Overview: Migrate Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Verify Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Migrate Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Migrate Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Resolve Migration Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Overview: Validate P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Validate Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Correct Validation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
viii | Contents
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Contents | ix
x
Introduction to AutoCAD
Plant 3D 1
AutoCAD® Plant 3D supports a wide range of process plant and piping design tasks. You can
create both P&ID drawings and 3D models for piping, equipment, and structure. Orthographic
drawings can be produced from your model.
You work exclusively in a project environment, so that your drafting is consistent with others
working in the same project.
You can also create reports for a single drawing or an entire project.
If you are an administrator, you can configure a custom drafting environment that is exactly
right for your organization and your designers.
About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help

The AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 Help system is organized to make information
easy to locate when you need it. Help is available when you press the F1 key or
click the Help button in a dialog box.
Once the Help system is displayed, you can locate the topics you need in several
ways. Use the method or combination of methods that gets you the information
to help you accomplish tasks in the program. Following are a variety of ways
for making best use of the Help system.
Find Information Using the Landing Page

When you open the Help system, the landing page on the right side displays
information that is organized by task. Simply click a link and go directly to a
Help topic for the task.
1
Find Information Using the Contents Tab
You can also use the Contents tab to find information that is structured in
logical groupings — just like the Table of Contents in a printed book. The
Contents tab contains the following sections:
■ AutoCAD P&ID Best Practices. Provides workflow diagrams that illustrate

P&ID processes and links to help you with the specific tasks involved.
■ Migrate Projects and Drawings on page 575. Migrates projects and drawings
created in earlier versions of the product to ensure data integrity with the
current product release.
■ Create and Configure a Project on page 7. Provides conceptual and

task-based help for administrators who want to create a custom project
configuration for their designers.
■ Organize Project Drawings on page 239. Provides conceptual and task-based

help for CAD managers or lead drafters who need to set up projects.
■ Work in a Project Environment on page 253. Provides conceptual and

task-based help for designers who may be new to working in an organized
project environment.
■ Understand the Drawing Environment on page 273. Provides conceptual

help for designers to familiarize them with the drawing environment and
introduce new interface elements to make designing easier and more
efficient.
■ Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing on page 297. Provides conceptual and
task-based help for designers who primarily use symbols and schematic
lines to create their P&ID drawings.
■ Validate P&ID Drawings on page 591. Provides conceptual and task-based

help for drafters and designers who work with drawings and want to
manage and maintain the validity of their drawings while they work.
■ Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D on page 349.

Provides conceptual and task-based help for designers who want to place
P&ID objects into Plant 3D models.
■ Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model on page 367. Provides conceptual and
task-based help for designers who create 3D models of piping symbols.
■ Manage Data and Generate Reports on page 499. Provides conceptual and
task-based help for designers about managing data and producing reports
for an entire project or for individual project drawings.
2 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

■ Generate Orthographic Drawings on page 561. Provides conceptual and
task-based help for designers who want to produce orthographic drawings
from Plant 3D models.
■ Glossary on page 605. Provides a list of AutoCAD Plant 3D terms and their
definitions.
■ Command and Interface Reference. Provides help on commands and system

variables for those who like to use the command line; also provides detailed
descriptions about the dialog boxes, windows, tool palettes, and workspaces
that make up the AutoCAD Plant 3D environment.
Find Information Using the Search Tab

Another way of accessing information is by using the Search tab. This option
zeros in on the exact subject you are trying to find information about.
Find Information Using InfoCenter

On the menu bar, InfoCenter allows you to search for information through
key words (or by typing a question), display the Communication Center panel
for product updates and announcements, or display the Favorites panel to
access saved topics.
When you enter key words or type a question for help and then press ENTER
or click the Search button, you search multiple Help resources in addition to
any files that have been specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog box. The
results are displayed as links on a panel. You can click any of these links to
display the Help topic, article, or document.
NOTE It is recommended that you use key words to search for information, as
key words often produce better results.
For more information about InfoCenter, see Find Information Using

InfoCenterFind Information Using InfoCenter in the AutoCAD Help system.
Provide Feedback About Help

We strive to make our Help system an easy and efficient way for you to find
the information you need to do your P&ID tasks. We work to improve our
Help system by reviewing and considering all comments that we receive from
users.
If you have questions about any topic in the Help system or have ideas about
improving a topic, you can provide us with feedback from within the Help
About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help | 3

system. Simply click “Please send us your comment about this page” at the
bottom of every help topic, and complete the feedback form.
While we cannot respond to all comments we receive, we do seriously consider
your comments and improve our Help system based on your feedback.
P&ID Symbols
The symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from PIP
(Process Industry Practices), ISA, ISO (International Organization for
Standardization), and DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.).
PIP
The PIP symbols in this Autodesk product are used with permission granted
by license agreement from Process Industry Practices (PIP).
Process Industry Practices (PIP)
3925 West Braker Lane (R4500)
Austin, TX 78759, USA
Phone: (512) 232-3042
www.pip.org
ISA
The ISA symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from ISA.
ISA
67 Alexander Drive
PO Box 12277
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, USA
Phone: (919) 549-8411
Fax: (919) 549-8288
Email: info@isa.org
www.isa.org

ISO
The ISO symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under license from The
International Organization for Standardization (ISO). ISO standards can be
purchased from American National Standards Institute (ANSI/ISO)
ISO
25 West 43rd Street
New York, NY 10036
Tel: (212) 642-4900
http://webstore.ansi.org/default.aspx
ISO 10628:1997 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

(ISO)
ISO 14617-5:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for

Standardization (ISO)
ISO 14617-6:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for

Standardization (ISO)
ISO 3511-1:1977 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

(ISO)

(ISO)

(ISO)
ISO 3511-4: 1985 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

(ISO)
DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.)

The data from DIN Standards are used by permission of DIN Deutsches Institut
für Normung e. V. They conform with the current version of the DIN Standards
concerned.
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V.,
Burggrafenstraße 6,
10787 Berlin,
ISO | 5
Germany
DIN 2481:1979-06 Symbols © Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V. (DIN)
JIS
The JIS symbols in this product are used by Autodesk under permission from
JIS.

Create and Configure a
Project 2
You use the Project Setup wizard to create a project, then configure the project setup options
to meet your working environment requirements or your client needs.
Overview: Create and Configure the Working

Environment
The working environment is set up for ease in creating and managing drawings,
models, and other related files.
When you start AutoCAD Plant 3D for the first time, a default project is set as
the current project. You can either modify this project or create a new one,
depending on your requirements.
Both the default project and any new projects that you create include standard
setting for paths, drawings, Data Manager configuration, and so on. These
default settings are often appropriate for most tasks throughout a project cycle.
However, you can configure these settings to make them specific to the needs
of your organization or your client. You can configure your drawing environment
in the Project Setup dialog box.
NOTE It is strongly recommended that you avoid changing the project setup while
others are using the project. Any changes you make will be visible only after users
close and open the project again.
Set Up a New Project

You can create a project and then change the project settings.
7
You can specify basic settings as you create a project with the Project Setup
wizard.
You need the following information to complete all pages of the wizard:
Page Information required
Page 1 of 5 Specify general settings ■ The project name

■ The project description (optional)
■ The directory where you want to store
the program-generated files
NOTE The program creates default direct-

ories based on the project name.
■ The directory where you want to store

related files, files such as basic Auto-
CAD files, spreadsheets, and word-
processing documents.
■ The location of an existing project XML
file that you want to use as a template
(optional).
NOTE If you choose this option, your new

project inherits the folder structure of the
existing project. If Project A contains a
folder named Ortho Files, Project B, which
is based on Project A, also has a folder
named Ortho Files.
Page 2 of 5 Specify unit settings The base unit for project drawing: either
Imperial or Metric.
NOTE If you choose Metric, you can

choose to have nominal diameters shown
in either inches or millimeters.
Page 3 of 5 Specify P&ID settings ■ The directory where you want to store
P&ID drawings (required even for
projects without P&ID drawings)
■ The standard (for example: PIP, ISA,
ISO, DIN, JIS/ISO) for P&ID tool palette
content (required even for projects
8 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Page Information required
without P&ID drawings). The stand-
ards shown depend upon whether you
chose Metric or Imperial on the previ-
ous page.
Page 4 of 5 Specify Plant 3D directory set- Path information for the following:
tings ■ 3D model files
■ Spec sheets
■ Orthographic drawings
Page 5 of 5 Finish Whether you want to edit additional pro-

ject settings.
To set up a new project
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤

New Project.
2 Complete the Project Setup wizard.
3 If you want to change the default project settings, select the check box
labeled Edit Project Properties After Creating Project.
4 Click Finish.
You now have a new working project.

You can change the default project setup options using the Project Setup
dialog box. Use the tree nodes on the left pane of the Project Setup dialog box
to locate the options you want to change. Modify the information displayed
on the right pane. For more information, see Configure General Settings on
page 10.
NOTE It is strongly recommended that you set security measures to prevent users
from accessing or changing certain project folders or files. Using Microsoft security
settings, you can lock the project files that you do not want users to modify. For
more information about Windows security settings, see Windows Help.
Set Up a New Project | 9

To open a project

Open Project.
2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the location of the project, and click
the project.xml file.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
NEWPROJECT
OPENPROJECT
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Project Setup Dialog Box
Configure General Settings

You can configure general settings, including project details, drawing
properties, and reports.
NOTE Your administrator can lock project files to prevent changes to

project-specific settings and options.
Set or Change Project Details

You can change details of the default project settings.

You can perform any of the following tasks:
■ Specify or create additional project properties.
■ Configure work history prompts.
■ Specify path and file location for project reports.
■ Specify path and file location for related files.
■ Associate a tool palette group with the project. This setting specifies the
tool palette group that displays by default for all designers when the project
is opened. You can set two separate tool palette group associations: one
for opening the project in AutoCAD P&ID, and another for opening the
project in AutoCAD Plant 3D.
■ Change the Data Manager interactive zoom factor.
To add a new property to the existing set of project details

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Project
Details.
Set or Change Project Details | 11

3 On the Project Details pane, under General Properties, do any of the
following:
■ In the Project Description box, add or change the project description.
■ In the Project Number box, add a project number.
NOTE The Project Name was set when the project was created. You cannot
edit this name.
4 Under Custom Properties, in the Custom Categories list, click Project

Data.
5 Click Add Row.

6 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a name (for example: Lead designer) and
a value (for example: Rich Robins) for the new property.
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK.
To add a new category of project details

Project Setup.
Details.
3 On the Project Details pane, under General Properties, do any of the

following:
■ In the Project Description box, add or change the project description.
■ In the Project Number box, add a project number.
NOTE The Project Name is set when the project is created. You cannot edit
this name here.
4 Under Custom Properties, click Add.
5 In the Add Category dialog box, enter a name for the new category (for
example: Other Information). Click OK.

6 Under Properties Of Selected Category, click Add Row.
7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a name (for example: Project Manager)
and a value (for example: A. Taylor) for the new property. Click OK.
8 Continue adding properties as necessary (for example: PM Phone,

415-555-1212 and Process Lead, D. Quinn).
9 To add additional categories, click Add and repeat the steps for adding a
category and its properties.
10 Click OK.
To configure work history prompts

Project Setup.
Details.

3 On the Project Details pane, under Work History Prompts, click one of
the following options to specify when designers must enter work history
information about their drawings:
■ Opening Project Drawings
■ Closing Project Drawings
■ Never
To configure general paths and file locations

Project Setup.
Details.
3 Under General Paths and File Locations, do the following:

■ In the User-defined Reports Directory box, enter the file path for the
reports directory. Or click the [...] button, and in the Select Reports
Directory dialog box, browse to the location where you want to place
the reports directory.
■ In the Related Files Directory box, enter the file path for the related
files directory. Or click the [...] button, and in the Select Related Files
Directory dialog box, browse to the location where you want to place
the related files directory.
4 Click OK.
To configure tool palette group association

Project Setup.
Details.

3 Under Tool Palette Group Association, in the drop-down lists, click tool
palette groups to display when a project is opened.
4 Click OK.
NOTE If the name of a tool palette group is displayed in red, the tool palette
group exists but is not available on your system. You can make the group available
by importing it. See Save and Share Tool Palettes in AutoCAD Help. For information
on how to customize and share tool palette groups, see Customize Tool Palettes
and Save and Share Tool Palettes in AutoCAD Help.
To configure the Data Manager interactive zoom factor

Project Setup.
Details.
3 Under Interactive zoom, in the box labeled Data Manager Interactive

Zoom Factor, enter a number between 0.0 and 1.0 to set the zoom factor
when designers zoom to a component from the Data Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Project Details (General Settings Tree Node)
Configure Drawing Properties

You can configure drawing properties so that each drawing added to the project
has the same properties available.
You can change the property value for individual P&ID or modeling drawings.
To add a new category of drawing properties

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Drawing
Properties.
Configure Drawing Properties | 17

3 On the Drawing Properties pane, under Custom, click Add.
4 In the Add Category dialog box, enter a name for the new category (for
example: Additional Information). Click OK.
5 Click Add Row.

6 In the Add Row dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Name, enter a name for the property (for example: Project
Name).
■ Under Description, enter a description (for example: The project to

which this drawing belongs).
■ Click OK.
7 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Properties.

In the Drawing Properties dialog box, the properties that you added are
displayed. If necessary, use the scroll bar to display the properties.
8 Click OK.
Configure Drawing Properties | 19

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Drawing Properties (General Settings Tree Node)
Configure Report Settings

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides several report templates for viewing, printing,
exporting, and importing reports.
You can export and import report data to and from Microsoft Excel
spreadsheets (XLS/XLSX) or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
You can create new report types based on existing report templates. The
templates include:
■ Equipment List
■ Line List
■ Line Summary List
■ Instrument List
■ Valve List
■ Nozzle List
■ Control Valve List
■ Document Registry

To configure report settings, specify a report type, and then set the class,
project, or drawing properties within that report type. The properties you
specify are queried. The Data Manager displays the query results.
Setting Up Reports Containing Plant 3D Data

The existing report templates contain P&ID classes and properties. You can
create Plant 3D templates for the following report types:
■ Equipment List
■ Line Summary List
■ Nozzle List
■ Valve List
You add 3D data to these templates by following the procedure to configure

a new report based on an existing report and selecting Plant 3D classes.
NOTE If you modify one of these reports, the Plant 3D data is included in the
report only if a corresponding P&ID object with an identical tag exists in the
project.
To configure a new report based on an existing report (without replacing

the associated tables)

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand General Settings. Click Reports.
3 On the Project Reports pane, in the Defined Reports, click a report you
want to use as the template for a new report (for example: Equipment List).
Click New.
Configure Report Settings | 21

4 In the New Report dialog box, under New Report Name, enter a name
(for example: New Equipment List). Click Continue.

NOTE The name you enter in the New Report Name box is displayed as the
title of the subsequent dialog box.
5 In the [New Report Name] dialog box, in the Select Properties To Include
tree view, expand the class definition whose properties you want to
configure (for example: Equipment).
NOTE If you are creating a Plant 3D report template, you can specify Plant
3D object or drawing properties and order them.
6 Click the properties you want queried in the new report.

The properties you specify are displayed in the Data Manager, in the
Project Reports view.
7 On the Property Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field to move. Use
the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the order in which the fields are
displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottom order in the Fields list
is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager.
8 Repeat steps 6-7 for each of the available fields that you want reported.
9 Click OK.

To configure a new report based on an existing report (replace the associated
tables)

Project Setup.
Reports.
3 On the Project Reports pane, click a report on which to base the new
report (for example: Equipment List). Click New.
4 In the New Report dialog box, enter a name for the new report (for
example: New Equipment List).

5 To replace the family tables, do the following:
■ Click Replace Table(s).
■ In the Replace dialog box, select the check box next to the tables you
want to replace (for example: select the Equipment check box).
■ In the drop-down list, click a replacement class table. Click Continue.
■ On the Create Report Template dialog box, click Continue.
NOTE The name you entered in the New Report Name box on the New
Report dialog box is displayed as the title of the subsequent dialog box.

6 In the [New Report Name] dialog box, in the Report Properties pane, in
the Select Properties To Include tree view, expand the class definition
whose fields you want to configure (for example: Equipment).
3D object or drawing properties and order them appropriately. The Plant 3D
data is included in the report only if a corresponding P&ID object with an
identical tag exists in the project.
7 Click the properties you want queried in the new report.
8 On the Priority Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field whose location
you want to change. Use the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the order
in which the fields are displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottom
order in the Fields list is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager.
9 Repeat steps 7-8 for each of the available properties that you want
reported.
10 Click OK.
To modify an existing report

Project Setup.
Reports.
3 On the Project Reports pane, under Defined Reports, click the report you
want to modify. Click Modify.

4 In the Modify Report dialog box, in the Select Properties To Include tree
view, expand the class definition whose fields you want to configure (for
example: Equipment).
3D object or drawing properties and order them appropriately.

5 Click the properties you want queried in the report.
6 On the Priority Order pane, in the Fields list, click a field whose location
you want to change. Use the Up or Down arrows to rearrange the order
in which the fields are displayed in the Data Manager. The top-to-bottom
order in the Fields list is displayed left-to-right in the Data Manager.
7 Repeat steps 5-6 for each of the available fields that you want reported.
8 Click OK.
To preview, sort, and filter a report

Project Setup.
Reports.
3 On the Project Reports pane, under Defined Reports, click the report you
want to preview.

4 In the Report Preview data view, do any of the following:
■ To sort the data, click a column header to change the sort order.
■ To view only items with the same value as the selection, right-click a
cell that contains the value by which you want to search. Click Filter
By Selection.
■ To view all the selected items, right-click a cell that contains the value
you want to exclude from the filtered view and click Filter Excluding
Selection.
■ To filter for field values and ranges of values, right-click a cell for the
property where you want to set a filter. Click the Filter For Field.
In the Filter For Field box, enter a value and press ENTER. Among the
conditions you can use are the following:

NOTE Surround a string entry with single quotation marks (‘). Entries are
case sensitive.
Conditions (can be Purpose Examples

used cumulatively)
Angle brackets (< >) to display values not ■ <> ‘700’ displays
equal to your entry only rows with cells
containing strings
other than 700
■ <> ‘’ displays rows
with cell data not
equal to an empty
string, thus eliminat-
ing rows with empty
cells
Asterisk (*) to display any value in its Like ‘*SCH40* displays all
place fields continuing the text
“SCH 40” regardless of
the characters that come
before or after the spe-
cified string
Equal signs (=) to display values that = ‘Bosch’ displays only

match your entry cells containing the
string Bosch
IS NULL to display only empty Displays only rows with

cells empty cells
IS NOT NULL to exclude empty cells Displays only rows with

data
Question marks (?) to display any single LIKE ‘SCH?0’ displays

character in its place SCH20, SCH30, SCH40,
and so on
■ To remove all filters, right-click a cell and click Remove Filter.
5 In the Report Preview data view, do any of the following:

■ To sort the data, click a column header to change the sort order.

■ To view only items with the same value as the selection, right-click a
cell that contains the value by which you want to search. Click Filter
By Selection.
■ To view all the selected items, right-click a cell that contains the value
you want to exclude from the filtered view and click Filter Excluding
Selection.
■ To filter for field values and ranges of values, right-click a cell for the
property where you want to set a filter. Click the Filter For Field.
In the Filter For Field box, enter a value and press ENTER. You can
use the following conditions cumulatively:
Conditions Purpose Examples
containing strings
other than 700
with cell data not
equal to an empty
ing rows with empty
cells
cified string

string Bosch

cells empty cells

data

Conditions Purpose Examples
Question mark (?) to display any single LIKE ‘SCH?0’ displays

and so on
■ To remove all filters, right-click a cell and click Remove Filter.
6 Do either of the following:

■ To save the filtered or sorted view into a report template to be
displayed in the Data Manager, click Save.
■ To restore the default view, click Reset.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Reports (General Settings Tree Node)
Configure AutoCAD P&ID DWG Settings

As part of your AutoCAD P&ID DWG setup, you can configure certain
behaviors to which all designers using this project adhere.

Configure End Connections and Line Behavior
You can assign an end connection to a valve or an inline instrument.
You can also assign an end connection after a valve or inline instrument is
placed in a drawing. If the symbol for an end connection changes, the change
is displayed in the drawing.
Understanding End Connections

You can delete an end connection, but only if the end connection is not
currently assigned to a valve or inline instrument. If an end connection is
assigned to an object when it is deleted, the graphical representation of the
end connection is removed from the drawing. The value assigned to the End
Connection property of the valve or inline instrument is removed.
NOTE The four default end connections, Flanged, Socket Welded, Unspecified,
and Welded, cannot be deleted.
End connections display the type of connection (flanged, socket welded, or

welded) for a valve or inline instrument in an AutoCAD P&ID drawing. The
type of connection is tracked as a property. End connections inherit their
graphical properties (such as layer, color, and line weight) from the valve or
inline instrument with which they are inserted.
You can configure settings that control how lines display when they cross
each other and the behavior of grips for a selected schematic line.
Drawing behaviors you can configure include:
■ End connection behavior for valves and inline instruments
■ Display style of crossing lines
■ Behavior of a gap symbol and scale
■ Standoff distance between a line and a component
■ Orthogonal and implied cornering behavior of schematic lines
■ Display behavior of vertex grips
■ Connection behavior of inline components when the component moves
To define a new end connection

Project Setup.
Configure End Connections and Line Behavior | 33

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click End
Connections.
3 On the End Connections pane, click Add Block.
4 In the New End Connection dialog box, under End Connection Name,
enter a name for the new end connection.
5 Click Browse.

6 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, locate and click a drawing that
contains the block you want to use for the end connection symbol. Click
Open.
7 In the Select Block dialog box, in the Available Blocks list, click a block
to use for the end connection.
The Preview pane displays a preview image of the block you selected.
8 Click OK.
9 In the New End Connection dialog box, click OK.
10 In the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.
To modify a block used for an end connection

Project Setup.
Connections.
3 On the End Connections pane, in the drop-down list, click an end

connection to modify.

4 Click Edit Block.
5 In the Block Editor, edit the block representing the selected end
connection.
NOTE If you are not familiar with editing a block, see “Use the Block Editor”
in the AutoCAD Help system.
6 When you are finished modifying the end connection block, click Close
on the Block Editor.
The changes you made to the block are saved in projSymbolStyle.dwg.
7 Click OK.
To remove an end connection

When you remove an end connection block, you also delete the end
connection from the project.

NOTE You cannot remove default end connections.

Project Setup.
Connections.
3 On the End Connections pane, in the drop-down list, click an end

connection to delete.
4 Click Remove Block.
5 In the Confirm Delete message, click Yes.
To assign an end connection to a valve or inline instrument

Project Setup.

2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID Class Definitions.
3 Continue to expand the list until you find the valve or inline instrument
to which you want to assign the end connection.
4 Select a valve or inline instrument (for example: Ball Valve).
5 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name

column, locate EndConnections.
6 In the EndConnections Default Value property, in the drop-down list,

click an end connection type.
7 Click OK.
To configure line behavior

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Line
Settings.
3 On the Line Settings pane, under Line Crossing Style, click Gap or Loop.

4 In the Gap/Loop Width box, enter a number to represent the amount of
space, in units, between two crossing lines. (Units refers to project units,
such as inches for imperial or millimeters for metric.)
5 Under Manual Gap Symbol, in the Symbol drop-down list, click a gap
symbol to use to represent a gap between lines.
6 Under Standoff Distance, in the Standoff X box, enter a number to set

the shortest possible distance, in units, that designers can draw between
a 90-degree elbow and a piece of equipment.
7 Under Schematic Line Grips, in the Grip Settings drop-down list, click a
grip behavior option.
8 To control automatic cornering behavior of orthogonal lines when they

connect to a component, select the check box labeled Create Ortho
Schematic Lines.
If this option is selected, ORTHO is temporarily turned on when the
SLINE command is used, and corner points are implied. If this option is
cleared, ORTHO is turned off temporarily when a designer enters the
SLINE command.

9 To control whether inline components are moved with schematic lines,
select the check box labeled Maintain Sline Connection When Moving
Assets.
If this option is selected, inline components move with the schematic
line to which they are connected. If this option is cleared, inline
components become detached when schematic lines are moved.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
End Connections (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)
Line Settings (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)
Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID)

Create custom settings for export and import that include any combination
of AutoCAD P&ID classes.
Share AutoCAD P&ID data with other applications by mapping AutoCAD
Plant 3D properties to correspond with similar properties in other programs.
Understand Export and Import Settings

You can export and import data using the default Displayed Data setting. This
setting exports and imports data for the active node in the Data Manager tree
view, with or without child node data.

In some cases, however, you want to be more selective with the data you
export and import. For example, you want to export only nozzles and valves.
You can use export and import settings to create custom settings that include
only the classes you choose.
You can also use export and import settings to move data to and from other
applications. You use external data mapping to map classes and properties to
the data structure in the other application.
You create export and import settings at the project level in Project Setup.
You use one setting for both export and import, which simplifies the process
of exporting data, externally editing the data, and importing the data back.
After you create an export and import setting, you can later modify or delete
it.
Export to and Import from Other Programs

One common reason to create a custom export and import setting is for
exporting and importing data to and from other programs. For example, you
want to export data to AutoCAD Electrical. Because the two programs have
different data structures, you map the classes and properties in AutoCAD Plant
3D to the classes and properties in the other program.
Set up External Data Mapping

You set up external data mapping in the Export and Import Settings dialog
box when creating or modifying an export and import setting. You specify
the classes and properties to include and enter external class and property
names. You also identify each property to be used as a unique identifier (UID)
for each specified class, and map property values.
A one-to-one mapping between every class and property is not required. Many
Plant 3D objects can be mapped to the same external object. To achieve this
mapping, enter the same external object name for all Plant 3D objects that
correspond to the same objects in other applications.
For example, AutoCAD Electrical uses a single table called COMP for all
equipment. AutoCAD Plant 3D, however, uses numerous tables and objects
to classify the various categories of equipment. While interacting with
AutoCAD Electrical, you map every Equipment object to an external object
called COMP. You then map every equipment property to some common
properties in COMP.
Export and import share common property value mappings. When you export
data, the mappings transform data to a format required by the external
application. When you import data, the mappings transform the external data
Configure Settings for Export and Import (P&ID) | 41

into a format required by AutoCAD Plant 3D. Thus mappings provide a
two-way mechanism for a continuous data exchange between applications.
In some cases, applications can contain erroneous or duplicate data. The
import and export process uses a unique identifier (UID) to identify specific
records. If the imported data contains duplicate records, the most recent
records overwrite the previous records. AutoCAD Plant 3D generally prohibits
duplicate records. However, if AutoCAD Plant 3D encounters duplicate records,
it exports them as multiple records and the importing application coordinates
them.
To create export and import settings

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Export
and Import Settings.
3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click New.
4 In the New Export and Import Settings dialog box, under Name, enter a
name for the export and import setting (for example: Pipe Lines and Signal
Lines).

5 Under Description, enter a description for the setting (for example: Export
only pipe lines and signal lines).
6 In the P&ID Classes tree view, expand the nodes to display the P&ID
Classes you want to export and import (for example: expand Engineering
Items and Lines. Select all check boxes under both Pipe Line Segments and
Signal Line Segments).

7 If this setting is for exporting to and importing from another program,
see “To set up external data mapping.” Otherwise, click OK.
To set up external data mapping

You can map property values when creating export and import settings or by
modifying an existing setting.

Project Setup.
3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click an existing setting. Click
Modify.
4 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Name, enter a new name (optional).
■ Under Description, enter a new description (optional).
■ In the tree view, expand the classes and select the check box for the
class you want to configure for external data mapping.

■ Under External Data Mapping, in the External Class Name box, enter
a name that corresponds to similar classes in the other program. For
example, if the program equates Pipes with Pipe Lines, select the Pipe
Lines check box in the tree view and enter Pipes in the External Class
Name box. Repeat this process for each class you want to configure
for external data mapping.

■ Under Properties, in the External Property column, click the external
property you want to change. Enter the new name (for example: click
the ModelNumber external property and enter Model).
Repeat this process for each external property you want to change.
■ To make a property a unique identifier (UID), select the UID check

box corresponding to the property. PnPID is a UID by default. If the
other program recognizes a different identifier, you can change this
setting.
■ In the Value Mapping column, click the cell corresponding to the

property you want to map. Click the [...] button.
5 In the Map Property Values dialog box, do the following:

■ In the P&ID Property column, enter the P&ID property values (for
example: in the P&ID Property ModelNumber column, enter P1, P2,
S1, and S2).

■ In the External Property column, enter corresponding property values
for the other program (for example: enter Model, Model2, Model1, and
Model2).

6 Click OK.
7 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, repeat the value
mapping process for each property you want to map. When you finish
mapping, click OK to close the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog
box.
NOTE When you use this Export and Import Setting for exporting data to another
program, all Pipe Line ModelNumber P&ID properties correspond with the Model
properties of the other program. The P1, P2, S1, and S2 P&ID values associated
with the ModelNumber P&ID properties correspond with the Model1, Model2,
Model1, and Model2 values associated with the Model properties in the other
program, respectively.
To modify an export and import setting

Modify.
3 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, you can:
■ Edit the name of the Export and Import Settings. For example, under
Name, change Pipe Lines and Signal Lines to Pipe Lines.
■ Edit the description. For example, under Description, change Export

only Pipe Lines and Signal Lines to Export only Pipe Lines.
4 In the P&ID Classes tree view, modify the P&ID Classes to export and
import. For example, you can clear the check boxes for Signal Line Segments
and all its child classes.

5 On the External Data Mapping pane, modify the class name in the
External Class Name box, if necessary. Make other changes, as needed,
to the external data mapping settings.
6 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Export and Import Settings (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)
Set P&ID Paths

You can change the default locations for accessing P&ID project data (such
as drawings and templates).
The Paths panel includes:
■ P&ID DWG directory. Sets the location of the project drawing directory.
■ Project package. Defines the P&ID classes and properties used in a project.
WARNING It is strongly recommended that you do not manually change the

project package file (ProcessPower.dcfx) and reload the changed file. You can
edit the file and reload it, but you do so at the risk of corrupting your project.
■ Symbols and styles. Displays (read-only) the location where symbols are
stored.
■ Drawing template (DWT) file. Defines the template file that is used when
new drawings in a project are created.
Set P&ID Paths | 51

NOTE It is strongly recommended that you set your project library locations and
paths to a shared network location and set security measures to prevent users from
accessing or changing certain project folders or files. Using Microsoft security
settings, you can lock the project files that you do not want users to modify. For
more information about Windows security settings, see Windows Help.
To set or change the project file location

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Paths.
3 On the Paths pane, do one of the following:

■ Enter location paths for the P&ID drawing directory and the drawing
template file directory.
■ Click the [...] button to the right of each box to browse to the location
where you want to store the directory and file.
NOTE The other paths were set when the project was created. You cannot
edit those paths here.
4 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Paths (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager

(P&ID)
You can customize the way the Data Manager displays data for P&ID projects
or drawings.
You can create customized views for both P&ID and 3D project and drawing
data. This section describes the process for P&ID data.
For 3D modeling information, see Configure Customized Views for the Data
Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150.
You can view data in the default class hierarchy or create new views that
display the data arranged in a property-based hierarchy.
When you create a Data Manager view, select the class property for each level
of the hierarchy. For example, arrange a tree with Manufacturer at the top
level, Model Number at the second level, and Supplier at the third level. In a
KKS environment, you can base a view on a Unit, SystemCode, SystemNumber,
EquipmentCode, and EquipmentNumber hierarchy.
NOTE For best results, select properties for customized views from the same level
of the class hierarchy. For example, select manufacturer, model number, and
supplier from the Engineering Items level.
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) | 53

To create a customized view for the Data Manager

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Data
Manager Configuration.
3 On the Customized Views pane, click Create View.
4 Under A New Customized View, do the following:

■ In the Name box, enter a name for your view. This name replaces the
name A New Customized View.
■ To define the scope of your view, in the Scope drop-down list, click
either Project Data or Drawing Data.
■ Click New Level.

5 In the Select Class Property dialog box, do the following:
■ In the Class tree view, expand the appropriate node and child nodes
to locate and click a class for Level 1 (for example: Engineering Items).
■ In the Properties list, click a class property (for example: Manufacturer).
■ Click OK.
6 Click New Level and repeat the previous step to add the number of levels
you want in the customized view. When you finish adding levels to the
customized view, in the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.
NOTE For best results, select properties shared by all components to be displayed
in the customized view.
To delete a customized view for the Data Manager

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand P&ID DWG Settings. Click Data
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) | 55

3 On the Customized Views pane, click the customized view you want to
delete. Click Delete View.
4 In the Delete Customized View message, click Yes.
To open a customized view in the Data Manager
1 On the ribbon, click the Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager.
2 In the Data Manager, click in the drop-down list and select a customized
view.
The Data Manager tree view displays the customized data view.
3 To display relevant component details on the right pane, click a node in

the tree view (for example: ModelNumber-100).

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
New Customized View (Data Manager Configuration)
Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines

Class definitions specify the attributes and properties of a component or line.
To create most equipment, instruments, lines, inline items, and nozzles, you
start with an existing component and edit its properties.
Class definitions are divided into the following four families:
■ Engineering Items. Includes equipment, nozzles, instrumentation, inline

assets, and lines.
■ Non Engineering Items. Includes items that cannot be purchased, or are

not counted in reports (including flow arrows, gap, actuators, connectors,
annotations, line breakers, and so on).
■ Pipe Line Groups. Includes pipe lines.
■ Signal Line Groups. Includes signal lines used with instruments.
You can modify existing class definitions or create your own based on existing
class definitions. For example, if your company uses a pump symbol that is
not provided with the program, you can create your own customized pump
symbol.
When you create class definitions based on a family or parent, the new
definition inherits the properties and settings of the family or parent.
Set Up Class Definitions for Components and Lines | 57

You can modify the following properties for class definitions:
■ Symbol or line settings. The name of the symbol or line style; the name
of the block controlling the geometry that is displayed in the drawing after
a component is inserted; the layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, and plot
style; the lineweight of a component when it is inserted; and other settings
that affect the insertion of a component or how a schematic line is drawn.
■ Properties. The values assigned to a component or line class definition to

determine how it looks and behaves in a drawing, and the values that are
attached to a component or line (such as default value, description,
substitution, supported standards, and so on).
■ Tag format. The information that comprises a unique tag for a component
or line.
■ Annotation. The text and symbol settings that annotate a component or

line.
You can also create and rename class definitions, and purge any that are not
used in a project drawing.
To create a class definition for a component or line

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class definition
you want to use as the basis for the new class definition.

NOTE Select a class definition that most closely represents the class definition
you want to create. The node you select is used as the template for the new
class definition.
4 Right-click the selected class definition. Click New.
5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a class name and a display name (if
necessary) for the new class definition.
NOTE Use only letters, numbers, and underscores for class names. Limit
names to 31 characters. Longer class names can cause problems during export
and import.
Also, do not start a class name with a number.
6 Click OK.
7 In the tree view, expand the node where the new class definition is added,
and click the new class definition.
8 On the Class Settings pane, make the desired changes.
9 Click OK.
To modify a class definition for a component or line

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you find the purchasable item whose
definition you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤
Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).

4 On the Class Settings pane, do either of the following.
■ If you are modifying a class definition, under Symbol, add, modify,
or remove the symbols for the selected class definition.
■ If you are modifying a line definition, under Line, edit the properties
for the selected line style.
5 In the Properties, do the following (as needed):

■ In the Display Name column, change the value for the Display Name
property. (This information is displayed in the Data Manager.)
■ In the Default Value column, change the value for the Default Value
property.
■ Add or remove custom properties as needed for the class or line

definition.
■ Change the values of other properties as needed (such as tagging

format, annotation style, acquisition, substitution, supported
standards, graphical style name, and so on).
6 Under Tag Format, add, modify, or remove tagging formats associated

with the selected class or line definition.
7 Under Annotation, add, modify, or remove annotation styles associated

with the selected class or line definition.

8 Click OK.
To rename a class definition for a component or line

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class whose
definitions you want to rename (for example: Engineering Items ➤
Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).
4 NOTE You can rename only those class definitions that do not have a plus
sign (+) next to them under P&ID Class Definitions. For example, you cannot
rename Blowers under Equipment but you can rename Centrifugal Blower under
Blowers.
5 Right-click the class definition you want to rename. Click Rename.
6 Enter the new class name for the class definition. Press ENTER.
NOTE It is recommended that you use class names that are not greater than
31 characters. Longer class names can cause problems during export and
import.

NOTE If a class definition is used in a drawing that is part of the project, a
message is displayed indicating that it cannot be renamed.
7 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
P&ID Class Definitions (P&ID DWG Settings Tree Node)
Set Up Symbol and Line Settings

Class definitions for components and lines control their graphical display in
a P&ID drawing.
Class definitions for components and lines contain two types of settings and
properties—graphical and non-graphical. The graphical settings and properties
control how the component or line is represented in a P&ID drawing.
Non-graphical properties distinguish one component or line from another.
■ For a component, you can specify the symbol and settings that control
the insertion behavior of a component.
■ For a line, you can specify whether flow arrows indicate the flow direction
through a pipe.
You can create class definitions for both components and lines for general
graphical properties such as layers, colors, schematic line types, linetypes, and
lineweights.

You can also set the tagging prompt for both components and lines to one of
the following options:
■ Prompt for tag during component creation
■ Automatically assign an auto-generated tag
■ Not a tagged component
The DIN standard uses multiple lines to represent oil, air, solid fuels, and so
on. If your project is based on the DIN 2481 standard, and the pipe line you
want to change has multiple lines, change Smart Line Type to Mline.
NOTE The Mline Smart Line Type does not support conversion of arcs to multiple
lines. When converting AutoCAD lines as P&ID schematic lines, arcs remain as
single lines with their existing linetype.
To change the tagging prompt for components and lines

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component or
line whose linetype you want to change.
4 On the Class Settings pane, do one of the following:

■ If you are modifying a component, under Symbol, in the drop-down
list, click the symbol you want to modify. Click Edit Symbol.

■ If you are modifying a line, under Line, click Edit Line.
5 In the Settings dialog box, under General Style Properties, locate and
click Tagging prompt. In the drop-down list, click one of the following
options:
■ Prompt for tag during component creation
■ Automatically assign an auto-generated tag
■ Not a tagged component
6 Click OK.
When designers place the component in a drawing or create a schematic line,

it is displayed with the linetype you defined here.
To change linetypes for components and lines

Project Setup.
line whose linetype you want to change.


click Linetype. In the drop-down list, click a new linetype.
NOTE If your project is based on the DIN 2481 standard, and the pipe line
you want to change has multiple lines, change Smart Line Type to Mline.
Then click Mline style. In the drop-down list, click a new multiline style. The
DIN standard uses multiple lines to represent oil, air, solid fuels, and so on.
6 Click OK.

it is displayed with the linetype you defined here.
To change layers and colors for components and lines

Project Setup.
line whose color or layer you want to change.


click Layer. In the drop-down list, click a new layer. Locate and click
Color. In the drop-down list, click a new color.
6 Click OK.

it is displayed on the layer and in the color you defined here.
To change lineweights for components and lines

Project Setup.
line whose lineweight you want to change.

click Line Weight. In the drop-down list, click a new lineweight.

6 Click OK.

it is displayed with the line weight you defined here.
To change line style for a pipe line that is represented by multiple lines (DIN
standard)

Project Setup.
line whose linestyle you want to change.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line
5 In the Line Settings dialog box, do the following:

■ Under General Style Properties, locate and click Smart line type. In
the drop-down list, click an Mline.
■ Under General Style Properties, locate and click Mline style. In the
drop-down list, click a new multiline style.
6 Click OK.

it is displayed with the line style you defined here.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Symbol (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)
Line (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)
Symbol Settings Dialog Box (Symbol)
Line Settings Dialog Box (Line)
Configure Symbols for Components

Symbols are graphical representations of components in a P&ID drawing. You
use symbols to control the insertion behavior when a component is added to
a P&ID drawing.
If your company uses a set of standard blocks, you can use those blocks to
define the symbols assigned to a component.
You can create new symbols for a component or modify existing symbols. Use
the Block Editor to edit a symbol block or to define settings that control how
the symbol is inserted. After you define a symbol, you can specify the default
symbol that a component uses.
You can also remove the symbol for a class definition. Before you remove a
symbol, the program checks to see if the symbol is assigned to the class
definition. If the symbol is assigned, you are notified that it cannot be removed.
If a symbol is assigned to a value in a symbol list or to a component in a P&ID
drawing, the value can be removed from the symbol list. Also, the value can
be designated as unassigned for the property. In both cases, the visual fidelity
to the component in the drawing is maintained.

Scale Components
Most components in AutoCAD Plant 3D are at a scale of 1:1, and are either
unitless or in the unit format based on the selected standard. The scale factor
for inserting a component is defined as a property of the symbol that is
assigned to the component class definition.
When defining the scale factor for a component, you choose whether the
component is scaled uniformly. Most blocks are scaled uniformly along the
X and Y axis. If, however, you want to create multiple tank components with
different widths while using a single block for the different-sized tank
components, you can choose not to scale uniformly.
Understand Attachment Points on Components

Attachment points are snap points on a component that connect multiple
components and connect a schematic line to a component. Attachment points
validate that when a component is placed in a drawing, it is actually connected
with schematic lines.
Attachment points help to define the placement and orientation for a
component. When you select a component for placement on a drawing, you
place it by its block origin (0,0) by default. You can switch from the origin to
an attachment point before placing the component by pressing the spacebar
or ENTER key. Attachment points define directional information for
components that have an upstream and downstream direction associated with
them (for example: check valves).
Attachment points are required to specify, label, and correctly apply end
connections. They are used in components such as pumps and blowers to
determine that the connections in a drawing represent the available
connections on the real-world items. Inline components such as valves have
attachment points that provide precise control over line connections. When
you place an inline component on a schematic line, its attachment points
ensure that the schematic line is properly broken.
Attachment points serve as the recommended connect points for a component.
If you do not use attachment points, the extents of the block determine where
the line is trimmed to connect to the component. It is recommended that
you use attachment points in the blocks that you create. Also, do not remove
or change the order of the attachment points in the blocks that are included
with AutoCAD Plant 3D.

Define Attachment Points
You define attachment points in a block with the Block Editor and Point
parameters. Each Point parameter that you want to use as an attachment point
must follow a specific labeling convention, "AttachmentPoint" + [Numeric
Suffix]. For example, the first attachment point for a block would be labeled
AttachmentPoint1, the second attachment point would be labeled
AttachmentPoint2, and so on.
If you are defining an attachment point in a block for a valve or inline
instrument, also define the rotation angle of the end connection by using the
labeling convention "AttachmentPoint" + [Numeric Suffix] + ":EndCode" +
[Rotation Angle in Degrees].
For example, a block has a Point parameter with the label
AttachmentPoint1:EndCode90 for one of its attachment points. The label
AttachmentPoint1:EndCode90 indicates that it is the first attachment point for
the block and that the end connection at the attachment point is rotated 90
degrees. If you do not want to use end connections with a block for a valve
or inline instrument, use the labeling convention "AttachmentPoint" +
[Numeric Suffix].
Node points are added to all attachment points to make drawing and
connecting lines easier. To snap to an attachment point on a component, you
use the Node snap. The Node snap also snaps to a point object, dimension
definition point, or dimension text origin contained in a block or drawing.
Orient Attachment Points

Most inline components, such as those on the Fittings and Valves tabs of the
PIP tool palette, are horizontally oriented by default. Their attachment points
fall on the X axis, following the flow of a horizontal line either to the left or
right. Some components, however, are oriented by default along the Y axis.
If you place such a component (for example: a flame arrestor) on a horizontal
line, it automatically rotates to align with the line direction.
When you configure symbols for components, remember the following
guidelines:
■ The imaginary vector drawn from Attachment Point 1 (AP1) to Attachment

Point 2 (AP2) defines the direction of the component.
■ Most components are horizontally oriented, with the vector along the X
axis.
■ Some components, such as Flame Arrestors, have AP1 to AP2 along the
positive Y axis. These components are vertically oriented.

■ If the vector does not follow the X or Y direction, it is ignored.
Understand Join Types

The Join Type property setting for a component symbol defines whether the
component can be inserted into an existing line. Join type settings also define
how a line breaks when a component is inserted and whether adding the
component to an existing line creates a new line group.
Symbol properties for join type include the following options:
■ Endline. Typically used for components that are placed at the end of a line
(for example: caps or blind flanges), or placed in a drawing before
connecting lines to them. Symbols with this property setting do not insert
into lines.
■ Inline. Setting for components that are regularly inserted into pipe or signal
lines. Components with this join type move when the line is moved,
behaving as part of the line. If the line is deleted, the component is deleted
along with the line.
■ Segment Breaker. Symbols with this join type can be inserted into lines.
When these components are inserted, they break a line, and the line group
and line number is retained for both line segments. For example, a reducer
or a relief valve can break a line so that the line have different properties
on either side of the component.
■ Segment Group Breaker. Components with this join type (for example:
ISO pumps, compressors, and blowers) can be inserted into a line and
breaks the line into two line groups with different line numbers.
■ No Join. Does not connect with lines (for example: agitators).
To add a symbol to a component class definition

Project Setup.
line whose symbol you want to change.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click a
symbol to use as the template for the new symbol.
5 Under Symbol, click Add Symbol.
6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click Symbol
Name. Enter a new name for the symbol.
7 Under Symbol Properties, click Block. Click the [...] button.
8 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and select the drawing
that contains the block you want to use. Click Open.
9 In the Select Block dialog box, click a block in the Available Blocks list.
Click OK.

10 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under General Styles Properties and
Other Properties, modify the properties as needed. Click OK.
To set the default symbol for a component class definition

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the component
whose default symbol you want to edit.

4 On the Class Settings pane, in the Property Name column, locate
GraphicalStyleName.
5 In the Default Value column, in the drop-down list, click the symbol you
want to use as the default symbol when inserting the component into a
P&ID drawing.
6 Click OK.
To edit a symbol for a component class definition

Project Setup.
whose symbol you want to edit.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, click
the symbol that you want to edit.
5 Click Edit Symbol.
6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, modify the properties for the symbol.
7 Click OK.

To remove a symbol for a component definition

Project Setup.
whose symbol you want to remove.
the symbol that you want to remove.
5 Click Remove Symbol.

If the symbol is already assigned to a class definition, a message is
displayed informing you that the symbol cannot be removed.
6 Click OK.
To edit the block associated to a symbol

Project Setup.
whose symbol you want to edit.

the symbol that contains the block that you want to edit.
5 Under Symbol, click Edit Block.
6 In the Block Editor, edit the geometry for the block as needed.
7 Click Close Block Editor.
8 Click OK.
To set the scale factor for a component

Project Setup.
whose scale factor you want to change.

the symbol whose scale factor you want to change.
5 Click Edit Symbol.
6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Other Properties, locate and
click Symbol Scale. Enter a scale factor.
7 To set prompting behavior for designers to scale a component when they

insert it in a drawing, click Scale on Insert. In the drop-down list, click
Yes.
8 To set scaling behavior, click Scale Mode. In the drop-down list, click
either of the following:
■ Uniform scaling: Sets the component to scale proportionately both
vertically and horizontally.
■ XY independent scaling: Sets the component to scale independently

both vertically and horizontally, depending on which direction you
move the cursor.
9 Click OK to close each dialog box.
When designers place this symbol in a drawing, the symbol has the scaling
behavior you defined here.

To create a component and add it to the tool palette
NOTE Before you start this procedure, make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayed
and that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new
component. For example, if you are adding a pump to the tool palette, make sure
that the Equipment tab is active.

Project Setup.
whose properties most closely match the component you want to create.
The component that you select is used as the template for the new
component definition.
4 Right-click the selected class definition. Click New.

5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new class definition.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Project Setup tree view, expand the list until you locate where the
new class definition was added. Select the new component definition.
8 On the Class Settings pane, make the desired changes to the new
definition symbol settings, properties, tag format, and annotation style.
9 Under Symbol, click Add to Tool Palette.

The new class definition is added to the active tool palette. The new tool
can be used just like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D,
and is included in reports.
NOTE If the tool palette is not open when you click Create Tool, the
component is added to the bottom of the tab last displayed.
10 Click OK.
To create a component with attachment points and add it to the tool palette
The following procedure illustrates how to create a pump (an endline
component) and define two attachment points (where schematic lines will
snap). You can create other components using the same general steps. Not all
components require attachment points (for example, tanks do not require
them) unless you want to define them.
NOTE Before you start this procedure, make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayed
in your drawing and that the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to
add the new component. For example, if you are adding a pump to the tool
palette, make sure that the Equipment tab is active.
1 Create a new block (for example: a horizontal centrifugal pump) and save
the drawing file. If you do not know how to create a block, see “Create
and Store Blocks” in the AutoCAD Help system.

2 On the ribbon, click Blocks & References tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Block
Editor.
3 In the Block Editor dialog box, click Current Drawing. Click OK.
4 Turn off Midpoint snaps if they are on.
5 On the Parameters tab of the Block Authoring palette, click Point

Parameter, and place a parameter (for example: on the inlet of the pump).
6 Right-click the parameter. Click Properties.
7 In the Properties palette, under Property Labels, click Position Label. Enter
attachmentpoint1.
8 Click a blank space in the drawing, and then press ESC on the keyboard.
9 Create another parameter (for example: at the outlet of the pump), and
label it attachmentpoint2.
10 Save the changes and close the Block Editor.
whose symbol you want to edit (for example: Equipment ➤ Pumps ➤
Centrifugal Sump Pump).
13 Right-click the class definition. Click New.

NOTE Instead of creating a new class definition, you can also add a new
symbol to an existing class definition. To add a new symbol to an existing
class definition, see “To add a symbol to a component class definition.”
14 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new class definition
(for example: horizontal centrifugal pump).
15 Click OK.
16 Expand the node where the new class definition was added, and select
the new class definition.
17 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, click Add Symbol.
18 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, do the

following:
■ In the Symbol Name box, enter a name for the symbol that is added
to the new class definition.
■ Click Block, and then click the [...] button. Browse to the drawing you
created in step 1. Click that drawing and in the Select Block dialog
box, click a symbol name (block) in the list. Click OK.
■ (Optional) Make other changes to the settings of the component you

created.
■ Click OK.
19 On the Class Settings pane, change the properties, tag format, and
annotation style for the new class definition.
20 Under Symbol, click Add to Tool Palette.

The new component is added to the active tool palette. The new tool can
be used like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D. It is also
included in reports.

component is added to the bottom of the palette tab that was last displayed.
You can move it by dragging and placing it in a new location in the palette.
You can also copy or cut it and paste it to another P&ID tool palette.
21 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Configure the Appearance of Lines

You can set up the arrow and flag behavior of lines.
You set up whether a flow arrow is displayed when a line is added to a drawing,
the type of flow arrow symbol displayed, and whether to prompt for the
insertion of a flag.
To set up line arrow behavior

Project Setup.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the line style whose
line arrow behavior you want to set (for example: Equipment ➤ Lines ➤
Pipe Line Segments ➤ Primary Line Segment).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line.
5 In the Line Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click Flow Arrow
Style. In the drop-down list, click a symbol in the list. Click OK.
6 Click OK.
To set up automatic prompting for flag insertion (DIN standard only)

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the line style whose
line behavior you want to set (for example: Equipment ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe
Line Segments ➤ Primary Line Segment).

4 In the Class Settings pane, under Line, click Edit Line.
5 In the Line Settings dialog box, under Symbol Properties, click Flag
Prompt. In the drop-down list, click Automatically Prompt to Insert Flag.
Click OK.
6 Click OK.
To add a flow arrow symbol

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click Flow Arrow (for
example: Non-Engineering Items ➤ Flow Arrow).
5 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, Symbol Properties, locate and click
Symbol Name. Enter a new name for the symbol.
6 Under Symbol Properties, locate and click Block. Click the [...] button.
7 In the Select Block Drawing dialog box, browse to and click the drawing
NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol. The block
you want to use must be in the drawing file that you select.

8 In the Select Block dialog box, under Available Blocks, select a block.
Click OK.
Other Properties, change the properties as needed. Click OK.
To create a line and add it to the tool palette
NOTE make sure the P&ID tool palette is displayed in your drawing and that the
active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new line.

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you find Pipe Line Segments or Signal
Line Segments (Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments or Signal
Line Segments).
4 Right-click either Pipe Line Segments or Signal Line Segments. Click New.
5 In the Create Class Definition dialog box, enter a name for the new line
definition.
NOTE You can create a line class definition under Pipe Line Segments or
Signal Line Segments only.
6 Click OK.
7 In the Project Setup tree view, expand the tree until you reach the new
line class definition, and click it.
8 On the Class Settings pane, change the settings, properties, tag format,
and annotation style for the new line class definition.
9 Under Line, click Add to Tool Palette.

The new line class definition is added to the active tool palette. It can be
used just like the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D, and is
included in reports.
component is still added to the bottom of the last-active tool palette.
10 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Set Up Properties
Properties store information about a component or line that is in a P&ID
drawing.
Both components and lines have properties that control how the component
and line look when placed into a P&ID drawing. Properties also store
non-graphical information that can be extracted from the drawing. Properties
for a component or line class definition can be defined as one of the following
data types:
■ String. Permits a free-form text value for a property.
■ Numeric. Verifies that only a positive or negative number is entered for a

property.
■ Boolean. Permits a choice between true and false.
■ Symbol List. (unavailable for Plant 3D objects) Defines a list of choices that
control the symbol for a component in a P&ID drawing. This option is
available only for P&ID objects when more than one symbol is associated
with a class.
■ Selection List. Defines a list of property values. If a value is not displayed

in the predefined list, it can be entered as free-form text.

■ Acquisition. Defines a rule stating that a component property acquires its
value from another property. For example, a rule states that a hand valve
acquires its size from the corresponding property of a line. The source can
be chosen from class, project, or drawing properties.
NOTE When you set up properties for a project, make sure no one else is
accessing that project. If others are working in the project, your changes are
not saved.
To add a property to a class definition

Project Setup.
whose property you want to add.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property. The name
cannot contain any spaces.
■ Under Display Name, enter the name you want to be displayed for
the new property when using the Data Manager or Properties palette.
■ Under Choose a Type, select one of the available data types.
6 Click OK.
If you selected Selection List or Symbol List, the appropriate dialog box
is displayed to let you create either a selection list or symbol list.
If you selected Acquisition, the Select Data Source dialog box is displayed,
where you select the source from which the property value is acquired.
7 Click OK.
To modify a property for a class definition

Project Setup.
whose property you want to edit.

4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate and click the property
you want to edit. Do one of the following:
■ Under Property Description, click the box and enter a new description.
■ Under Default Value, either click the box and enter a new value or,
in the drop-down list, click a value. If the default value is Acquisition,
in the drop-down list, click an appropriate item.
■ If the property type is List, click Edit to change the selection or symbol
list that is assigned to the property.
■ Under Acquisition, click the [...] button and select Add acquisition
rule. In the Select Data Source dialog box, select the source where the
property value is acquired.
NOTE To change the name of the property or its type, delete the property
and then add it again.
5 Click OK.
To delete a property from a class definition

Project Setup.
whose property you want to delete.

you want to delete. Click Remove.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Properties (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)
Set Up Property Acquisition (P&ID)

When you select Acquisition as a property type, you set up a rule stating that
the property acquires its value from another property.
The acquisition source can be another class, project, or drawing property.
Acquisition ensures consistency among component property values. If the
source value changes, all components set to acquire that value change as well.
Property acquisition is also useful for maintaining consistent tagging. When
you change a source value, tag formats that are based on acquired properties
update automatically throughout the project.
Understand Property Acquisition Rules

You can select without restriction any drawing property or project property
as the source of an acquisition rule. When you select a class property as the
source, however, make sure that the acquiring class and the source class are
connected.

For example, a valve can acquire a size value from a line because the two are
connected in a relationship. A tank and a furnace, however, have no direct
relationship to one another, so you cannot set up an acquisition rule between
them.
You can set up property acquisition rules when the following relationships
exist:
■ Line and inline asset
■ Line and start asset
■ Line and end asset
■ Line and arrow
■ Annotated and annotation
■ Line and break
■ Line and page connector
■ Line and nozzle
■ Pipe line group and pipe line
■ Signal line group and signal line
■ Pipe line group and signal line group (if you manually associated the groups
using SLGROUPEDIT). See Understand Acquisition Between Signal Line
Groups and Pipe Line Groups on page 93.
■ Connector and connector
■ Asset and non-engineering (only between a control valve and its actuator)
The following properties have acquisition rules set by default. You can view
them when you create a new project:
Acquisition Property Source Property
HandValves.Size PipeLines.Size
HandValves.Spec PipeLines.Spec
InLineInstruments.Size PipeLines.Size
PipingSpecialtyItems.Size PipeLines.Size

PipingSpecialtyItems.Spec PipeLines.Spec
PipingFittings.Size PipeLines.Size
PipingFittings.Spec PipeLines.Spec
Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode

A property that is set to acquire its value from another property is in Acquire
mode. However, you can switch this property into Override mode and edit
the value manually. Once a property is in Override mode, its value is no longer
acquired from another source.
In the program, an icon next to the property indicates whether the property
is in Override mode or Acquire mode. The icons appear in the Properties
palette, the Data Manager, and the Assign Tag dialog box. When the Override
icon is displayed, you can edit the value.
■ The property is in Acquire mode.
■ The property is in Override mode
Understand Initialization Only

Select Acquisition (the default) to set up a property to acquire its value from
another property. You can also specify Initialization Only, which sets the
acquisition to occur only once (when the component is first initialized). After
initialization, the property switches to Override mode. When the property is
in Override mode, you can edit the value manually because it is no longer
Copy or Move Components with Acquired Properties Between Pipe Lines

When you set up a component property to acquire its value from another
property and then copy or move that valve onto another line, the valve
acquires the property value from the new line. However, if the valve property
you are moving is in Override mode, the specific value accompanies the valve.

Understand Acquisition from Multiple Sources
Many Acquisition relationships are simple one-to-one relationships. For
example, a gate valve has a one-to-one relationship with a pipe line and
acquires its size and spec from that line.
However, a component can have multiple acquisition sources. If these sources
have identical values or some identical values along with others that are
unspecified, a value can be acquired. Only when the sources have conflicting
values is the acquisition impossible. A question mark is displayed in place of
the acquired value.
For example, a three-way valve has a direct relationship with three different
pipe line segments. In such cases, as long as the different sources either have
the same spec value (for example: PVC) or the same value in combination with
blank values, the valve acquires the value. If the pipe line segments have
different specs, a question mark is displayed in the valve Spec field.
Understand Acquisition Between Signal Line Groups and Pipe Line Groups
By associating a signal line group with a pipe line group, you can set up the
signal line group to acquire any of that pipe line group properties. You
manually associate the groups using SLGROUPEDIT.
Although a pipe line group can be associated with many signal line groups, a
signal line group can be associated with only one pipe line group. Once an
association is established, the following capabilities are available:
■ The signal line group can acquire properties from the pipe line group.
■ Signal lines can then acquire these properties from their signal line group.
■ Components (such as general instruments) on the signal line can then

acquire these properties from the signal lines.
NOTE Association and dissociation are manual processes. If you change a drawing
that make a current association inappropriate, you can change the association. As
you change, all acquired properties are updated to reflect the current association.
Tags and annotations based on these properties are also updated automatically.
To set up a new property acquisition rule

Project Setup.

whose property acquisition rule you want to create (for example:
Engineering Items ➤ Inline Assets ➤ Hand Valves).

■ Under Property Name, enter the property name (for example:
PipelinesInsulationType).
■ Under Display Name, enter the new property name you want displayed
in the Data Manager or the Properties palette (for example:
PipelinesInsulationType).
■ Under Choose A Type, click Acquisition. Click OK.

6 In the Select Data Source dialog box, on the Class Properties tab, do the
following:
■ Under Categories, expand Engineering Items.
■ Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for
example: Pipe Line Segments).
■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: Insulation Type). Click

OK.
To add an acquisition rule for an existing property

Project Setup.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class containing
the property whose acquisition property you want to change (for example:
Engineering Items ➤ Equipment).

column, click a property (for example: Type).
5 In the Acquisition column, click in the box, and then click the [...] button.
Click Add Acquisition Rule.
following:
example: Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments).

OK.

To edit an acquisition rule for a property

Project Setup.
property you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤
Equipment).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, locate the property whose
acquisition rule you want to edit.
Select Edit Acquisition Rule.

following:
example: Engineering Items ➤ Lines ➤ Pipe Line Segments).

OK.
To remove an acquisition rule from a property

Project Setup.
property you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤
Equipment).
acquisition rule you want to remove.
Select Remove Acquisition Rule.
To override an acquisition property

You can override an acquisition property using the Data Manager or the
Properties palette. The following steps describe overriding an acquisition
property using the Properties palette.
1 In a drawing, right-click the component whose acquisition rule you want

to override. Click Properties.
2 In the Properties palette, locate the property you want to change. Click
the field in the right column.
3 Click Acquire Mode. In the flyout menu, click Override Mode.

4 Enter a new value.
5 Close the Properties Palette.
NOTE When you export data from the Data Manager to a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet, you can change the values of properties that are in Acquire
mode in Excel. When you import the file into the Data Manager and accept
the changes, the new values are displayed and the properties are automatically
changed to Override mode. See Import Modified Acquisition Properties on
page 531
To change how an existing property acquisition rule is applied

Project Setup.
property you want to change (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Inline
Assets ➤ Hand Valves).

column, locate the Size property row. In the Default Value column, click
the box to display the drop-down list. Do either of the following:
■ To set the property so that it always acquires its value from
PipeLines.Size, click Acquisition (the default).
■ To set the property so that its value is acquired once (when a valve is
first initialized), click Initialization Only.
NOTE After initialization, the property value of a valve changes to Override

mode. Users can edit the property value.
In the Acquisition column, the valve size is displayed as acquired from

PipeLines.Size. If PipeLines.Size has a value of 3, that value appears in the
Data Manager for this valve.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Set Up Selection Lists and Symbol Lists

Use selection lists and symbol lists to enforce standard sizes for items such as
pipe specs, pipe sizes, and instrument types, or when you want designers to
choose from a predefined set of options.
Understand Selection Lists

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a set of selection lists. You can add your own
items or delete items that are not relevant to your drafting environment. In
the Data Manager, designers can also enter their own values in the lists.
As part of your project setup tasks, you can set up new selection lists or change
the values of an existing list.
The selection lists you configure are added to the P&ID Class Definitions tree
in the Project Setup dialog box. There, you define the properties of engineering
items, non-engineering items, pipe line groups, and signal line groups. Those
properties are included in the component or line behavior when the
component or line is placed in a drawing.
Understand Symbol Lists

Symbol lists are like selection lists because you designate a value for a property.
But with a symbol list, you also define the symbol to represent a component
in a P&ID drawing. The symbols that you can select for a symbol list are

assigned to the selected class definition or are inherited from a class definition
family.
To create a selection list

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component or
line class definition (for example: Engineering Items).
5 In the Add Property dialog box, do the following;

■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property (for example:
Pump_Manufacturers). The name cannot contain any spaces.
the new property (for example: Pump Manufacturers) in the Data
Manager or Properties palette.
■ Under Choose a Type, select Selection List.

6 Click OK.
7 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click New Selection List.

8 In the Add Selection List dialog box, enter the name for the new selection
list (for example: Manufacturers). Click OK.
9 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click Add Row.
10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: Goulds)
and a description of the value, if necessary.
11 Continue adding rows until the selection list is complete.
12 Click OK.
On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, the selection list is displayed
for the selected class definition. The value displayed in the list is the
default value for that component.
To modify or delete items in a selection list

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a class definition
(for example: Engineering Items).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, Property Name, select the
property containing the selection list you want to modify. Click Edit.

5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click the property whose data
you want to change (for example: Manufacturers).
6 Click Add Row.
7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value and a description of the
new selection list entry (for example: Bechtel). Click OK.

In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Value, the new selection
list entry is added.
8 In the Selection List Property dialog box, select a value (for example:
Goulds). Click Delete Row.
To delete a selection list

Project Setup.
line class definition (for example: Engineering Items).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, select the property you
want to delete. Click Edit.
5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Selection List, click the
selection list you want to remove (for example: Manufacturers).
6 Click Delete Selection List.
8 Select another selection list to assign to the current property.

9 Click OK.
To create a symbol list

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a component (for
example: Centrifugal Blower).

■ Click Symbol List.
■ Specify a property name for the component or line (for example:

Blower_Manufacturers).
■ Specify a display name for the component or line (for example: Blower
Manufacturers).
■ Click OK.
NOTE To create a property that uses a symbol list, you assign more than one
symbol to the component class definition.
6 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, click Add Row.
7 In the Add Row dialog box, under Property Value, enter the name of the
new symbol list entry (for example: Jackson). Click OK.

8 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, under Property Value, click the
new entry. Under Block Value, in the drop-down list, click a symbol to
assign to the property value.
9 Continue adding rows until the symbol list is complete.
10 Click OK.
To modify or delete items in a symbol list

Project Setup.
example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment ➤ Blowers ➤ Centrifugal Blower).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, select the property

containing the symbol list that you want to modify. Click Edit.

5 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, click Add Row.
6 In the Add Row dialog box, enter a value for the new symbol list entry
(for example: Bechtel). Click OK.
The new symbol list entry is added to the selection list for the selected
property.
NOTE If you want to change the property value for an entry, delete the
original entry and add a new entry with a new value.
7 In the Symbol List Property dialog box, select the new symbol list entry.
Under Block Value, double-click and select the block style.
8 To delete an entry, select the entry (for example: Bechtel) and click Delete
Row.
NOTE If you delete a value that is currently assigned to a component in a

drawing, the value is removed from the symbol list, and any component
using that value is assigned no value. The symbol assigned to the block
remains, however, to maintain visual fidelity.
To modify the standards that support a class definition

Project Setup.

example: Centrifugal Blower).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, scroll down the list and
select the SupportedStandards property name.
5 Click Edit.
6 In the Standards dialog box, select which standards support the selected
class. Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Set Up Tag Formatting (P&ID)

You can set up tag formats to help designers apply tag elements consistently
throughout a project cycle.
Many projects require specific tag numbering formats for different components
and lines. You can define different tag numbering formats for your projects.
NOTE You can set the behavior of the Assign Tag dialog box for individual
components and lines. To set the tagging prompt, see Set Up Symbol and Line
Settings on page 62.
You can set up tag formats for equipment, valves, nozzles, instrumentation,
pipe lines, and pipe line groups by creating new tag formats or modifying
existing formats. You select an existing format on which to base the new
format. You can also create a new tag format.
Tag formats structure specific information for a component or line into a tag.
The information is stored in the tag as a property of a component or line. The
information can be displayed in an annotation callout when a component or
line is annotated. The block used for the annotation style determines what
information is displayed in the callout.
Even when an annotation includes a tag property and displays that property
on the drawing, the result is not a tag, but an annotation. Because the terms

tag and annotation are easily confused, they are described in detail in this
table.
A tag is: An annotation is:
A unique identifier for a component or line Information about a component or line

segment segment that appears on a drawing
Data Text and (optional) shapes
Located in the data cache Located in the drawing area
Unique Not necessarily unique
Viewable as a property in the Data Man- Viewable in the drawing

ager
A single entity for each component or line Not necessarily a single entity per compon-
segment ent or a line segment. (A component or
line segment can have multiple annota-
tions.)
Not text, but data. Comprised of sub parts Text defined in the annotation style block
as defined by the tag format. definition. This text can include the tag
property of a component or line segment.
This text is not a tag, but an annotation
Set Up Tag Formatting for a Class

Tag formats are set up for a class definition project-wide. Most of the default
tag formats tag items at the class definition level (for example: a class definition
type, such as equipment).
You can use the property of a class, drawing, or project in the tag format. For
example, a tag for a component can contain a class property such as Spec, a
drawing property such as Area, or a project property such as Project Number.
Tag formats are flexible. You can set them up to reflect the specific needs of
your company.
Set Up Tag Formatting Using Acquiring Properties

Tag formats can include properties that acquire their values from other
properties. For example, if a line acquires its Unit value from a project-level
property, you can use that acquiring property in the tag format. If the Unit

value at the project level changes, all tags with that property as a subpart are
updated to reflect that change.
Set Up Tag Formatting for a Pipe Line Group

Pipes are the only components that are automatically grouped. Although pipe
line groups are not physical entities, you set up tag formatting for pipe line
groups just as you would for any other component.
The default tag format for a pipe line group is Line Number. You can add other
properties as needed (for example: Service).
Understand Default Tag Formatting Templates

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides the following tag format templates for you to use
or modify to fit with your company tag formatting standards:
■ Equipment tag (Type-Number). Defined by default with a type property

and a number (for example: P-100).
■ Equipment tag 2 (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area

property, type property, and number (for example: 25-P-1000).
■ Hand valve tag (Code-Number). Defined by default with two letters

representing a valve code and a number (for example: HV-100).
■ Nozzle tag (N-Number). Defined by default with one or more letters

representing a nozzle code and a number (for example: N-1).
■ Instrumentation tag (Area-Type-Number). Defined by default with an area,

type, and loop number (for example: 51-PT-100).
■ Line number tag. Defined by default with a line number (for example:
100).
■ Pipeline tag (Size-Spec-Service-Line Number). Defined by default with size

value, spec, service, and line number (for example: 6"-C1-P-10014).
Build Tag Formatting Expressions

You can define how tag elements are expressed. For example, you can create
an instrument tag of Area-Type-Loop Number_Suffix (for example:
25-FE-1002_A). You can control the formatting of the values that can be
assigned when tagging a component or line through expressions.
Using expressions, you can designate whether a value must be entered as text
characters, numbers, or any combination of text characters and numbers
(free-style value).

You can also define an expression to generate a value automatically when a
designer adds a component to a drawing. You can set automatic expressions
to a drawing property or project property.
Understand Tag Uniqueness

In general, a tag property must be unique. Even items of different types must
have unique tags. For example, if you assign the tag A-123 to a pump, you
cannot assign the identical tag to a tank.
Two exceptions to tag uniqueness are as follows:
■ Line segment tags can be identical. The tag properties of a line group must
be unique, but the tag properties of the line segments within that line group
can be the same.
■ A large component that stretches across drawings can have duplicate tags.
Duplicate tags can represent different parts of the same item. For example,
a line that spans drawings using an off-page connector can have the same
tag in each drawing.
To create a tag format

Project Setup.
example: Centrifugal Sump Pump).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, select the tag format type
on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Equipment
Tag [Type-Number]). Click New.
5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box, enter the
name of the new format (for example: Pump Tag).

6 In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number for how many subparts
you want in the tag (for example: 3) or click the Up or Down arrow until
the number is displayed.
TIP Use as many properties as subparts as needed. Use delimiters only

between these subparts, not within them. if you place Delimiters in the
Delimiter box, they appear between the subparts in a tag. Entering a dash
between items in the Field box (for example, N-N-N) can produce unexpected
results.
7 In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties.

■ Under Class, click... Equipment.
■ Under Property, click Type.
■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property.
■ Click OK.

9 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click Select Drawing Properties.
10 In the Select Drawing Property dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Category, click General.
■ Under Drawing Properties, click Area.
■ Click OK.

11 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row, click Define
Expression (the last icon in the row).
12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, click No Expression

(Free Style Value). Click OK.
13 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click Define Expression (the
last icon in the row).
14 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Expression, do the following:

■ Click Numbers.
■ Select the Fixed Length check box. In the Fixed Length box, enter a
number or click the Up arrow until the number is displayed.
NOTE If the Expression section is disabled: under Result, clear the check box
for No Expression (Free Style Value). Then follow the directions in step 14.

15 Click OK.
16 In the Tag Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter where
appropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the delimiter
for General.Area[].
NOTE Do not place a delimiter in the Field box.
17 Click OK.
18 On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, under Property Name, select
TagFormatName.

19 In the TagFormatName row, under the Default Value column, in the
drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging the
component.
20 Click OK.
You created a new tag format and assigned it to a component. When you use
the component in a drawing, the Assign Tag dialog box prompts you to enter
tag data for the format you created.
To create a tag format for pipe line groups

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the item you want
to tag (for example: Pipe Line Groups).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format type
on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Line Number),
and then click New.

5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, do the following:
■ In the Format Name box, enter the name of the new format (for
example: PipeLineGroup - Service).
■ In the Name of Subparts box, enter the number of subparts you want
in the tag (for example: 2), or click the Up arrow until the number 2
is displayed.
■ In the bottom row of icons, click Select Class Properties (the

first icon on the left).

■ Under Class, click Pipe Line Groups.
■ Under Property, click a property (for example: Service).
■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property. Click OK.
7 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click OK.

column, locate TagFormatName.
9 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, click the tag
format you want to use (for example: select PipeLineGroup - Service).
10 Click OK.
To assign a tag format to a class definition

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click an item (for
example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag format
whose class definition you want to assign.


5 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the
drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging a
component or line.
6 Click OK.
To modify a tag format for a class definition

Project Setup.
example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatting
you want to change.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click the tag format you
want to modify.

5 Click Modify.
6 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, make the desired changes to the tag
format. Click OK.
7 Click OK.
To remove a tag format from a class definition

Project Setup.
example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag formatting
you want to delete.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, select the tag format you
want to delete.

5 Click Delete.
NOTE If the selected tag format is either in a drawing that is part of the
project or is currently assigned to a component, a message informs you that
tag format cannot be deleted.
7 Click OK.
To add automatically generated drawing properties

Project Setup.
line class definition (for example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Tag Format, click New.

example: Alt_Equip_Tag).
■ In the Number of Subparts box, enter a number or click the arrows

until the desired number of subparts is displayed.

■ Click the Expression icon (the last icon in the row).
6 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Autogenerate, do the

following:
■ Select the Autogenerate Expression.
■ Click Drawing Field.
■ Click the Drawing icon.
7 In the Select Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

8 In the New Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the
following:
■ Under Name, enter the name for the new property.
■ Under Description, enter a description for the new property.
9 Click OK until the Project Setup dialog box is displayed.

In the Project Setup dialog box, under Tag Format, the new tag is added.
To add automatically generated project properties

Project Setup.




6 In the Define Expression dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Autogenerate, select the Autogenerate Expression check box.
Click Project Field.
■ Click the Project icon.
7 In the Select Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.

8 In the New Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following:
■ In the Name box, enter the name for the new property.
■ In the Description box, enter a description for the new property.
■ In the Last Used Value box, enter the value to use for the last value
for the new property.
■ In the Increment Value box, enter the increment value for the new
property.
9 Click OK until all open dialog boxes are closed.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Tag Format (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)
Set Up Annotations
You can use annotations to place text on a drawing to describe a component
or line. AutoCAD Plant 3D provides various annotation types.
You can create an annotation style that is based on an existing annotation
style or a template, or create a new annotation style. To base an annotation
style on a template, use AnnotationTemplates.dwg (located in the AutoCAD
Plant 3D 2010 directory), and select a block from the drawing. The template
blocks contain dynamic block parameters. With these parameters set, an
annotation sizes dynamically when placed in a drawing.
Understand Dynamic Sizing Behavior of Annotations

AutoCAD Plant 3D annotations can dynamically size when you add them to
a component or line.
When you create dynamically sized annotations, you can use the Assign
Annotation Format dialog box to assign the format string to both the attribute
and to any associated dynamic block parameters.
Using any other method (including the Attribute Definition dialog box), you
apply the format string to the attribute only. In addition, to enable the
dynamic sizing behavior, you would have to update each instance of associated
dynamic block parameters. The only reason to use the Attribution Definition
dialog box is to set other attribute properties, such as text style and height.

If you create an annotation using a block you create, you can add dynamic
sizing behavior to the block. To understand how AutoCAD dynamic blocks
are created, see “Overview of Dynamic Blocks” in the AutoCAD Help system.
Understand Annotation Style Properties

You can change the following styles for annotations:
■ Symbol properties. Sets the name of the annotation style and defines the
block that is displayed when the style is used.
■ General style properties. Sets layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, plot
style, and lineweight.
■ Other properties. Sets the scale factor used for the symbol, whether the
annotation inherits the component properties, whether the annotation is
linked to a class, whether the annotation is automatically inserted, and
the X and Y offset distance from a component.
To create an annotation style

Project Setup.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click Add Annotation.
Symbol Name. Enter a new name for the symbol.
NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol; the block you
want to use must be in the drawing file that you select.
8 In the Select Block dialog box, select a block from the Available Blocks
list and then click OK.
9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, change the properties under General
Styles Properties and Other Properties as needed. Click OK.

10 Click OK.
To create a block and an annotation style

The following procedure illustrates how to create an annotation without using
an existing block as a template.
1 Create a block (for example: an insulation block).
2 Add an attribute to the block and call it UNASSIGNED.
3 (Optional) Add dynamic sizing behavior to the block attribute by adding

a linear parameter to determine sizing behavior as follows:
■ To have the linear parameter automatically size to match the attribute
text size, name the distance label of the linear parameter the same as
the attribute definition tag. An example of this dynamic sizing
behavior is the stretching of underlining in the Equipment Tag style.
■ To have the linear parameter automatically size to include the entire

X or Y extents of all the evaluated attributes in the block definition,
give the linear parameter the names TotalX and/or TotalY. An example
of this dynamic sizing behavior is a block definition consisting of a
rectangle enclosing several lines of attributes. The rectangle stretches
or shrinks to accommodate the attributes regardless of their values.
4 Save the block drawing.

Project Setup.
8 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click Add Annotation.
Symbol Name. Enter new name for the annotation style.

NOTE You cannot use a drawing file as a block for the symbol. The block
you use must be in the drawing file that you select.
12 In the Select Block dialog box, under Available Blocks, select a block.
Click OK.
Other Properties, change the properties as needed. Click OK.
14 In the Project Setup dialog box, under Annotation, click Edit Block.
15 On the P&ID Annotation toolbar, click Assign Annotation Format.

In the Block Editor window, select the attribute definition.

16 In the Assign Annotation Format dialog box, create each subpart of the
format string as follows:
■ To select a class property, click Select Class Properties.
■ To select a drawing property, click Select Drawing Properties.
■ To select a project property, click Select Project Properties.
■ To define an expression, click Define Expression.
■ Enter a delimiter use between the fields. You can enter text and
delimiters. For example, if you want a pump to have text reflecting
the flow rate data, you could use a field value of #(TargetClass.FlowRate)
and a delimiter value of GPH. To add leading text, create the format
string and add the leading text using the Properties palette or the
Attribute Definition dialog box. For example, to create an annotation
for an Exchanger that reads TUBE [pressure] @ [temperature], use the
Assign Annotation Format dialog box to create the format string
#(TargetClass.TubeDesignPressure)
@#(TargetClass.TubeDesignTemperature). Then add the leading text
TUBE using the Properties palette or the Attribute Definition dialog
box.
NOTE If you manually add leading text, update any associated dynamic
block parameters to match, using the Properties palette.
17 To create more subparts to the format string, in the Number of Subparts

box, click the Up arrow or enter a number.
18 In the Assign Annotation Format dialog box, click OK.
19 In the Block Editor, click Close Block Editor. Save the block.
20 If you want the new annotation style to appear in the component or line
shortcut menu, proceed to step 21.
If you want the annotation placed in the drawing along with a component
or line, you can set the new annotation style as the default. A default

setting is useful when the AutoInsert property is set to something other
than No Auto Insert. Do the following:
■ On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, in the Property Name
column, locate AnnotationStyleName.
■ In the AnnotationStyleName row, under the Default Value column,

in the drop-down list, click the annotation style.
21 Click OK to close the Project Setup dialog box and return to the drawing.
22 In the drawing, right-click the appropriate component or line to make

sure that the new annotation is on its shortcut menu.
To assign an annotation style to a class definition

Project Setup.
example: Engineering Items ➤ Equipment) that contains the annotation
style you want to assign to a component or line definition.

column, locate AnnotationStyleName.
5 In the AnnotationStyleName row, under the Default Value column, in

the drop-down list, click the annotation style you want.
6 Click OK.
To modify an annotation style for a class definition

Project Setup.
style you want to modify.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, in the drop-down list,

click the annotation style you want to modify.
5 Click Edit Annotation.

6 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, make the desired changes to the
annotation style. Click OK.
7 Click OK.
To delete an annotation style from a class definition

Project Setup.
style you want to delete.
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, in the drop-down list,

click the annotation style you want to delete.
5 Click Remove Annotation.
NOTE If the selected annotation style is either used in a drawing that is part
of the project or is currently assigned to a component, you are prompted
that the annotation style cannot be deleted.
6 In the Confirm Delete message box, click Yes.
7 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Annotation (P&ID Class Definitions Tree Node)
Set Up Off-Page Connectors

Off-page connectors create a continuance of a line from one project drawing
to another. You can use an existing off-page connector to create a new one.
You can change the following styles for off-page connectors:
■ Symbol properties. Sets the name of the symbol and defines the block for
the connector when it is inserted into a drawing.
■ General style properties. Sets layer, color, linetype, linetype scale, plot
style, and lineweight.
■ Other properties. Sets the symbol scale and whether an off-page connector
is scaled, rotated, and mirrored when it is inserted in a drawing.
To create an off-page connector and add it to the tool palette
NOTE Make sure that the P&ID tool palette is displayed in your drawing and that
the active tool palette tab is the one where you want to add the new component.

Project Setup.

3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the off-page
connector (Non Engineering Items ➤ Connectors ➤ Off Page Connector).
4 Right-click Off Page Connector. Click New.
5 In the Create Class dialog box, enter a name for the new off-page
connector.
6 Click OK.
7 Expand the Off Page Connector node, and select the new off-page
connector.
9 In the Symbol Settings dialog box, change the properties that make the
new off-page connector unique (for example, you can change the color).
Click OK.
10 On the Class Settings pane, under Symbol, in the drop-down list, locate
the style you just created (in this example, OffPageConnectorStyle2).

11 Click Add to Tool Palette.
The new style is added to the active tool palette. It can be used just like
the default tools provided with AutoCAD Plant 3D, and is included in
reports.
12 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Configure Plant 3D DWG Settings

As part of your Plant 3D DWG setup, you can configure certain behaviors to
which all designers using this project adhere.
Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D)

Create custom settings for export and import that include any combination
of Plant 3D classes.
Share AutoCAD Plant 3D data with other applications by mapping AutoCAD
Plant 3D properties to correspond with similar properties in other programs.
NOTE You can export and import Data Manager information only when the Data
Manager view is configured for object type (class). You cannot export and import
when the Data Manager view is based on area.

Understand Export and Import Settings
You can export and import data using the default Displayed Data setting. This
setting exports and imports data for the active node in the Data Manager tree
view, with or without child node data.
In some cases, however, you want to be more selective with the data you
export and import. For example, you want to export only nozzles and valves.
You can use export and import settings to create custom settings that include
only the classes you choose.
You can also use export and import settings to move data to and from other
applications. You use external data mapping to map classes and properties to
the data structure in the other application.
You create export and import settings at the project level in Project Setup.
You use one setting for both export and import, which simplifies the process
of exporting data, externally editing the data, and importing the data back.
After you create an export and import setting, you can later modify or delete
it.
Export to and Import from Other Programs

One common reason to create a custom export and import setting is for
exporting and importing data to and from other programs. For example, you
want to export data to AutoCAD Electrical. Because the two programs have
different data structures, you map the classes and properties in AutoCAD Plant
3D to the classes and properties in the other program.
Set up External Data Mapping

You set up external data mapping in the Export and Import Settings dialog
box when creating or modifying an export and import setting. You specify
the classes and properties to include and enter external class and property
names. You also identify each property to be used as a unique identifier (UID)
for each specified class, and map property values.
A one-to-one mapping between every class and property is not required. Many
Plant 3D objects can be mapped to the same external object. To achieve this
mapping, enter the same external object name for all Plant 3D objects that
correspond to the same objects in other applications.
For example, AutoCAD Electrical uses a single table called COMP for all
equipment. AutoCAD Plant 3D, however, uses numerous tables and objects
to classify the various categories of equipment. While interacting with
AutoCAD Electrical, you map every Equipment object to an external object
Configure Settings for Export and Import (Plant 3D) | 141

called COMP. You then map every equipment property to some common
properties in COMP.
Export and import share common property value mappings. When you export
data, the mappings transform data to a format required by the external
application. When you import data, the mappings transform the external data
into a format required by AutoCAD Plant 3D. Thus mappings provide a
two-way mechanism for a continuous data exchange between applications.
In some cases, applications can contain erroneous or duplicate data. The
import and export process uses a unique identifier (UID) to identify specific
records. If the imported data contains duplicate records, the most recent
records overwrite the previous records. AutoCAD Plant 3D generally prohibits
duplicate records. However, if AutoCAD Plant 3D encounters duplicate records,
it exports them as multiple records and the importing application coordinates
them.
To create export and import settings

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click
Export and Import Settings.
3 On the Export and Import Settings pane, click New.
4 In the New Export and Import Settings dialog box, under Name, enter a
name for the export and import setting (for example: All Equipment).

5 Under Description, enter a description for the setting (for example: Export
only Equipment).
6 In the Plant 3D Classes tree view, expand the nodes to display the Plant
3D Classes you want to export and import (for example: expand Piping
and Equipment. Select all items under Equipment)
7 If this setting is for exporting to and importing from another program,

see “To set up external data mapping.” Otherwise, click OK.
To set up external data mapping

You can map property values when creating export and import settings or by
modifying an existing setting.

Project Setup.

Modify.
4 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Name, enter a new name (optional).
■ Under Description, enter a new description (optional).
■ In the Plant 3D tree view, expand the classes and select the check box
for the class you want to configure for external data mapping.
■ Under External Data Mapping, in the External Class Name box, enter
a name that corresponds to similar classes in the other program (for
example: if the program equates Column with Columns, select the
Columns check box in the Plant 3D Classes tree view and enter Column
in the External Class Name box). Repeat this process for each class
you want to configure for external data mapping.
■ Under Properties, in the External Property column, click the external

property you want to change. Enter the new name (for example: click
the ModelNumber external property and enter Model).

Repeat this process for each external property you want to change.
■ To make a property a unique identifier (UID), select the UID check

box corresponding to the property. PnPID is a UID by default. If the
other program recognizes a different identifier, you can change this
setting.
■ In the Value Mapping column, click the cell corresponding to the

property you want to map. Click the [...] button.
5 In the Map Property Values dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Plant 3D Property column, enter the Plant 3D property values
(for example: in the Plant 3D Property ModelNumber column, enter
P1, P2, S1, and S2).
■ In the External Property column, enter corresponding property values

for the other program (for example: enter Model1, Model2, Model1, and
Model2).

6 Click OK.
7 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, repeat the value
mapping process for each property you want to map. When you finish
mapping, click OK to close the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog
box.
To modify an export and import setting
Modify.

3 In the Modify Export and Import Settings dialog box, you can:
■ Edit the name of the Export and Import Settings as necessary.
■ Edit the description as necessary.
4 In the Plant 3D Classes tree view, modify the Plant 3D Classes to export
and import. For example, you can clear one or more check boxes.
5 On the External Data Mapping pane, modify the class name in the
External Class Name box, if necessary. Make other changes, as needed,
to the external data mapping settings.
6 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Export and Import Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)
Set Plant 3D Paths

You can change the default locations where users access Plant 3D project data
(such as models, spec sheets, ortho drawings, and template files).
The Paths panel includes:
■ Plant 3D model DWG directory. Sets the location of the project model
DWG directory.
■ Spec sheets directory. Sets the location of the specification sheets directory.
■ Orthographic output directory (DWG). Sets the location of the orthographic

drawing output directory.
■ Orthographic template file (DWT). Defines the ortho template file that is
used when new ortho drawings in a project are created.
■ Equipment templates directory. Sets the location of the equipment

snapshots directory.
■ Drawing template file (DWT). Defines the template file that is used when
new drawings in a project are created.
To define new project paths

Project Setup.

2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Paths.
3 On the Paths pane, do one of the following:

■ Enter the file paths for the directories you want to change.
4 Click OK.
To set up pipe spec files

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup dialog box tree view, expand 3D Piping DWG Settings.
Click Paths.
3 On the Paths pane, under Spec Sheets Directory, enter the path to the
location of your spec files or click the [...] button to browse to the location.
4 Click OK to close the Project Setup dialog box.
Set Plant 3D Paths | 149

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Paths (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager

(Plant 3D)
You can customize the way the Data Manager displays data for projects or
drawings.
You can arrange the tree view in the Data Manager according to your
requirements. First you specify whether the top-level nodes are areas (the
default) or object types (classes). Then you specify the properties you want to
view at various sub-levels.
For example, you can arrange a tree view with Area at the top level,
Manufacturer at the second level, and Model Number at the third level. Or
you can arrange a tree view with Piping Equipment at the top level,
Manufacturer at the second level, and Model Number at the third level.
In a KKS environment, you can base a view on a Unit, SystemCode,
SystemNumber, EquipmentCode, and EquipmentNumber hierarchy.
To create a customized view for the Data Manager

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Data

3 Under Default Data Manager view, do one of the following:
■ To order the tree view by area, click Area (Drawing Property).
■ To order the tree view by object type, click Object Type.
4 Under Customized Views, click Create View.
5 Under A New Customized View, in the Name box, enter a name for your
view.
6 Under A New Customized View, define the scope of your view:

■ To expand the scope of your view to include all project data, click
Project Data.
■ To limit the scope of your view to the current drawing data, click
Drawing Data.
■ Click New Level.

■ Under Class, expand the appropriate node and child nodes to locate
and click a class for Level 1 (for example: Piping and Equipment).
■ Under Properties, click a class property (for example: Manufacturer).
■ Click OK.
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) | 151
8 Click New Level and repeat step 7 to add the number of levels you want
in the customized view. When you finish adding levels to the customized
view, in the Project Setup dialog box, click OK.
NOTE For best results in creating customized views, choose properties that are
shared by all Plant 3D objects.
To delete a customized view for the Data Manager

Project Setup.
2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Data
3 On the Customized Views pane, click the customized view you want to
delete. Click Delete View.
4 In the Delete Customized View message, click Yes.
To open a customized view in the Data Manager
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Data Manager.
2 In the Data Manager, click the drop-down list and click a customized
view.
The Data Manager tree view displays the customized data.
3 To display relevant details on the right pane, click a node in the tree view.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Data Manager Configuration (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)
Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings

You can specify common project settings for isometric drawing files.
The Isogen settings available for configuration include:
■ File locations for drawings and the line designation table (LDT)
■ Dimensions
■ Sloped lines
■ Labels
■ Title block
AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 uses the full Isogen application and exposes the most
commonly set Isogen configuration options. All Isogen configuration files are
supported.
Set Up File Names and File Paths

You can change the default locations where users access Isogen data (such as
title blocks and templates).
Configure Settings for Isometric Drawings | 153

You can configure the following paths for each iso type:
■ Template files directory. Contains configuration files for the specified iso
type.
■ Isogen title block. Sets the location where title block data is stored for the
specified iso type.
■ Quick iso output directory. Defines the location where quick isometric
drawings are stored for the specified iso type.
■ Production iso output directory. Defines the location where production

isometric drawings are stored for the specified iso type.
■ Line designation table (LDT). (Optional) Activates and defines a worksheet

file that can be mapped to pipelines and their properties.
To set or change isometric drawing file locations

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and Isogen
Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, under Iso Type, click the iso
type you want to change drawing file locations for.
4 Do any of the following:

■ Enter location paths for the template files directory, Isogen title block,
quick iso output directory, and the production iso output directory.
5 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Paths (Isogen Settings)
Configure the Line Designation Table

You can use an optional line designation table that specifies a worksheet name,
header row, and line number column to pass pipe line data to the isometric
drawing.
You can use a line designation table to specify data (such as design pressure,
design temperature, and so on) for use as attributes in the isometric title block.
Typical data in a user-defined line designation table includes:
■ Service
■ Maximum pressure and maximum temperature
■ Design pressure and design temperature
To configure a line designation table

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup dialog box, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings and
Isogen Settings. Click Paths.

3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, under Line Designation Table
(LDT), select the Use LDT Data from XLS check box and do the following:
■ Under LDT file, click the [...] button and browse to the location where
the LDT file you want to use is located. Click the LDT file and click
Open.
■ Under Line Designation Table (LDT), enter the worksheet name, header
row number, and line number column from the LDT file.
■ Click View LDT to display a preview of the line designation table.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Create a New Iso Type

You can create an iso type based on an existing iso type.
You define a unique name for the new iso type. AutoCAD Plant 3D bases the
configuration settings for the new type on the existing iso type settings. After
creating the iso type, you can change the configuration settings.
To create a new iso type

Project Setup.

Isogen Settings. Click Paths.
3 On the Iso Path and File Locations pane, click New Type.
4 In the Create Iso Type dialog box, under Name, enter a name for the new
iso type.
5 In the Base on Existing Type list, click an existing iso type on which to
base the new type.
6 Click Create.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Create Iso Type Dialog Box
Configure the Display of Dimensions

You can change the default dimension style, value location, and gasket
dimensions displayed for any isometric type.
You can include or exclude gaskets and configure overall dimensions to stop
at branches or go across them.
To set up dimensions

Project Setup.

Isogen Settings. Click Dimensions.
3 On the Dimensions pane, in the Iso Type list, select the iso type you want
to set dimensions for.
4 Under Dimension Style, click String Dimensions or Composite

Dimensions.
5 Under Dimension Value Location, click Inline dimension or Above Line

Dimension.
6 Under Gasket dimension, click Include Gaskets or Exclude Gaskets.
7 To control whether the iso type displays overall dimensions, under

Miscellaneous Options, select the Overall Dimensions check box and do
the following:
■ For each item in the Valve Type column, select a Dimension Style.
■ To control whether elbows are drawn with square corners or rounded

corners, under Elbows select Square or Rounded.
■ To control whether bends are drawn with square corners or rounded

corners, under Bends, select Square or Rounded.
8 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Dimensions Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)
Configure the Display of Isometric Sloped Lines

You can change the default display for sloped line falls and skews for any
isometric type.
You can configure 2D skews and 3D skews to display as boxes or triangles,
and you can specify the maximum number of degrees at which falls display.
To set up sloped lines for an iso type

Project Setup.
Isogen Settings. Click Sloped Lines.
3 On the Sloped Lines pane, in the Iso Type list, select an iso type.
4 Under Falls, in the Show Falls as drop-down list, select a falls behavior
option.
5 In the Show as Fall Up to list, click the up and down arrows to specify
the maximum value at which falls display.
6 Under 2D Skews, click Skew Box, Skew Triangle + Normal Dimensioning,

or Skew Triangle + Alternative Dimensioning.
7 Under 3D Skews, click 3D Box or 2D Triangle + Fall Indicator.

8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Sloped Lines Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)
Set Up Isometric Labels

You can change the display of annotations for the cut piece list, spool labels,
pipe supports, end connection coordinates, and weld numbering.
To set up labels for an iso type

Project Setup.
Isogen Settings. Click Labels.
3 On the Labels pane, in the Iso Type list, select an iso type.
4 To control whether the cut piece list is displayed, under Cut Piece List,
select the Display Cut Piece List check box. Click As Numeric or As
Alphabetic.
5 To control whether the spool label is displayed, under Spool Label, select
the Display Spool Label check box. Click As Numeric or As Alphabetic.
In the Box Enclosure Style list, click a box enclosure style to enclose the
spool label.

6 To control whether pipe supports are displayed, under Pipe Supports,
select the Display Pipe Supports check box. Click Without Dimensions,
With Overall Dimensions, or With String Dimensions.
7 Under Date, in the drop-down list, click a date format to display. To

display the date in four digit year format, select the Use Four Digit Year
Format check box.
8 Under End Connection Coordinates, select check boxes for the Show
Coordinates For options you want.
9 To control whether weld numbering is displayed, under Weld Numbering,

select the Show Weld Numbers check box. Click For All Welds, For
Fabrication Welds Only, or For Erection Welds Only. In the Box Enclosure
Style list, click a box enclosure style to enclose weld numbering.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Labels Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)
Configure the Title Block

You can define the title block for each isometric type.

You have control over the placement and display of specific output for the
following items displayed in the title block:
■ Attributes (such as project data) and client information (such as company

name and primary contact)
■ Bill of materials
■ Layers
■ Drawing area, including overall plot area and north arrow setup
You configure each of these items individually for each iso type.
When creating custom iso types, you can base the new type on an existing
iso type with configuration settings that most closely match your desired
settings.
Configure Isometric Title Block Layers

You can configure which layer pipes, fittings, and other components are placed
on when an iso is created. You can put this information on any layer that is
defined for the title block.
To configure the title block layers

Project Setup.
Isogen Settings. Click Configure Title Block.
3 On the Configure Title Block pane, in the Iso Type list, click the iso type
you want to configure, and click Setup Title Block.
4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Layers Setup.
5 In the Isogen Layer Setup dialog box, in the Pipe list, enter values for the
Min size and Max Size. For each row in the list, click the Layer drop-down
and specify a layer.
■ To add rows to the table, click in the Pipe list title bar.
■ To delete rows from the table, click in the Pipe list title bar.

NOTE Set the first row at min size 0, and the last row at max size max.
In the Fittings Default list, enter values for Min size, Max Size, Layer, and
Scale.
■ To add rows to the table, click in the Fittings Default list title bar.
■ To delete rows from the table, click in the Fittings Default list title
bar.
NOTE Set the first row at min size 0, and the last row at max size max.
6 In the Fittings Special list, specify a layer and scale for each type.
7 In the Other Items list, specify a layer for each type.
8 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Configure Title Block Dialog Box (Isogen Settings)
Isogen Layer Setup Dialog Box
Configure Isometric Title Block Attributes

You can configure title block format settings such as style, justification, and
text height for the attributes that make up the title block.

Attributes include general properties and custom category data as defined
during project setup.
To configure the title block attributes

Project Setup.
you want to configure and click Setup Title Block.
4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Attributes Setup.
5 In the Insert Title Block Attributes dialog box, in the list, click an attribute
category.
6 Under Attribute Names, click the attribute you want to add to the title
block.
7 Under format, change the Style, Justify, and Text Height boxes as desired.
8 Click Place.
9 Click in the drawing area to place the attribute.
10 In the Insert Title Block Attributes dialog box, repeat steps 5 through 9
to insert additional attributes or click Close.
NOTE You cannot edit previously placed LDT attributes in the title block. Use a
text editor to open the *.atr and *.pos files in the iso title block folder and manually
delete the unwanted attributes.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Insert Title Block Attributes Dialog Box
Configure Isometric Title Block Drawing Area

You can configure the plot and drawing area of the title block and set north
arrow placement.
The drawing area is the region in the drawing to which the isometric graphics
are constrained.
To configure the title block drawing area

Project Setup.
4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click Drawing Area Setup.
5 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set Drawing Area, click
Define Overall Plot Area.

6 Click in the drawing area of the title block drawing to pick the second
point of the defining rectangle.
7 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set Drawing Area, click
Define Iso Drawing Area.
8 In the drawing area, click within the area defined in step 6 to pick the
first point of the defining rectangle. Click another point in the drawing
area within the area defined in step 6 to define the second point of the
defining rectangle.
9 In the Set Up Drawing Area dialog box, under Set North Direction, click
an arrow button to define the north arrow direction.
10 Select Show Default Arrow Symbol and Use Enclosing Box check boxes
if you want to place the arrow symbol in the drawing.
11 Click Place Arrow Symbol.
12 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Set Up Drawing Area Dialog Box
Configure Isometric Bill of Materials

You can configure specific properties for the bill of materials.

You can use Type 1 Isogen bill of materials settings or define custom title block
properties for the bill of materials. For custom title block configuration, you
can specify the text style, sort order, and the field settings for data items.
You can add custom data items to the bill of materials. Standard fields you
can add include BOM part number, quantity, component code, and so on.
You can also add user attributes to the list of standard fields, such as the tag
or number properties for a specified class definitions.
During setup, you can view a preview of configuration changes you make to
the bill of materials.
To configure general settings for a custom bill of materials

Project Setup.
Settings. Click Configure Title Block.
4 On the Title Block Setup toolbar, click BOM Setup.
5 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, on the General tab, clear
the Use Type 1 Bill of Materials check box.
6 Under Layer, click a layer.
7 Under font settings, do the following:

■ In the Font drop-down list, click a font.
■ Under Text Thickness, click an option.
■ Under Text Height, enter a whole or decimal value (in millimeters).
■ Under Vertical Spacing, enter a whole or decimal value (in

millimeters).
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to specify font settings for each layer.
9 (Optional) To view a preview of configuration changes you made, click

Preview.
10 Click OK.

To configure sort order for a custom bill of materials

Project Setup.
6 Click the Sort Order tab.
7 Click Continuous or Split Fabrication and Erection Components and do

one of the following:
■ Under Continuous BOM Settings, in the Direction drop-down list,
click Up or Down. In the Maximum Rows box, enter a maximum row
number. In the Start Position box, click the Pick Point button and use
the pointing device to click an insertion point in the drawing area to
indicate the start position.
■ Under Split BOM Settings, in the Direction drop-down list, click Up

or Down. In the Maximum Rows box, enter a maximum row number.
In the Start Position box, click the Pick Point button and use the
pointing device to click an insertion point in the drawing area to
indicate the start position.

Preview.
9 Click OK.
To configure fields to include on a custom bill of materials

Project Setup.

6 Click the Data Items tab.
7 Under Select Fields to Include, select check boxes for the fields you want
to include on the BOM.
8 Under Specify Ordering and Locations, do the following:

■ In the Maximum Characters column, enter the maximum number of
characters you want to display for each data item.
■ In the Column Width column, enter a column width or click the Pick
Point button and use the pointing device to specify a column width
in the drawing area.
9 Click the Up Arrow and Down Arrow to specify the order of data items
on the list.

Preview.
11 Click OK.
To add a user attribute to the bill of materials

Project Setup.

6 Click the Data Items tab.
7 Under Select Fields to Include, click Add User Attribute.

■ Under Class, expand items in the list and click the desired class.
■ Under Property, click an item.
■ Click OK.
9 In the Setup Isogen Bill of Materials dialog box, click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Set Up Isogen Bill of Materials Dialog Box
Select Class Property Dialog Box (Annotation Format Setup Dialog Box)
Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments

You can specify an automated scheme for assigning layer and color values to
pipe lines and associated inline components.
Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments | 171

Layers provide a convenient method for isolating line runs or services in a
congested area. You can turn layers on or off to view the specific objects that
interest you.
You can create layer and color assignment schemes based on any Plant 3D
object property. Pipe lines and inline components follow the scheme that is
currently in effect. End of line components, such as pumps or tanks, do not
follow the scheme.
Understand Automated Layer and Color Schemes

Among the many automated layer and color schemes you can set up are the
following:
■ Layer by line number and color by pipe size
■ Layer by line number and color by pipe spec
■ Layer by pipe spec and color by pipe size
■ Layer by service and color by pipe size
If you set up an automated scheme, pipes and pipe fittings that you place in
a model follow that scheme.
Understand the Effects of Enabling or Modifying an Automated Scheme

Remember the following guidelines when setting up an automated layer and
color scheme:
■ You can create automated schemes based on a list of pipe properties.
■ You can add to the list of properties by which you can assign colors by
creating a new selection list. For more information, see Set Up Selection
Lists on page 210
■ You can change to a different automated layer and color assignment scheme
through the Project Setup dialog box after initially creating a project.
■ Automated schemes affect all Plant 3d objects except end-of-line

components such as pumps or tanks.
■ If you change the automated scheme, the changes appear immediately in

the open model. Other project models update when you open them.
■ If you do not enable an automated scheme (if you clear the check box for
Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating Objects), the
default AutoCAD layer and color settings are in effect.

To enable or disable automated layer and color assignments

Project Setup.
2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings. Click Layer and
Color Settings.
3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, select or clear the
check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When Creating
Objects.
4 Click OK.
NOTE When the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color Assignments When
Creating Objects is cleared, default AutoCAD layer and color settings are in effect.
To create an automated layer and color assignment scheme

Project Setup.
Color Settings.
3 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, do the following:

■ Make sure the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color
Assignments When Creating Objects is selected.
■ Click New.

4 In the New Automation Scheme dialog box, do the following:
■ In the Name box, enter a name for your automated scheme.
■ In the Start With list, click an existing scheme (for example: Default).
■ Click OK.

■ In the Assign Layer By list, click a property (for example: Spec).
■ In the Assign Color By list: click a property or leave the setting

unchanged (for example: Nominal Diameter).
■ In the Color column, click the color you want to change. In the
AutoCAD Select Color dialog box, click a new color. Click OK.

For more information about the Select Color dialog box, see “Set the
Current Color” in the AutoCAD Help system.
■ Click Save Changes.
■ To replace the default scheme with the new scheme, click Set Current.
6 Click OK.
The new automated scheme is reflected in all open models. All other
models in the project reflect this change when you open them.
To change to a different automated layer and color assignment scheme

Project Setup.
Color Settings.

■ Make sure that the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color
■ Under Automation Schemes, click an automated scheme. Click Set

Current.
4 Click OK.
The new automated scheme is reflected in all open models. All other
models in the project reflect this change when you open them.
To delete an automated layer and color assignment scheme

Project Setup.

Color Settings.

■ Make sure that the check box labeled Automate Layer And Color
■ Under Automation Schemes, select an automated scheme. Click Delete.
NOTE You cannot delete the scheme that is set as current.
4 Click OK.
To add an option to the Assign Color By list

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click Pipe Run
Component.

SpecNew). The name cannot contain spaces.
■ Under Display Name, enter the name that you want displayed for the
new property in the Data Manager or Properties palette (for example:
SpecNew).
■ Under Choose a Type, click Selection List.

6 Click OK.
list (for example: Spec). Click OK.
10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: CS300)
12 Click OK.
Color Settings.
14 On the Automated Layer And Color Assignment pane, in the Assign Color
By list, click the new item.

15 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Layer and Color Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)
Configure Connectors
You can customize the conditions, fittings, and fasteners used to make a
connection.
Connectors are the components and fasteners that you use to join pipe. You
can set the conditions that allow pipe to connect and identify the components
and fasteners used to make a connection.
In AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, joint types are either simple, or compound.
A simple joint specifies fasteners (for example: welds or bolt sets) that are used
to hold pipe together. Default simple joint types, such as welded, flanged, and
socketed joints, are provided for connecting pipe with matching nominal
diameter. Parts that support the connection (for example: gaskets) are also
specified in a simple joint.
A compound joint specifies a connection component or adapter (for example:
a weld-neck flange) that allows pipe to connect. Default compound joint types
include AutoFlange, which adds a flange connection component when the
diameter, pressure class, and facing of the pipe and fitting match.
For example, if you connect pipe with a plain end to a flanged valve there is
no simple joint type that can connect PL to FL end types. The AutoFlange
compound joint type adds a Flange connection component to the line, which
is connected at each end by two simple joint types.
Configure Connectors | 179

NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 does not support customizing the list of fasteners
available in a simple joint. In AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 you cannot add to the Plant
3D class definitions.
To modify a joint type

Project Setup.
2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings ➤ Connections.

Click Joint Settings.
3 In the Simple Joints list, click a joint type (for example: Buttweld).
4 Click Modify.
5 In the Modify Joint dialog box, click Add Property.
6 In the Select Class Property dialog box, click a Property (for example: Port
➤ Pressure Class).
7 Click OK.
8 In the Modify Joint dialog box, click Modify.
9 In the Project Setup dialog box, Click OK.
NOTE If you add pressure class match to a buttweld joint, pipe and fittings
must be the same pressure class to connect. Existing buttweld joints are not
modified.
To add a joint type

Project Setup.
2 In the Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D DWG Settings ➤ Connections.

Click Joint Settings.
3 Click Add.
4 In the Add Joint dialog box, enter a joint name (for example:
FlangedGroundStrap).
5 Under connection settings, select one or more End 1 connection types

(for example: FL).
6 Select one or more End 2 connection types (for example: FL).

7 Select one or more Fasteners (for example: Gasket, Boltset).
8 Under Property Matches, click Add Property.
9 In the Select Class Property dialog box, under Class, select Port.
10 Under Properties, select Nominal Diameter.
11 Click OK.
12 Repeat steps 8 through 11 to add additional match properties (for

example: Pressure Class, Facing).
13 Click Add.
14 In the Project Setup dialog box, Click OK.
NOTE You can use the Substitute grip to exchange compatible connector
types. Press the CTRL key to select sub-objects in a compound joint.
Configure Connectors | 181

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
PLANTENDCODES
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Connections - Joint Settings (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)
Manage Endcode Dialog Box
Add Endcode Dialog Box
Modify Endcode Dialog Box
Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties

You can customize the default mappings of P&ID and Plant 3D classes and
properties to reflect your company requirements.
You can also add new mappings at any time.
Understand Mapping
You can place the Plant 3D equivalent of a P&ID object in a model if the two
objects are mapped appropriately. The AutoCAD Plant 3D predefined mapping
scheme provides a starting point for any customized mappings you require.
In the following example, the P&ID class Gate Valve is mapped to the Plant
3D class Valve (gate). When you insert the Plant 3D Valve (gate), the mapped
properties and their respective values become part of the model and are
viewable in the Data Manager.

NOTE In this example, the value Jackson’s is not inserted in the model because
the Supplier property has no mapping.
P&ID Class Plant 3D P&ID Property and Plant 3D Property and

Class Value Value
Gate Valve Valve (gate)
Description: A valve of the Description: A valve of the

gate type gate type
Manufacturer: Roper’s Manufacturer: Roper’s
ModelNumber: 20303 ItemCode: 20303
Size:18” Nominal diameter
Supplier (no mapping): Supplier (no mapping)

Jackson’s
NOTE Some Plant 3D properties are spec-based and thus unavailable for mapping.
On the P&ID Mapping pane, under 3D Classes, Property Mapping, spec-based
properties are marked with an asterisk (*). They are available for validation only.
View P&ID and Plant 3D Object Data in the Data Manager

You can view current P&ID drawing data and the corresponding current Plant
3D drawing data in the Data Manager. Following is an example of the P&ID
Line List showing drawing contents that you can place in a Plant 3D model.
Map P&ID and Plant 3D Classes and Properties | 183

Following is an example of the P&ID valve information from the same drawing
as shown in the Data Manager.
Following is an example of the corresponding Plant 3D valve information as

shown in the Data Manager after the component has been placed in the model.
NOTE To view this type of comparison, you can set the Plant 3D Data Manager
configuration to order the tree view by object type instead of area. See Configure
Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150
Map a P&ID Class to Multiple Plant 3D Classes

You can map a P&ID class to more than one Plant 3D class. For example, in
the default mapping scheme, the P&ID class Vessel is mapped both to the Plant
3D class Vessel and to Tank (Vessel).

To edit an existing mapping

Project Setup.
P&ID Object Mapping.
3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, do the following:

■ Under P&ID Classes, expand the tree and click the desired P&ID object
(for example: Gate Valve).
■ Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Plant 3D Class Mappings list, click the
current mapping (for example: Valve Gate-Inline, Gate-Angle,
Gate-3-Way).
■ Click Edit.

4 In the Select Plant 3D Class Mapping dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Plant 3D Classes, expand the tree. Click a class (for example:
Valve).
■ Select the Map To All Subtypes of This Class check box, or, under Map
To One or More Specific Subtypes of This Class, select or clear
appropriate check boxes.
■ Click OK.
5 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under Plant 3D Classes, in the

Property Mapping table, do the following:
■ In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down lists, click the
appropriate values to adjust.
■ To set the validation process to check the property mappings for the
mapped item, select the check box labeled Check This Item During
3D To PID Validation.
To set the validation process to ignore the property mappings of this
item, clear the check box. For more information on mapping and

validation, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page
360.
■ Click OK.
To delete an existing mapping

Project Setup.
3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, do the following:

■ Under P&ID Classes, expand the tree and click a P&ID object (for
example: Gate Valve).

■ Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Plant 3D Class Mappings list, click the
current mapping (for example: Valve Gate-Inline, Gate-Angle,
Gate-3-Way).
■ Click Delete.
■ When prompted to confirm the deletion, click Yes.
To map a new P&ID object to a Plant 3D object

When a new P&ID object class is introduced during a project, you can map
it to a corresponding Plant 3D object class.

Project Setup.

3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under P&ID Classes, expand the tree
and click the new P&ID object (for example: New_Valve).
4 Under Plant 3D Classes, click Add.
5 In the Select Plant 3D Class Mapping dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Plant 3D Classes, expand the tree. Click a class (for example:
Valve).
■ Select the Map To All Subtypes of This Class check box, or, under Map
To One or More Specific Subtypes of This Class, select or clear
appropriate check boxes.
■ Click OK.

6 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under Plant 3D Classes, in the
Property Mapping table, do the following:
■ In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down list, click
appropriate properties to correspond with properties in the P&ID
Property column (for example: match Manufacturer to Manufacturer).
■ To set the validation process to check the property mappings for the
mapped item, select the check box labeled Check This Item During
3D To PID Validation.
To set the validation process to ignore the property mappings of this
item, clear the check box. For more information on mapping and
validation, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page
360.
■ Click OK.

To create a new property mapping
When a new P&ID property is added during a project, you can map it to a
corresponding Plant 3D property.

Project Setup.
3 On the P&ID Object Mapping pane, under P&ID Classes, expand the tree,
and click the P&ID object to which you have added a property (for
example: Valve).

4 Under Plant 3D Classes, in the Property Mapping table, do the following:
■ In the P&ID Property column, locate the property you have added
(for example, Material).
■ In the Plant 3D Property column, in the drop-down list, click the

corresponding 3D property (for example, Material).
5 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
P&ID Object Mapping (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)
Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects

Class definitions specify the attributes and properties of Plant 3D objects.
Class definitions are divided into the following families:
■ P3D Line Group. Includes line groups.
■ Piping and Equipment. Includes equipment, pipe run components, and

fasteners.
■ Steel Structure. Includes structure members, railings, ladders, and so on.
Although you cannot add class definitions, you can modify the following
properties:
■ Properties. The values assigned to a Plant 3D object class definition to

determine how it looks and behaves in a 3D model, and the values that
are attached to a Plant 3D object (such as default value, description,
substitution, supported standards, and so on).
■ Tag format. The information that comprises a unique tag for a component
or line.
■ Annotation format. The information that comprises an annotation for a

Plant 3D object on an orthographic drawing.
Set Up Class Definitions for Plant 3D Objects | 193

To modify a class definition for a Plant 3D object

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you find the item (for example: Piping
and Equipment ➤ Equipment ➤ Heater) whose definition you want to
change.
4 Under Properties, do the following:

■ Change the value for the Display Name property. (This information
is displayed in the Data Manager.)
■ Change the value for the Default Value property.
■ Add or remove custom properties as needed for the class or line

definition.
■ Change the values of other properties as needed (such as tagging

format, annotation style, and so on).

5 Under Tag Format, add, modify, or remove tagging formats associated
with the specified class or line definition.
6 Under Annotation, add, modify, or remove annotation styles associated

with the specified class or line definition.
7 Click OK.
To specify property visibility and read-only status for the Data Manager

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you find the item whose property values
you want to change (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment ➤
Heater).

4 Under Properties, do the following:
■ In the Read Only column, select the check boxes for those properties
you want presented as read-only in the Data Manager.
■ In the Visible in Area View column, select the check boxes for those
properties you want displayed in the Data Manager for tree views
ordered by area. You can right-click and click Select All or Clear All
as needed.
■ In the Visible Object View column, select the check boxes for those
properties you want displayed in the Data Manager for tree views
ordered by class (object type). You can right-click and click Select All
or Clear All as needed.
5 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Plant 3D Class Definitions (Plant 3D DWG Settings Tree Node)
Set Up Properties (Plant 3D)

You can set up properties, which store information about objects in a 3D
drawing.
Plant 3D objects contain properties that control how the objects look when
placed into a Plant 3D drawing. These properties also store non-graphical
information that can be extracted out of the drawing. Properties for a Plant
3D object class definition can be defined as one of the following data types:
■ String. Permits a free-form text value for a property.
■ Numeric. Verifies that only a positive or negative number is entered for a

property.
■ Boolean. Permits a choice between true and false.
■ Symbol List. (unavailable for Plant 3D objects) Defines a list of choices that
control the symbol for a component in a P&ID drawing. This option is
available only for P&ID objects when more than one symbol is associated
with a class.
■ Selection List. Defines a list of property values. If a value is not displayed

in the predefined list, it can be entered as free-form text.
■ Acquisition. Defines a rule stating that a component property acquires its

value from another property. For example, a rule states that a hand valve

acquires its size from the corresponding property of a line. The source can
be chosen from class, project, or drawing properties.
NOTE When you set up properties for a project, make sure no one else is
accessing that project. If others are working in the project, your changes are
not saved.
To add a property to a class definition

Project Setup.
whose property you want to add.

■ Under Property Name, enter a name for the new property. The name
cannot contain any spaces.
the new property when using the Data Manager or Properties palette.
■ Under Choose a Type, choose one of the available data types.
6 Click OK.
If you specified Selection List or Symbol List, the appropriate dialog box
is displayed to let you create either a selection list or symbol list.
If you specified Acquisition, the Select Data Source dialog box is displayed,
where you specify the source from which the property value is acquired.
7 Click OK.
To modify a property for a class definition

Project Setup.
whose property you want to edit.

you want to edit. Do one of the following:
■ Under Property Description, click the box and enter a new description.
■ Under Default Value, either click the box and enter a new value or,
in the drop-down list, click a value. If the default value is Acquisition,
in the drop-down list, click an appropriate item.
■ If the property type is List, click Edit to change the selection or symbol
list that is assigned to the property.
■ Under Acquisition, click the [...] button and click Add Acquisition
Rule. In the Select Data Source dialog box, specify the source where
the property value is acquired.
NOTE To change the name of the property or its type, delete the property
and then add it again.
5 Click OK.
To delete a property from a class definition

Project Setup.

whose property you want to delete.
you want to delete. Click Remove.
NOTE You can delete the property only if it is defined at the specified class
level. If the property is inherited from a parent class, the Remove button is
unavailable.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Properties (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)
Set Up Property Acquisition

When you specify Acquisition as a property type, you set up a rule stating
that the property acquires its value from another property.
The acquisition source can be another class, project, or drawing property.
Acquisition ensures consistency among component property values. If the
source value changes, all components set to acquire that value change as well.
Property acquisition is also useful for maintaining consistent tagging. When
you change a source value, tag formats that are based on acquired properties
update automatically throughout the project.

Understand Property Acquisition Rules
You can choose without restriction any drawing property or project property
as the source of an acquisition rule. Class properties, however, because they
are specification-based, would rarely be set up to acquire values from other
properties.
If, however, you do specify a class property as the source, make sure that the
acquiring class and the source class are connected.
You can set up property acquisition rules when the following relationships
exist:
■ Pipe Run Component and P3D Line Group
■ Fasteners and P3D Line Group
■ Nozzles and Equipment
The following properties have acquisition rules set by default. You can view
them when you create a new project:
PipeRunComponent.InsulationThickness P3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness
PipeRunComponent.InsulationType P3dLineGroup.InsulationType
PipeRunCompoment.Service P3dLineGroup.Service
Fasterners.InsulationThickness P3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness
Fasteners.InsulationType P3dLineGroup.InsulationType
Fasterners.Service P3dLineGroup.Service
Equipment.Area Drawing.General.Area
Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode

A property that is set to acquire its value from another property is in Acquire
mode. However, you can switch this property into Override mode and edit
the value manually. Once a property is in Override mode, its value is no longer

In the program, an icon next to the property indicates whether the property
is in Override mode or Acquire mode. The icons appear in the Properties
palette, the Data Manager, and the Assign Tag dialog box. When the Override
icon is displayed, you can edit the value.
■ The property is in Acquire mode.
■ The property is in Override mode
Understand Initialization Only

Select Acquisition (the default) to set up a property to acquire its value from
another property. You can also specify Initialization Only, which sets the
acquisition to occur only once (when the component is first initialized). After
initialization, the property switches to Override mode. When the property is
in Override mode, you can edit the value manually because it is no longer
To set up a new property acquisition rule

Project Setup.
2 In the Project Setup tree view, expand Plant 3D Class Definitions.
whose property acquisition rule you want to create (for example: Pipe Run
Component ➤ Valve).
4 In the Class Settings pane, under Properties, click Add.

■ Under Property Name, enter the property name (for example:
PipelineDescription).
■ Under Display Name, enter the new property name you want displayed
in the Data Manager or the Properties palette (for example:
PipelineDescription).
■ Under Choose A Type, click Acquisition. Click OK.

following:
■ Under Categories, locate and click an item (for example: P3d Line
Group).
■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: Description). Click OK.
To add an acquisition rule for an existing property

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the class containing
the property whose acquisition property you want to change (for example:
Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).

column, click a property (for example: Type).
following:
■ Under Categories, expand Piping and Equipment.
example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe Run Component ➤ Pipe).
■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: InsulationType). Click

OK.

To edit an acquisition rule for a property

Project Setup.
property you want to change (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe
Run Component ➤ Pipe).
4 On the Class Settings pane, Under Properties, locate the property whose
acquisition rule you want to edit.
following:
■ Under Categories, expand Piping and Equipment.

example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Pipe Run Component ➤ Pipe).
■ Under Properties, click a property (for example: InsulationType). Click

OK.
To remove an acquisition rule from a property

Project Setup.
property you want to change (for example: Pipe Run Component ➤ Valve).
acquisition rule you want to remove.
Click Remove Acquisition Rule.
To override an acquisition property

You can override an acquisition property using the Data Manager or the
Properties palette. The following steps describe overriding an acquisition
property using the Properties palette.
1 In a drawing, right-click the Plant 3D object whose acquisition rule you

want to override. Click Properties.
2 In the Properties palette, locate the property you want to change. Click
the field in the right column.
3 Click Acquire Mode. In the flyout menu, click Override Mode.
4 Enter a new value.
5 Close the Properties Palette.

NOTE When you export data from the Data Manager to a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet, you can change the values of properties that are in Acquire
mode in Excel. When you import the file into the Data Manager and accept
the changes, the new values are displayed and the properties are automatically
changed to Override mode. See Import Modified Acquisition Properties on
page 531
To change how an existing property acquisition rule is applied

Project Setup.
property you want to change (for example: Pipe Run Component Valve).

column, locate the InsulationThickness property row. In the Default
Value column, click the box to display the drop-down list. Do either of
the following:
■ To set the property so that it always acquires its value from
Pipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness, click Acquisition (the default).
■ To set the property so that its value is acquired once (when a valve is
first initialized), click Initialization Only.
NOTE After initialization, a valve's property value changes to Override

mode. Users can edit the property value.
In the Acquisition column, the valve size is displayed as acquired from

Pipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThicknessness. If Pipe3dLineGroup.InsulationThickness
has a value of 3”, that value appears in the Data Manager for this valve.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Properties (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)
Set Up Selection Lists

Use selection lists to enforce standard sizes for items such as piping specs,
piping sizes, and instrument types, or when you want designers to choose
from a predefined set of options.
Understand Selection Lists

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a set of selection lists. You can add your own
items or delete items that are not relevant to your drafting environment. In
the Data Manager, designers can also enter their own values in the lists.
As part of your project setup tasks, you can set up new selection lists or change
the values of an existing list.
To create a selection list

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a Plant 3D object
class definition (for example: Piping and Equipment).

■ Under Type, click Selection List.
Pump_Manufacturers). The name cannot contain any spaces.
the new property (for example: Pump Manufacturers) in the Data
Manager or Properties palette.
6 Click OK.

list (for example: Manufacturers). Click OK.
10 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value (for example: Goulds)
12 Click OK.
On the Class Settings pane, under Properties, the selection list is displayed
for the selected class definition. The value displayed in the list is the
default value for that Plant 3D object.

To modify or delete items in a selection list

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click a class definition
(for example: Piping and Equipment).

column, click the property containing the selection list you want to
modify. Click Edit.
5 In the Selection List Property dialog box, click the property whose data
you want to change (for example: Manufacturers).
6 Click Add Row.
7 In the Add Row dialog box, enter the new value and a description of the
new selection list entry (for example: Bechtel). Click OK.
In the Selection List Property dialog box, under Value, the new selection
list entry is added.
8 In the Selection List Property dialog box, select a value (for example:
Goulds). Click Delete Row.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Selection List Property Dialog Box (Properties)
Set Up Tag Formatting (Plant 3D)

You can set up tag formats to help designers apply tag elements consistently
throughout a project cycle.
Many projects require specific tag numbering formats for different Plant 3D
object. You can define different tag numbering formats for your projects.
You can set up tag formats for equipment, valves, nozzles, instrumentation,
pipe lines, and pipe line groups by creating new tag formats or modifying
existing formats. You select an existing format on which to base the new
format. You can also create a new tag format.
Set Up Tag Formatting for a Class

Tag formats are set up for a class definition project-wide. Most of the default
tag formats tag items at the class definition level (for example: a class definition
type, such as equipment).
You can use the property of a class, drawing, or project in the tag format. For
example, a tag for a component can contain a class property such as Spec, a
drawing property such as Area, or a project property such as Project Number.
Tag formats are flexible. You can set them up to reflect the specific needs of
your company.

Set Up Tag Formatting Using Acquiring Properties
Tag formats can include properties that acquire their values from other
properties. For example, if a line acquires its Unit value from a project-level
property, you can use that acquiring property in the tag format. If the Unit
value at the project level changes, all tags with that property as a subpart are
updated to reflect that change.
Set Up Tag Formatting for a Pipe Line Group

Pipes are the only components that are automatically grouped. Although pipe
line groups are not physical entities, you set up tag formatting for pipe line
groups just as you would for any other component.
The default tag format for a pipe line group is Line Number. You can add other
properties as needed (for example: Service).
Understand Default Tag Formatting Templates

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides the following tag format templates for you to use
or modify to fit with your company tag formatting standards:





100).

Build Tag Formatting Expressions

You can define how tag elements are expressed. For example, you can create
an instrument tag of Area-Type-Loop Number_Suffix (for example:

25-FE-1002_A). You can control the formatting of the values that can be
assigned when tagging a component or line through expressions.
Using expressions, you can designate whether a value must be entered as text
characters, numbers, or any combination of text characters and numbers
(free-style value).
You can also define an expression to generate a value automatically when a
designer adds a component to a drawing. You can set automatic expressions
to a drawing property or project property.
Understand Tag Uniqueness

In general, a tag property must be unique. Even items of different types must
have unique tags. For example, if you assign the tag A-123 to a pump, you
cannot assign the identical tag to a tank.
Two exceptions to tag uniqueness are as follows:
■ Line segment tags can be identical. The tag properties of a line group must
be unique, but the tag properties of the line segments within that line group
can be the same.
■ A large component that stretches across drawings can have duplicate tags.
Duplicate tags can represent different parts of the same item. For example,
a line that spans drawings using an off-page connector can have the same
tag in each drawing.
To create a tag format

Project Setup.

(for example: Compressor).
on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Equipment
Tag [Type-Number]). Click New.
5 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box, enter the
name of the new format (for example: Equipment Tag [type-number] New).

TIP Use as many properties as subparts as needed. Use delimiters only

between these subparts, not within them. Delimiters appear between the
subparts in a tag if you place them in the Delimiter box. Entering a dash
between items in the Field box (for example, N-N-N) can produce unexpected
results.
7 In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties (the first icon
on the left).

■ Under Class, click Equipment.
■ Under Property, click Type.
■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property.
■ Click OK.

9 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row of icons,
click Select Drawing Properties.

■ Under Drawing Properties, click Drawing Area.
■ Click OK.
11 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the second row of icons,
click Define Expression (the last icon in the row).
12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, click No Expression

(Free Style Value). Click OK.

13 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, in the third row of icons,
click Define Expression.

■ Click Numbers.

15 Click OK.
16 In the Tag Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter where
appropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the delimiter
for General.Area[].
17 Click OK.

column, click TagFormatName.

drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging the Plant
3D object.

20 Click OK.
You created a new tag format and assigned it to a Plant 3D object. When you
use the Plant 3D object in a drawing, the Assign Tag dialog box prompts you
to enter tag data for the tag format you created in this procedure.
To create a tag format for pipe line groups

Project Setup.
3 Continue to expand the list until you locate and click the item you want
to tag (for example: P3d Line Groups).
on which you want to base the new tag format (for example: Line Number),
and then click New.

example: P3d Line Groups - Service).
■ In the Name of Subparts box, enter the number of subparts you want
in the tag (for example: 2), or click the Up arrow until the number 2
is displayed.
■ In the bottom row of icons, click Select Class Properties (the

first icon on the left).

■ Under Class, click Pipe Line Groups.
■ Under Property, click a property (for example: Service).
■ Select the check box for Use Target Object’s Property. Click OK.
7 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, click OK.


9 In the TagFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the drop-don
list, click the tag format you want to use (for example: select P3d Line
Groups - Service).
10 Click OK.
To assign a tag format to a class definition

Project Setup.
example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag format
whose class definition you want to assign.


drop-down list, click the tag format you want to use for tagging a Plant
3D object.
6 Click OK.
To modify a tag format for a class definition

Project Setup.

example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag
formatting you want to change.
want to modify.
5 Click Modify.
6 In the Tag Format Setup dialog box, make the desired changes to the tag
format. Click OK.
7 Click OK.

To remove a tag format from a class definition

Project Setup.
example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment) that contains the tag
formatting you want to delete.
want to delete.
5 Click Delete.
NOTE If the selected tag format is either in a drawing that is part of the
project or is currently assigned to a Plant 3D object, a message is displayed,
informing you that this tag format cannot be deleted.
7 Click OK.

To add automatically generated drawing properties

Project Setup.
class definition (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).


6 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Autogenerate, do the

following:
■ Select the Autogenerate Expression check box.

■ Click Drawing Field.
■ Click the Drawing icon.
7 In the Select Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.
8 In the New Drawing Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the

following:
■ Under Name, enter the name for the new property.
■ Under Description, enter a description for the new property.
9 Click OK until the Project Setup dialog box is displayed.

In the Project Setup dialog box, under Tag Format, the new tag is added.

To add automatically generated project properties

Project Setup.
class definition (for example: Piping and Equipment ➤ Equipment).


6 In the Define Expression dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Autogenerate, select the Autogenerate Expression check box.
Click Project Field.
■ Click the Project icon.

7 In the Select Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, click New.
8 In the New Project Autogeneration Property dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Name box, enter the name for the new property.
■ In the Description box, enter a description for the new property.
■ In the Last Used Value box, enter the value to use for the last value
for the new property.
■ In the Increment Value box, enter the increment value for the new
property.
9 Click OK until all open dialog boxes are closed.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Tag Format (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree Node)
Set Up Annotations for Orthographic Drawings

You can place formatted annotation text on an orthographic drawing.
You can create an annotation format that is based on an existing annotation
format or create a new annotation format.
NOTE Annotations are available for Equipment, Pipe Run Components, and P3D
Line Group classes only.
To create an annotation format

Project Setup.
(for example: Valve).
4 On the Class Settings pane, under Annotation, click the annotation format
on which you want to base the new format. Click New.

5 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, in the Format Name box,
enter the name of the new format (for example: New Hand Valve
Annotation).
7 In the first row of icons, click Select Class Properties.

■ Under Class, click Valve.
■ Under Property, click Material.
■ Click OK.

9 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the second row
of icons, click Select Drawing Properties (the second icon).

■ Under Drawing Properties, click a property (for example: Drawing

Area).
■ Click OK.

11 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the second row
of icons, click Define Expression.
12 In the Define Expression dialog box, under Results, select the check box
for No Expression (Free Style Value). Click OK.

13 In the Annotation Format Setup dialog box, for the third row of
icons, click Define Expression.

■ Click Numbers.

15 Click OK.
16 In the Annotation Format dialog box, under Delimiter, enter a delimiter

where appropriate. In the example below, a period (.) is used as the
delimiter for General.Area[].
17 Click OK.

column, click AnnotationFormatName.
19 In the AnnotationFormatName row, in the Default Value column, in the

drop-down list, click the annotation format you want to use.

20 Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Annotation Format for Orthographic Drawings (Plant 3D Class Definitions Tree
Node)
Point Users to the Project Location

When you have completed the project configuration, you are ready to point
users to the project location to start their designing.
To point users to the project location

The simplest way to notify your users about how to access the project directory
is to send email instructions. At a minimum, the instructions should include
the location of the project and instructions about changing the project file
locations.
Provide users with the following procedure.

Open Project.
2 In the Open dialog box, browse to the location of the project, and select
the project.xml file.
3 Click OK.

Organize Project Drawings
3
After you have set up the project environment, you can use the Project Manager to assemble
and organize project drawings.
Overview: Organize Project Drawings

You can use the Project Manager to open a project, organize project files, and
ensure that all project team members have a consistent working environment.
Understand the Project Manager

Using the Project Manager, you can assemble all project drawings and documents
in a centralized storage area. You can copy files into project folders or link them
to the project. Linked files can exist elsewhere on the server or on a local file
system. Either method ensures that all project files are available to project
members. You can also publish project drawings from the Project Manager.
239
The Project Manager has three tabs, each with a predefined structure that
keeps various types of files segregated and easy to access. You can create folders
or subfolders within the existing structure.
The Source Files tab includes the following default folders:
■ P&ID Drawings. Contains schematic drawings
■ Plant 3D Drawings. Contains Plant 3D models
■ Related Files. Contains supplemental reference files, including

documents, spreadsheets, or generic AutoCAD drawings.
The Orthographic DWG and Isometric tabs provide access to your orthographic
and isometric drawings.
Organize the project using these steps:
■ Open a new or existing project.
■ Assemble the files that belong to a project by linking or copying them to

the project. Add or include referenced files, as needed. The resulting
project tree is an organizational tool that helps you find related drawings
240 | Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings

no matter where they reside physically. When you select a parent drawing,
xrefs appear as child nodes.
■ If necessary, create new folders and subfolders to organize files in logical

groupings. By grouping related files in a folder, you can quickly select all
files for specific tasks.
■ Set properties for drawings. You can set up a drawing number, title, area,
author, and description, and any other properties set up by your project
administrator.
Set Up the Project Files

Start a new project by choosing a template, assembling the project drawings,
and organizing the drawings into logical groups.
Create a Project
Start a project by duplicating an existing project or creating a project from a
standard template.
Create a Project Based on an Existing Project

In most cases, project templates are set up by a CAD manager or another
person in your company who is responsible for defining drawing standards.
The templates are existing projects whose configuration settings meet company
standards. When you start a new project, you can designate another project
as the template, and then set the name and location for your new project.
The new project inherits the settings from the project used as a template.
As you start a project, you can also update the properties that are defined for
these templates. Before updating these properties, make sure that you check
with your CAD manager to find out about your company requirements.
Create a Project
When you create a project, you specify the name, description, and location
of the various project files. If you are creating a P&ID project, you can choose
the appropriate standard (for example, PIP, ISA, ISO, DIN, and JIS/ISO). To
create a new project, see Set Up a New Project on page 7. For information
about specifying these settings, see Create and Configure a Project on page
7.
Set Up the Project Files | 241

Include Referenced Drawings (Xrefs)
You can attach a drawing to the current drawing as a referenced drawing (xref).
Understand Referencing Drawings

Attached xrefs are linked to a drawing rather than being inserted into it. For
example, you can create a project drawing that contains little, if any, piping
content but has references to many other piping drawings. This drawing is a
“master” drawing that shows several individual piping drawings in appropriate
relationship to one another.
You can reference files using two basic methods:
■ Reference a drawing to an existing project drawing.
■ Add a drawing to a project that has xrefs already associated with it.
When you click the drawing to which a referenced drawing is associated, the
xref appears as a child node. (If the xref is a drawing that exists in the project,
it does not appear as a child node.)
When you attach an xref, follow these guidelines:
■ Make sure that the xref belongs to the project to which it is attached.
■ Attach basic AutoCAD drawings only to P&ID drawings.
■ Make sure referenced drawings share a schema with the host drawing. For
example, attach an xref to a P&ID drawing only from a P&ID drawing.
Attach an xref to a Plant 3D drawing only from a Plant 3D drawing.
■ Attach all xrefs at a 0,0,0 origin for Plant 3D drawings.
■ Do not use the AutoCAD command refedit with plant objects (pipes,
fittings, and so on).
■ Attaching a drawing as an xref does not create additional data cache rows.
The xref is a reference only.
■ Use the AutoCAD command xref-bind to copy a referenced drawing into

a Plant 3D drawing. This action does create new rows in the data cache.
NOTE Only drawings that adhere to these guidelines can be opened or added
to a Plant 3D project.

If you do not know how to reference a drawing, see “Reference Other Drawing
Files” in the AutoCAD Help system.
Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders

As you assemble your project files, you can link or copy the files to their
respective folders on the Source Files tab of the Project Manager.
You can also reference other drawings as xrefs.
Link or Copy Files

You can either link or copy files to a project or use a combination of copying
and linking, depending on your requirements.
When you link a file:
■ The linked file remains in its original location with a reference to it in the
project.
■ If you are referencing many drawings rather than creating new ones, you
can save disk space.
■ The file can be referenced to one project only.
When you copy a file:
■ The copied file is physically placed in the project root folder.
■ It is a separate file, not connected to the original, and can thus belong to
more than one project.
Link or Copy Files With External References (xrefs)

You can either link or copy files with xrefs to a project, but linking is the
recommended method.
When you link a file with xrefs:
■ The linked file remains in its original location with a reference to it in the
project.
■ If you are referencing many drawings rather than creating new ones, you
can save disk space.
■ The file can be referenced to one project only.
Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders | 243

■ The process takes a relatively short time.
When you copy a file with xrefs:
■ All xrefs and nested xrefs are copied to the project 3D drawings folder.
■ The host drawing xref links are removed as the drawing now exists in the
same folder as the xrefs.
■ The process takes longer than the linking process.
To link or copy existing drawings to the project
1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a destination folder (for example,
P&ID Drawings).
2 Click either Link To Drawing or Copy Drawing To Project.
3 In the Select Files dialog box, locate and click the drawing you want to
copy or link to the project. Click Open.
NOTE If you click a drawing with a read-only status, change that status to
read-write before opening the file.
4 Repeat these steps until you have copied or linked all project drawings.
To resolve issues that prevent opening read-only files

You cannot add a drawing that has a read-only status. Before you open the
drawing, make sure no one else has opened it, or turn off the Read-Only
attribute in Windows Explorer.
1 Attempt to link or copy an existing drawing to a project.

If the drawing has a read-only status, the Read-Only DWG Error dialog
box is displayed. Read-only status results from one of the following
conditions:
■ Another designer has the drawing open. Click OK. Request that the
designer close the drawing and go to step 3.
■ The Read-Only attribute has been set for the drawing. Click OK and
go to step 2.
2 To change the read-only status of the drawing, in Windows Explorer,

right-click the file. Click Properties.

3 In the Properties dialog box (Windows), in the Attributes section, clear
the Read-Only check box. Click OK.
To start a new drawing from within a project
1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a destination folder (for example,
P&ID Drawings).
2 Click New Drawing.
3 In the New DWG dialog box, under Drawing Properties, do the following:
■ In the DWG Number box, enter the number of the drawing.
■ In the DWG Title box, enter the title of the drawing.
NOTE The DWG Number and Title you enter is duplicated in the File
Name box.
■ To use a different file name, enter it in the File Name box.
4 Click OK.
5 In the Project Manager tree view, locate and right-click the drawing you
created. Click Properties.
6 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Area box, enter the plant area documented in this drawing.
■ In the Description box, enter a description of the drawing.
7 Click OK.
To remove a drawing from a project
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want to
remove. Click Remove Drawing.
2 To confirm the removal, in the Remove Drawings From Project message,

click OK.
The drawing is removed from the project tree, but it is not removed from
your computer.
NOTE If you intend to reuse this drawing later, make sure that you save the
drawing before you remove the drawing from the project.
Link or Copy Files to the Project Folders | 245

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Organize Project Files

Arrange files in the Project Manager to provide easy access to the drawings in
your project.
Use Folders to Organize Drawings

Grouping related drawings into folders within the Project Manager helps you
catalog them for easier reference. The folders you create in the Project manager
are virtual folders, defined for your project in the <project name>.xml file.
NOTE The default folders cannot be changed or removed, but you can create
additional nested folders under them. The default folders on the Source Files tab
are labeled P&ID Drawings, Plant 3D Drawings, and Related Files.
Understand Absolute Paths and Relative Paths in the Project Manager

How you set up the folder structure depends on how you plan to work. If you
are in a multi-user environment where everyone accesses the same network
locations, you can set up absolute paths, which define specific folder locations.
NOTE If you define a folder path on a virtual drive, make sure that all project
members map the network location to the same drive letter.
If you plan to transmit project files to someone without access to your network,
set up a relative path. A relative path retains the project folder hierarchy when
it is copied to another system.

To create a folder
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click an existing folder. Click New
Folder.
2 In the Project Folder Properties dialog box, enter the folder name.
3 To specify the type of folder path, do one of the following:

■ To specify a relative path, select the check box labeled Create Folders
Relative to Parent Folder Storage Location. The folder paths retain the
same folder hierarchy, even when the project files are moved to
another computer.
■ To specify an absolute path, clear the check box labeled Create Folders
Relative to Parent Folder Storage Location. Under Store New Project
DWG Files In, click [...]. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, find and
click a folder. Click Open.
4 To specify how default templates are assigned for drawings in the folder,
do one of the following:
■ To set a specific template for each folder, clear the Prompt For
Template check box. Under DWG Creation Template For Folder, click
[...]. In the Browse For Folder dialog box, find and click a folder. Click
Open.
■ To prompt for a template for each new drawing, select the Prompt
for Template check box. Use this option if you use different project
templates for different projects.
5 Click OK.
Organize Project Files | 247

To rename a folder
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a folder. Click Rename Folder.
2 In the Project Folder Properties dialog box, under Folder Name, enter a
new name for the folder.
3 Click OK.
To remove an empty folder
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the folder you want to remove.
Click Remove Folder.
NOTE This option is not available for default folders or folders that contain content
or other nested folders.
To change the order of drawings or folders in a project
■ In the Project Manager tree view, click a folder or drawing and drag it to
the new location in the tree hierarchy.
A long bar bounded on either end by arrows indicates the insertion
location.
To insert a drawing in a folder or create nested folders
1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the folder or drawing that you
want to move and drag it directly over another folder.
A single arrow on the right end of the name of the folder or file indicates
the parent node for the node you are moving.
2 Release the button to place the drawing or folder.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Set Drawing Properties

You can update drawing properties, such as title and author.
Set Drawing Properties

You can set properties, which include the drawing title, the drawing number,
the author, the project area, and a short description of the drawing.
The drawing title you enter in the Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed
in the Project Manager. If you change the title, you do not change the file
name.
TIP You can automate the insertion of drawing properties into title blocks. For
more information, see Add Project Data to a Drawing on page 255.
Set Values for Automatic Numbering of Components (P&ID drawings only)

The components you add to your drawing can be sequentially numbered.
Using an advanced feature of the program (in the Project Setup dialog box),
the system administrator can set which components are subject to numbering.
However, as you assemble drawings for the project, you can also assign the
following values in the Drawing Autogen Properties dialog box:
■ A starting ID number for components added to the selected drawing
■ The amount by which each newly signed ID number is increased when a

component is added to the drawing
Set Drawing Properties | 249

For example, within a project, you can set up batches of numbers. In on project
drawing, for example, valve numbering starts at 100 and increases by 5 each
time a valve is added. Another drawing starts at 200, and so on.
To set drawing properties
2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, enter the following information:

■ DWG Title. Displays the name of the selected drawing file as it appears
in the project tree (Project Manager).
■ DWG Number. Sets a value corresponding to the number typically

placed on the title block for the drawing.
■ Author. Specifies the name of the person who created the drawing.
■ Description. Specifies information about the contents of the drawing.
■ Drawing Area. Specifies the plant area documented in this drawing.
3 Click OK.
To add a drawing number to a drawing
2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, in the DWG Number box, enter a
drawing number.
3 Click OK.

To set values for automatic component numbering (P&ID drawings only)
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a P&ID drawing. Click

Drawing Autogen Properties.
2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, enter the following information

for each component listed:
■ Last Used Value. Number that represents the starting point for the
number of that component in the selected drawing.
■ Increment. The amount by which the ID number increases whenever

a new component is added.
3 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Set Drawing Properties | 251

252
Work in a Project
Environment 4
You can create drawings from within a project environment.
The project environment ensures that you and other designers are working with the same
drawing files, data, and templates.
Overview: The Project Environment

The work you do to create and share drawings is initiated from within the Project
Manager.
Work with Project Drawings

Before you open a drawing, you can preview it, refresh the status to see who
else is working on it, and add notes and status information.
Open a Project
The Project Manager displays the last project you opened. You can start work
immediately, switch to a recent project, or search for another project.
NOTE If you attempt to open a project that was created in a previous version,
migrate the project first. For more information, see Migrate Projects and Drawings
on page 575.
253
To open a project
■ In the Project Manager, open the drop-down list and click the file name
of the project you want to open.
Ribbon: Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager drop-down menu

➤ Open Project
Command entry: OPENPROJECT
Quick Reference
Commands
OPENPROJECT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Get Ready to Design

As you get ready to design, review the project to make sure that the drawings
are ready for editing.
■ Preview the drawing. Make sure that you are opening the correct drawing
by clicking the Preview button in the bottom toolbar.
■ Refresh drawing status. Quickly display the editing status of the drawings
in the project by clicking the Refresh DWG Status button on the Project
toolbar. The drawing icon in the Project Manager represents the drawing
status.
The drawing status is displayed as follows:
■ Available. The drawing can be opened for editing.
■ Locked. The drawing is already open and you cannot open or edit
it.
254 | Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment

■ Missing. The drawing has been moved or removed.
To open a project drawing
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open.
To view a project drawing in read-only mode
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open

Read-Only.
To preview drawings in the Project Manager
1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the drawing you want to preview.
2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Preview.
Quick Reference
Commands
OPENPROJECT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Add Project Data to a Drawing

You can use fields to add and update project data.
Each drawing in your project possesses properties that you can add to your
drawing title block or other areas of your drawing. Use the FIELD command
to add properties.
Add Project Data to a Drawing | 255

When a field or block containing a field is inserted into a drawing, the field
automatically contains data obtained from the properties stored with the
drawing.
To add a drawing status field into to a drawing
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing. Click Open.
2 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field.
3 In the Field dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Field Category list, click Project.
■ Under Field Names, click CurrentDwgStatus.
■ Under Format, click Title Case.
■ Click OK.
4 Click in the drawing area where you want to display the drawing status.
NOTE The drawing status is displayed as <unassigned> until you assign a
status to the drawing in the Work History dialog box.
To update the drawing status field in a drawing
1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing that already contains
an inserted field.
2 In the Project Manager, on the bottom toolbar, click Work History.
3 Under Status, in the drop-down list, click a status (for example: In Progress,
For Review, Revision 1, Revision 2, and so on).
4 Save the drawing.

NOTE If you change the status during a drawing session, save the drawing
to update the status field.
To set drawing or project data in a title block
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a drawing that you want to
use as the basis for your title block. Click Open.
2 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Data panel ➤ Field.
3 In the Field dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Field Category drop-down list, click Project.
■ Under Field Names, click CurrentDwgTitle.
■ Under Format, click the desired display format.
■ Click OK.
4 Click the area of the title block reserved for the drawing title to position
the field.
5 Repeat steps 2-4 to place fields for other drawing data (such as the drawing
number or the project name).
6 Save the drawing.
To use a title block containing field information
2 At the Command prompt, enter insert.
3 In the Insert dialog box, click Browse.
4 In the Select Drawing File dialog box, locate and click a drawing to use
as the title block. Click Open.
5 In the Insert dialog box, under Insertion Point, make sure the Specify
On-Screen check box is selected. Click OK.
6 Place the title block in your current drawing.
To update fields stored in a title block
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing that contains
the title block you want to update. Click Properties.
Add Project Data to a Drawing | 257

2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box, change the drawing properties as
needed. Click OK.
3 At the Command prompt, enter regen.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Add Status Notes About a Drawing

You can add status notes when you open or close a drawing, depending on
how the Work History settings are configured.
The Work History dialog box tracks your comments. It is not a mechanism
for storing, retrieving, or controlling versions of a drawing.
NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open or close a
drawing, the project was configured with work history prompting turned off. For
more information, see Configure General Settings on page 10.
Your project administrator can configure the Work History dialog box to be
displayed when you open or close a drawing, or not at all.

To add status and notes to the Work History
1 Under Status, in the drop-down list, select a status.
2 In the Notes box, enter a description of the changes you made or are
planning to make to the drawing.
3 Click OK.
NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open or
close a drawing, the project was configured with work history prompting
turned off. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page
10
To view Work History status for a drawing
1 In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing.
Add Status Notes About a Drawing | 259

3 Under Status, view the drawing status.
To refresh drawing status
■ In the Project Manager, on the Project toolbar, click Refresh DWG Status.
The drawing status icons are updated to indicate their current editing
status:
■ Locked. The file cannot be opened; another designer is editing it.
■ Missing. The drawing has been moved or removed.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Save Project Drawings

You can save a drawing or the entire project.

Information about the content and organization of project files is stored in a
project.xml file in the location that was designated when the project was created.
Any changes you make to project settings are incorporated into this file.
To save a single project drawing
■ In the Project Manager tree view, click a drawing. Click Application menu
➤ Save or press CTRL+S.
To save all drawings in a project
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project and click Resave All
Project Drawings.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Manage Work History Tracking

Use the work history to record who has worked on a drawing, modifications
made, and the current review status.
Your administrator sets the timing for the work history status and comments.
This setting determines whether work history is updated when the drawing
is opened, when it is closed, or not at all.
To manage work history status
Manage Work History Tracking | 261

NOTE If the Work History dialog box is not displayed when you open or
close a drawing, the project was configured with work history prompting
turned off. For more information, see Configure General Settings on page
10
2 In the Work History dialog box, in the Status list, click Manage.
3 In the Project Status Manager dialog box, do one of the following.

■ To add a new status, click New. In the New Status dialog box, in the
Name box, enter a new status name. Click Ok.
■ To rename an existing status, under Refined Statuses, click a status

name. Click Rename.
■ To delete an existing status, under Refined Statuses, click the status

name and click Delete. Click Close.
4 Click OK.
To display and sort the work history for a drawing
1 In the Project Manager tree view, click the drawing whose work history
status you want to view.
3 To sort the list alphabetically by user or chronologically by date, click

the appropriate column heading. (You cannot sort the status list.)

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Manage Project Files Remotely

You can edit a project drawing outside of the project environment and
synchronize it when you return it to the environment.
When you work on drawings at home or at a client location, you do not have
access to the project network environment. You can use the Project Manager
to remove the file, edit the file remotely, and use the Project Manager again
to return it.
You can also copy files using Microsoft Windows Explorer. When you open
a file that has been copied using Explorer and edited remotely, you may
encounter a message asking you to resolve discrepancies.
To remove a file from the project environment using the Project Manager
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want to
remove. Click Remove Drawing.
To return a file to the project environment using the Project Manager
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project where you want
the file. Click Copy Drawing to Project or Link to Drawing. For more
information about linking or copying, see Link or Copy Files to the Project
Folders on page 243.
Manage Project Files Remotely | 263

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Share Project Drawings

Share your project drawings by sending them over the Internet, printing them,
or publishing DWF or DWFx files.
Package and Transmit a Project

You can package a project so you can send it digitally or include all supporting
documents in an archive. When creating a transmittal, you designate drawings
and related files, such as external references (xrefs) and fonts, to include in
the transmittal. You can also specify file formats, folder structures, and
instructions to the recipient. You create the transmittal package outside of
the project environment.
For more information, see “Package a set of Files for Transmission” in the
AutoCAD Help system.
Print a Project Drawing

Project drawings can be plotted individually or published outside the Project
Manager environment. However, these operations do not recognize the folder
structure set up in the Project Manager.
For more information, see “Plot and Publish Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help
system.
To transmit drawings
1 In the Project Manager tree view right-click a drawing from the project
you want to share.
2 Click Application menu ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit.

3 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, on the Files Tree tab, click Add File.
4 In the Add File To Transmittal dialog box, locate and click the files you
want to transmit. To transmit a complete package, include the following:
■ All drawing files
■ All files in the project file location, including ProcessPower.dcfx,

Project.xml, and projSymbolStyle.dwg
■ Fonts
5 Click Open.
6 Repeat steps 3-5 until you have added all the project files you want to
transmit.
7 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, click OK.
8 In the Specify Zip File dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Save In list, specify the location for the zip file.
■ In the File Name box, enter a name for the zip file.
9 Click Save.
To set up a transmittal package
1 In the Project Manager tree view right-click a drawing.
2 Click Application menu ➤ Send ➤ eTransmit.
3 In the Create Transmittal dialog box, click Transmittal Setups.
4 In the Transmittal Setups dialog box, do one of the following:

■ To create a setup, click New.
■ To rename a setup, click Rename. Enter the new name. Click Close.
■ To update an existing setup, select the setup and click Modify.
■ To remove a setup, click the setup and click Delete. In the AutoCAD
message, to confirm the setup deletion, click OK.
5 Click Close.
Share Project Drawings | 265

To unpack a self-extracting executable transmittal package
1 Locate and open the transmittal package file (for example: PIP-01-101.dwf).
2 In the eTransmit dialog box, click Browse to specify the folder where you
want to unpack the transmittal files.
3 If the transmittal package is password-protected, you are prompted to

enter the password.
To publish a DWF or DWFx file
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project. Click Publish.
2 In the Publish dialog box, in the Publish To list, click DWF.
3 Under Sheet Name, press the CTRL key and click the drawings to publish.
4 Click Publish.
To set DWF or DWFx output settings

The DWF Output settings you make are in effect the next time you publish a
DWF or dWFx file.
1 In the Project Manager, open the drop-down list and click the file name
of the project you want to open.
NOTE DWF output settings can be made only when a project is open.
2 At the Command prompt, enter dwfoutputsettings.
NOTE If you are publishing a Plant 3D model, enter dwfoutputsettings3d.

The Plant 3D dialog box is like the P&ID version. You can follow the steps
outlined here for both types of drawings.

3 In the Output Settings dialog box, on the Object Properties tab, select
the check box labeled Show Classes With Items Only.
The tree view displays the Plant 3D objects that are used in the current
project.
4 In the tree view, click a component (for example: Equipment). On the

Properties pane, in the DWF Output column, clear the check box for any
property you do not want to publish (for example: Weight).

5 Click OK.
To set DWF publishing options
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the project. Click Publish.
2 In the Publish dialog box, under Publish Options Information, click

Publish Options.

3 In the Project Publish Options dialog box, under P&ID DWF Options,
click the options setting box to display the drop-down list and change
the following settings.
■ P&ID Information. Specifies whether P&ID related information gets
included with the published DWF file output. Specify Include or Don’t
Include. You can also click this box, click the [...] button, to open the
P&ID DWF Output Settings dialog box.
■ Filtering Null Values. Controls the publishing of object or sheet

properties that do not have specified values. Specify On or Off.
■ Granular Pipeline Output. Sets how segment lines behave when you
view them in the DWF Viewer. If you leave the Granular Pipeline
Output set to Off (the default), the entire segment line is red when

the cursor is placed over it. If you set the Granular Pipeline Output
to On, each section of the segment line is highlighted as the cursor
moves over it. Specify On or Off.
4 In the Project Publish Options dialog box, under Plant 3D DWF Options,
click the options setting box (on the right) to display the drop-down list
and change the following settings.
■ Piping Information. Specifies whether piping-related information is
included with the published DWF file output. Specify Include or Don’t
Include. You can also click this box, click the [...] button, to open the
Plant 3D DWF Output Settings dialog box.
■ Filtering Null Values. Controls the publishing of object or sheet

properties that do not have specified values. Specify On or Off.
5 When you are finished setting DWF publishing options, click OK to close
the Project Publish Options dialog box.
6 In the Publish dialog box, click Publish.
7 If the Specify DWF File dialog box is displayed, do the following:

■ In the Save In list, specify a location to save the DWF or DWFx file.
■ In the File Name box, enter an output file name.
■ Click Select.

Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Audit and Compress Projects

Using auditing tools, administrators can perform periodic project maintenance.
Audit Projects
Audit a project to search for errors, such as links between non-existent
properties or discrepancies in the tag registry.
To audit a project, open the project in the Project Manager. Warning messages
are displayed if a project is not currently open or if an open project is locked
by another designer.
A log file describing problems and the actions taken to resolve them is added
to the project directory that contains the data cache.
Compress Projects
Periodically compress a project to optimize performance and efficiency of the
project. Compressing a project defragments the drawing data cache, repairs
any inconsistencies, and prevents corruption of the cache.
Warning messages are displayed if a project is not currently open or if an open
project is locked by another designer.
To audit a project
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project. Click Audit Project.
Audit and Compress Projects | 271

To compress a project
■ In the Project Manager tree view, right-click a project. Click Compress

Database.
NOTE The duration of the compression process depends on the size of the project.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager

Understand the Drawing
Environment 5
Before you work in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, it is important that you understand how the
drawing environment is organized and learn some tips for working in this environment.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces

A workspace is a set of menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbon control panels that
are grouped and organized so that you can work in a custom, task-oriented
drawing environment.
You maximize the screen area available for those interface elements that you
want to display.
When you use a workspace, only those menus, toolbars, palettes, and ribbons
that are relevant to a task are displayed.
Work with the AutoCAD Plant 3D Workspaces

When you create 3D piping models, you can use the 3D Piping workspace,
which contains only 3D-related toolbars, menus, and palettes.
Interface items that you do not need for 3D pipe modeling are hidden, which
maximizes the screen area available for your work.
NOTE If you attempt to use a command that is not compatible with the current
drawing, you are prompted to switch to the workspace that supports the command.
273
3D Piping Workspace
The 3D Piping workspace includes the tools required to create a 3D plant
model. The drawing area displays the 3D piping ribbon and the 3D drawing
area.
P&ID Workspaces
P&ID workspaces include P&ID PIP, P&ID ISO, P&ID ISA, P&ID DIN, and P&ID
JIS/ISO. Each of these workspaces is based on a P&ID industry standard used
for your project. The tool palettes for each workspace contain the symbols
based on the industry standard for that workspace.
AutoCAD Workspaces
AutoCAD workspaces include 2D Drafting & Annotation, 3D Modeling, and
AutoCAD Classic. For more information about these workspaces, see “Create
Task-Based Workspaces” in the AutoCAD Help system.
When you make changes to your drawing display (such as moving, hiding,
or displaying a toolbar or a tool palette group) and you want to preserve the
display settings for future use, you can save the current settings to a workspace.
Switch Workspaces
You can switch to another workspace whenever you need to work on a different
task.
You can easily switch between workspaces when you want to access tools or
commands that are not accessible in the current workspace.
Opening an existing project of any standard causes AutoCAD Plant 3D to
switch to the workspace for that standard if it differs from the current
workspace. Also, creating a new project switches the workspace to the standard
you specify in project settings if that standard differs from the current
workspace.
To switch workspaces
1 On the status bar, click Workspace Switching.
2 In the list of workspaces, click a workspace.
274 | Chapter 5 Understand the Drawing Environment

A check mark indicates the current workspace.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon

The ribbon contains the commands that you need to create and modify a
piping model.
The ribbon is composed of a series of panels that are organized into tabs labeled
by task. Ribbon panels contain many of the same tools and controls available
in toolbars and dialog boxes. By default, the ribbon is displayed horizontally
at the top of the drawing window when you create or open a drawing.
If you drag a panel from a ribbon tab and into the drawing area or onto another
monitor, that panel remains where you placed it. The panel remains open
until you return it to the ribbon, even if you switch ribbon tabs. For more
information about using ribbons, see “The Ribbon” in the AutoCAD Help
system.
3D Piping Home Tab

The 3D Piping Home tab contains panels with the commands that you need
to create and modify a piping model. This tab includes the following panels:
■ Project panel
AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon | 275

■ Part Insertion panel
■ Compass panel
■ Elevation & Routing panel
■ Slope panel
■ Pipe Supports panel
■ Equipment panel
■ Visibility panel
■ View panel
■ Layers panel
The 3D Piping Home tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.
For more information about 3D piping, see Create and Modify Piping on page
431.
Orthos Tab
The Orthos tab displays options for working with orthographic drawings. The
tab includes the following panels:
■ Ortho Tools panel
■ Dimensions panel
■ Annotation panel
■ Viewports panel
The Orthos tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.

For more information about orthographic drawings, see Generate Orthographic
Drawings on page 561.
Isos Tab
The Isos tab displays options for working with isometrics. This tab includes
the following panels:
■ Create Iso panel
■ Isogen panel
■ Export panel
The Isos tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.
For more information about isometrics, see Generate Isometric Drawings on

page 551.
Structure Tab
The Structure tab displays options for working with structures. This tab includes
the following panels:
■ Parts panel
■ Modify panel
■ Cutting panel
■ Visibility panel
■ Export panel
■ Views panel
■ Layers panel
The Structure tab is part of the 3D Piping workspace.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Ribbon | 277

For more information about creating structure, see Create and Modify Structure
on page 393.
P&ID Home Tab

The P&ID Home tab displays options for working with P&ID drawings. This
tab includes the following panels:
■ Project panel
■ P&ID panel
■ Schematic Line panel
■ Line Group panel
■ Validate panel
■ Layers panel
■ Block panel
■ Annotation panel
■ Properties panel
■ View panel
■ Utilities panel
The P&ID Home tab is part of the P&ID PIP, P&ID ISO, P&ID ISA, P&ID DIN,
and P&ID JIS/ISO workspaces.
For more information about creating P&IDs, see Create and Modify a P&ID
Drawing on page 297.

AutoCAD Tabs
When you switch from an AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 workspace to an AutoCAD
workspace, additional AutoCAD ribbons are displayed. Following is an example
of the 3D ribbon that is displayed when the AutoCAD 3D Modeling workspace
is selected.
The AutoCAD tabs are part of the AutoCAD workspaces, including 2D Drafting
& Annotation, 3D Modeling, and AutoCAD Classic.
The Model and Render tabs from AutoCAD are also included as part of the
3D Piping workspace.
For more information about using AutoCAD ribbons, see “The Ribbon” in the
AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager

The Project Manager provides an organized project environment in which to
work.
You can open, add, and create drawings using the Project Manager. You also
perform other tasks such as exporting and importing data, creating project
reports, including referenced drawings (xrefs), and linking or copying files to
the project folders.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Project Manager | 279

The Project Manager contains three tabs; the Source Files tab, the Orthographic
DWG tab, and the Isometric DWG tab. For more information about these tabs
and other details about the Project Manager, see Overview: Organize Project
The Project Manager also provides access to the Data Manager and the Project
Setup dialog box. For more information about the Data Manager, see Manage
Data and Generate Reports on page 499. For more information about setting
up a project, see your system administrator.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette

The AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties palette provides quick access to component
and line data.

In the Properties palette, you can change the data of an object (such as a pipe
specification, an insulation type or thickness, and so on). The Properties palette
also allows access to the Assign Tag dialog box, where you can alter tag
information.
Some of the ways you can access the Properties palette include:
■ Double-clicking an object in a drawing
NOTE When you double-click an annotation, the Edit Annotations dialog box
is displayed instead of the Properties palette.
■ Selecting an item in the drawing and pressing CTRL+1
■ Right-clicking an item in the drawing and clicking Properties
■ At the Command prompt, entering PROPERTIES
AutoCAD Plant 3D Properties Palette | 281

For more information about the Properties palette, see “Display and Change the
Properties of Objects” in the AutoCAD Help system.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Manager

You can view, modify, import, and export drawing and project data, and
generate various reports using the Data Manager.
Using the Data Manager, you can export data for drawings and projects, modify
the data externally, and import it back into the Data Manager.
You use a hierarchical tree in the Data Manager to filter and view data, and
to generate reports.

You can export data and reports that contain P&ID and Plant 3D data, and
export to Microsoft® Excel®, comma-separated value (CSV), or PCF (Piping
Component Format) files.
You can zoom directly to a Plant 3D object from its record in the Data Manager
data table.
In P&ID drawings, you can drag annotations from the Data Manager data
table into the drawing area.
For more information about the Data Manager, see Manage Data and Generate
Reports on page 499.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer

You can add pipe or pipe fittings to a model using the Spec Viewer.
The Spec Viewer uses spec files to control part size, selection, and routing
priorities. After opening a spec file in AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can view spec
sheets, add items to a 3D model, and customize tool palettes.
You can insert a sized part or an unsized part. If you use an object snap to
connect to an open port, the size of the port is used. You can set AutoCAD
Plant 3D to update a 3D model when changes are made to the spec file.
For more information about using the Spec Viewer, see Use a Spec in a Plant
3D Model.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Spec Viewer | 283

AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes
The AutoCAD Plant 3D tool palettes display standard and custom component
and line symbols that you place to create your drawings.
The standard you choose when you create a project dictates which tool palette
is displayed when you start the program. For example, if you create a project
using the ISA standard, the initial tool palette displayed is the P&ID ISA palette.
You can switch to another tool palette by right-clicking the tool palette title
bar and selecting a tool palette. However, not all P&ID symbols that are
available in one standard are the same in other standards.
For example, you have created a project using the PIP standard and have begun
adding lines and components from the P&ID PIP tool palette. If you change
to the P&ID ISA tool palette and attempt to add a 4-way valve, you receive a
warning in the status bar stating that the ISA 4-way valve symbol cannot be

found in the current palette. To add a 4-way valve, return to the P&ID PIP
tool palette and select the 4-way valve from that set of symbols.
NOTE If you are working in a project using the ISA standard, you can add lines
and components from the PIP standard. Also, if you are working in a project using
the DIN standard, you can add lines and components from the ISO standard. In
both cases, you might receive a warning for specific lines or components, but you
can use most symbols without restriction.
You can also create your own custom tool palette by right-clicking the title
bar of the tool palette and clicking New Palette. You can then add tools to the
palette. For more information about creating a tool palette, see “Customize Tool
Palettes” in the AutoCAD Help system.
You can add individual items from a spec sheet to a custom tool palette. For
more information, see Use a Spec in a Plant 3D Model.
NOTE If you do not see the P&ID workspace interface elements in your drawing
area, it is likely that you are not displaying a P&ID workspace. Verify that you are
using a P&ID workspace by clicking Workspaces on the status bar and clicking a
P&ID workspace.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties

Quick Properties provide access to commonly used properties for an object or
a set of objects.
Quick Properties are enabled by default. When you select an object, you can
view and modify a list of properties for the selected object.
For more information about using or disabling Quick Properties, see “Work
with Object Properties” in the AutoCAD Help system.
You can easily customize the Quick Properties for any object in the Customize
User Interface (CUI) editor. To customize the display of Quick Properties, see
“Customize User Interface Elements” in the AutoCAD Help system.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Quick Properties | 285

AutoCAD Plant 3D Shortcut Menus
With shortcut menus (also called right-click or context menus), you can
perform tasks that are related to the selected component or line.
For example, when you right-click a schematic line, a shortcut menu is
displayed for quick access to relevant schematic line editing tasks.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Substitution Palettes

You use substitution palettes to substitute one component or line for another
in a drawing.
The palettes are displayed after you place certain components or lines. You
can switch to a similar component or line by clicking the Substitution arrow
and selecting an item from the palette. All the components grouped under
the same class are available for substitution on the substitution palette.
NOTE You cannot successfully substitute all components under the same class for
each other. If two components of the same class have attachment points at different
orientations compared to their placement on a line, they do not substitute correctly.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips
You use grips to perform actions on objects in a drawing.
Grips are displayed at strategic points on objects when you select them. You
can click these grips to perform the actions described in the following table.
Grip Name Grip Symbol Description
Continu- Starts or continues routing pipe.

ation grip
Elevation Moves a pipe line up or down to set an

grip elevation.
Rotation Displays the compass and allows a com-

grip ponent to be rotated.
Stretch grip Appears at the midpoints of schematic

line segments; it moves a line orthogon-
ally.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Grips | 287

Grip Name Grip Symbol Description
Endline grip Lengthens or shortens a schematic line.
Connection Connects a schematic line or pipe line to

grip a component, pipe line, or another
schematic line.
Gap grip Breaks a schematic line between the gap

symbols.
Flip grip Flips a component in the opposite direc-

tion.
Substitution Displays a palette with similar compon-

grip ents that you can substitute for the one
you originally placed.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Tooltips

Tooltips are descriptive messages that are displayed near the cursor when it
hovers over a ribbon, toolbar, panel button, or menu item.
Tooltips provide pop-up information for the commands associated with
interface elements. Initially, a basic tooltip is displayed. If you allow the cursor
to hover over the interface element, the tooltip may expand to display a second
level of descriptive information for the command.

You can customize the display and content of a tooltip. For more information
about customizing the display of tooltips, see “Display Tab (Options Dialog Box)”
in the AutoCAD Help system.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips

After you add a component or line segment to a drawing or 3D model, you
can perform a quick query of component or line segment data by moving the
crosshairs over it.
When you position the crosshairs over a component, the values stored in the
Class Name and Tag fields for the component are displayed in a tooltip.
If you position the crosshairs over a line segment, the Pipe Line Type, Tag,
and To and From data are displayed in a tooltip.
Objects in 3D models that have data assigned to them or the capability to

have data assigned to them display a tooltip with whatever data is currently
assigned. If there is no data assigned to an object, the tooltip displays only
the object name.
AutoCAD Plant 3D Drawing Tooltips | 289

AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars
The Application menu and toolbars provide access to many frequently used
commands.
Using the Application Menu

The Application menu, located in the top-left corner of the program, replaces
the traditional menu structure you might be familiar with in previous releases
of AutoCAD Plant 3D.
Instead of a horizontal menu display across the top of the program, the
application menu presents the menus in a vertical list. You click the
Application button to display the menus within.

For more information about using menus, see “The Application Menu” in the
AutoCAD Plant 3D Application Menu and Toolbars | 291

Using Toolbars
You can use buttons on toolbars to start commands, display flyout toolbars,
and display tooltips. You can display or hide, dock, and resize toolbars. There
are no AutoCAD Plant 3D-specific toolbars, but you can access AutoCAD
toolbars from the Quick Access Toolbar Tools menu.
For more information about toolbars and other AutoCAD tools such as the
status bar and the classic menu bar, see “Other Tool Locations” in the AutoCAD
Help system.
Understand the Work History Dialog Box

If your administrator activates the Work History option, the Work History
dialog box is displayed either when you open a drawing from the Project
Manager or when you close the drawing.
You are prompted to provide details about the drawing file that you or another
designer can refer to at a later date (such as revision information, review status,
and so on).
For more information about the Work History dialog box, see Manage Work
History Tracking on page 261.

Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box
If your administrator has set up tag formatting, the Assign Tag dialog box
displays when you add a component or line that requires a tag.
You add components and lines to a drawing or model from a ribbon or tool
palette. If you do not know the tagging data at the time you insert a
component or line, you can add the data to a 3D model later by clicking Home
tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Assign Tag and clicking the component or
line.
For more information about assigning tags to components and lines, see Tag
Components and Lines on page 335.
Control the Display of the Drawing Space

By controlling the display of dockable windows and toolbars, locking the
position of toolbars and dockable windows, and using two monitors, you can
optimize your drawing environment.
Control the Display of Dockable Windows

Many windows, such as the Project Manager, the tool palettes, and the Data
Manager, are dockable. Each window can be docked, anchored, or floating.
Commands for changing the display of dockable windows are available on a
shortcut menu. You can change the following options for dockable windows:
■ Size. You can change the size of a window and resize the panes.
Understand the Assign Tag Dialog Box | 293

■ Allow Docking. Dock or anchor a dockable window. A docked window
adheres to one side of the application window, causing the drawing area
to be resized.
■ Anchor. Attach, or anchor, a dockable window or palette to the left or

right side of the drawing area. An anchored window rolls open and closed
as the cursor moves across it. When an anchored window is open, its
content overlaps the drawing area. An anchored window cannot be set to
stay open. The Allow Docking option must be selected before you can
anchor a window.
■ Auto-hide. Display a floating window that opens and closes as the cursor
moves across it. When this option is cleared, the window stays open.
■ Transparency. Display a window as transparent so that it does not obscure

objects under it. This option is not available for all windows or when
hardware acceleration is turned on.
Control the Display of Toolbars

You can display or hide toolbars and control whether they are docked or
floating in the drawing area.
A docked toolbar is attached to any edge of the drawing area. You can resize,
and reposition undocked toolbars.
Lock the Position of Toolbars and Dockable Windows

After you have arranged toolbars and windows the way you want to display
them, you can lock their positions. Locked toolbars and windows can still be
opened and closed, and items can be added and deleted.
Use Keytips to Access Common Tools

You can use the keyboard to access the Application Menu, Quick Access tool
bar, and ribbon.
Press the ALT key to display shortcut keys for common tools in the application
window.
When you select a keytip, more keytips are displayed for that tool.
Use Dual Monitors to Optimize the Drawing Area

To create a larger drawing space, you can use two monitors. For example, you
can use one monitor to display the drawing area, while the other monitor

displays the tools for working in the drawing area such as the tool palette,
Project Manager, Data Manager, and so on.
For more information about setting up dual monitors, see the instructions
provided with your monitors.
Control the Display of the Drawing Space | 295

296
Create and Modify a P&ID
Drawing 6
With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can easily create and edit P&ID drawings by placing dynamic
lines and components.
Understand P&ID Components and Lines

By combining various types of components (such as pumps, tanks, and valves)
and lines (such as pipe lines and signal lines), you create a dynamic P&ID
drawing, from which you can produce and edit data reports.
Each P&ID component and line has an assigned layer name, color, scaling factor,
tagging behavior, and other properties that are set up as part of your project so
that you are not required to assign properties each time you place a component
or line in a drawing.
Understand P&ID Component and Line Symbols

AutoCAD Plant 3D includes a set of component and line symbols that are based
on P&ID industry standards. The symbols are available for you to place, connect,
move, stretch, and tag. You can also create reports on the symbols.
Symbols used for AutoCAD Plant 3D components and lines are based on the
PIP (Process Industry Practices), ISA (Instrument Society of America), ISO
(International Organization for Standardization), and DIN (Deutsches Institut
Fur Normung e. V.) standards.
P&ID components include:
■ Equipment (such as pumps, tanks, and vessels)
■ Nozzles (such as flanged or flow)
297
■ Instruments (such as control valves, flow meters, and instrument bubbles)
■ Inline components (such as valves and reducers)
■ Non-engineering items (such as connectors, flow arrows, and other items

that are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data)
P&ID schematic lines include:
■ Pipe lines (such as primary line segments, secondary line segments, and
jacketed pipe segments)
■ Signal lines (such as electrical, hydraulic, and pneumatic)
The P&ID tool palette provides a visual library of the symbols, or components
and lines, that you use to create and document your P&ID drawings. You
simply click a symbol on the tool palette and click in the drawing area where
you want to place the symbol.
NOTE You can also drag a symbol from the tool palette and drop it in a drawing,
but you may not be able to place the symbol as precisely as clicking the symbol
on the tool palette and then clicking in the drawing.
298 | Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing

Understand Component and Line Creation
If you use components and lines that are not part of the symbol libraries
provided with the program, it is likely that your administrator created those
symbols and added them to the tool palette while setting up your project.
Rather than creating your own components and lines, you should use either
the default symbols or those symbols provided by your administrator.
Otherwise, you cannot be sure that the symbols comply with your company
standards or are included in your tool palette and in reports.
If you must use an AutoCAD object in your P&ID drawing, you can convert
the AutoCAD object to a P&ID component or line. For more information
about converting, see Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID
Components or Lines on page 342.
Understand P&ID Components and Lines | 299

Place, Tag, and Annotate Components and Lines
Typically, you place a component or line, tag it, and then annotate it. Not all
components and lines require tagging and annotation, but in general you
want to make sure all three tasks are completed as you build your P&ID
drawings.
■ Place a component or line. The P&ID tool palettes provide a simple way
to view and place all available components and lines. You click an item
on the tool palette, and click again in the drawing area to place it.
■ Assign a Tag to a component or line. For some components and lines, you
are prompted to enter tag information when you place the item in a
drawing. You can enter tag information and annotations when prompted
or at a later time. For more information, see Tag Components and Lines
on page 335.
■ Annotate a component or line. For some components (such as relief valves

and instruments), you are prompted to annotate them when you place
them in a drawing. For other items (such as pumps and tanks), you choose
whether to annotate them. You can annotate most components and lines
by right-clicking the item and clicking Annotate on the shortcut menu.
Create a Drawing File

When you start drafting in AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can add a drawing file to
your project and add a drawing number, a title, and the name of the designer
to that drawing.
To create a drawing file and add drawing properties
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.
2 If the correct project is not already open, open it now.

3 Click New Drawing.
4 In the New DWG dialog box, do the following:

■ Under DWG Number, enter a drawing number (for example, PIP-1001).
■ Under Author, enter the designer’s name.
■ Under DWG Title, enter a title for the drawing. (for example,
Drawing1).
As you enter the DWG Number and DWG Title, the File Name field is
automatically populated.
5 Click OK.
Create a Drawing File | 301

Add Components to a P&ID Drawing
Component is a general term that includes all P&ID symbols except schematic
lines.
P&ID components include:
■ Equipment (such as pumps, tanks, and vessels)
■ Nozzles (such as flanged and flow)
■ Instruments (such as control valves, flow meters, and instrument bubbles)
■ Inline components (such as valves and reducers)
■ Non-engineering items (such as connectors, flow arrows, and other items

that are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data)
Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing

P&ID equipment includes pumps, compressors, blowers, heat exchangers,
tanks, vessels, furnaces, mechanical drivers, mixing equipment, and other
miscellaneous pieces of equipment. Some types of equipment are placed on
a drawing before lines and inline instruments. Other types of equipment are
added to existing lines on a drawing.
Equipment such as tanks and heat exchangers are typically placed at the end
of a line. After these items are placed on a drawing, lines are added to connect
the equipment, and then valves and inline equipment are placed on the lines.

Some types of equipment are regularly inserted into pipe or signal line and
are often moved along the line. When their join types are set to break segment
groups, ISO and DIN symbols for pumps, compressors, and blowers can be
added directly to existing lines in AutoCAD Plant 3D.
When inserted onto a line, inline components break the line into two line
groups with different line numbers. If you remove a piece of inline equipment
from a line, you can join the segments to form a single segment or leave the
segments as they are with different data. If you join the line segments, you
can choose to retain the line data of either the original line segment or the
new line segment. For more information about line segments and line groups
see Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking Behavior on page 328.
Equipment symbols are displayed on the Equipment tab of the tool palette.
To add equipment to a drawing
1 If the P&ID tool palette is not already displayed, click View tab ➤ Palettes
panel ➤ Tool Palettes.
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Equipment tab. Click the component
you want to place.
3 Click the location in the drawing area where you want to place the
component.
4 If you are prompted to specify a scale factor (for example, when you place
a tank), do one of the following:
■ Press ENTER to accept the default scale.
■ Move the cursor vertically to increase or decrease the component

height.
■ Move the cursor horizontally to increase or decrease the component

width.
5 If the Assign Tag dialog box is displayed, do one of the following:

■ If you know the tag data you want to enter, add the information, and
then click Assign.
■ If you do not know the tag data you want to enter, click Cancel. You
can add tag information at another time by clicking the Home tab
➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.
Add Equipment to a P&ID Drawing | 303

To add equipment to a pipe line
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Equipment tab. Click the component
you want to place.
3 Click a line in the drawing area to specify a location for the component.

■ If you know the tag data you want to enter, add the information, and
then click Assign.
NOTE Only equipment with join type set to segment group breaker can be
added to pipe lines. Equipment with endline join type will overlap with the
line.
To reapply a graphical style to a component
1 Open the drawing file containing the component whose graphical style
you want to apply.
2 Double-click the component (for example: a pump).
3 In the Properties palette, change the properties (for example: in the Layer
list, change the layer from Equipment to Instrument).
4 In the drawing area, right-click the component. Click Reapply Graphical

Style.
Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing

You use nozzles to connect pipes. When you move a piece of equipment, the
nozzle moves with it.

Nozzles are added to a drawing in one of two ways: you add them manually
by placing them in the drawing from the Fittings tab of the tool palette or
they are automatically created when you connect a line segment to an
equipment item (such as a tank).
You can assign tag numbers to nozzles, just like other items in a P&ID drawing,
but the tag number assigned to a nozzle must be unique per equipment item.
Different pieces of equipment in a P&ID drawing can have nozzles with the
same nozzle tag. For example, each equipment item can have a nozzle tagged
N-1.
As your schematic drawing changes, you can copy and move nozzles from
one item to another within the drawing. Based on where the nozzle is copied
or moved, the tag of the nozzle will be affected in different ways.
You can choose from the following types of nozzles:
■ Flanged
■ Single line
■ Double line
■ Assumed nozzle
■ Front facing
Add Nozzles to a P&ID Drawing | 305

To add a nozzle to a component
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Fittings tab.
3 On the Fittings tab, under Nozzles, click a nozzle.
4 Click the component on which you want to attach the nozzle.
5 On the component, specify an insertion point.
6 Specify a rotation angle, or press ENTER to indicate no rotation.
Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing

Instruments are assigned and associated with a specific layer and color, as well
as tag or data information.
AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a basic set of instrument symbols, which include:
■ Control valves
■ Relief valves (such as pressure and vacuum relief valves)
■ Inline instruments (such as a flow nozzle, rotameter, or weir)
■ General instruments (bubbles)
You can substitute the control valve or topworks after adding an instrument
to a drawing.
You can view the list of instruments in your drawing by accessing the Data
Manager. For more information about using the Data Manager, see Manage
Data and Generate Reports on page 499.
Instruments are displayed on the Instruments tab of the tool palette.
To add a control valve to a drawing
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Valves tab.
3 On the Valves tab, under Control Valves, click a control valve.

4 Do one of the following:
■ If you are adding a control valve to a project for the first time, the
Control Valve Browser dialog box is displayed. Select a control valve
body and an actuator and click OK. In the drawing area, click to place
the control valve. When prompted, click again in the drawing to place
the annotation.
■ If a preview of the currently active control valve body and actuator

is displayed, change the body type or actuator. Right-click and select
Change Body or Actuator. Click in the drawing area to place the
control valve. When prompted, click again in the drawing area to
place the control valve annotation.

■ If you know the tag data you want to enter, enter the information
you want displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.
6 To include an annotation, double-click inside the instrument bubble.
7 In the Edit Annotation dialog box, in the Type drop-down list, select an
instrument type. Under LoopNumber, enter a loop number.
To convert a hand valve to a control valve
1 In the drawing area, right-click the hand valve you want to convert. Click
Convert to Control Valve.
2 In the Actuator Browser dialog box, under Classes, click an actuator type.
Click OK.
The actuator (topworks) is added to the valve, converting the hand valve
to a control valve.

Add Instruments to a P&ID Drawing | 307

4 When prompted to select an annotation location, click to place the
annotation.
To add a relief valve instrument to a drawing
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Instruments tab.
3 On the Instruments tab, under Relief Valves, click a relief valve.
4 When you move your cursor to the drawing area, you are prompted to
specify an insertion point. In the drawing area, click where you want to
place the valve.

■ If you know the tag data you want enter, enter the information you
want displayed in the tag annotation. Click Assign.
6 You are prompted to select an annotation position. Move your cursor to

position the annotation, and click where you want to place it.
To add an instrument bubble to a drawing
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Instruments tab.
3 On the Instruments tab, click an instrument bubble.
4 When you move your cursor to the drawing area, you are prompted to
specify an insertion point. In the drawing area, click where you want to
place the valve.


To substitute a control valve or topworks in a drawing
1 In the drawing area, click the control valve whose type you want to
change.
Two substitution grips are displayed: one for the control valve and one
for the topworks.
2 Do either of the following:

■ To change the control valve type, click the lower substitution grip,
and in the substitution palette, click an item.
■ To change the topworks type, click the upper substitution grip, and
in the substitution palette, click an item.
The substituted items are now displayed in the drawing area.
Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to

a P&ID Drawing
Inline components such as gate valves, globe valves, check valves, and reducers
are placed on pipe lines.
Add Valves, Reducers, and Other Inline Components to a P&ID Drawing | 309
Place inline components from the tool palette, using either the Valves tab or
the Fittings tab. To expedite your design, use attachment points to help you
place inline components precisely on the lines.
To adjust the placement of an inline component, reposition the component
using grips. Inline components move when you move lines to which they are
connected.
If you change the size of a pipe line that is attached to a reducer, the reducer
automatically reorients to display with its larger size attached to the line with
the larger diameter, and its smaller size attached to the line with the smaller
diameter.
Action Graphic Display
A reducer is placed on a schematic line 4 inches in

diameter. The line now has two segments, each 4
inches in diameter.

Action Graphic Display
The diameter of the line segment to the right of the

reducer is changed to 3 inches. The small size of the
reducer is oriented to the right.
The diameter of the line segment to the left of the

reducer is changed to 3 inches, and the diameter of
the line segment to the right is changed to 4 inches.
The small size of the reducer is automatically oriented
to the left.
For inline components (such as valves and inline instruments), you may need
to show the type of end connection or its open or closed state. You can set
the end connection or the open or closed state from the Data Manager, the
shortcut menu, or the Properties palette of a selected valve.
When end connections are set, the symbol automatically displays the change
in the end connection. Set end connection states as follows.
End connection states Graphic display
Flanged
Socket Welded
Welded
Unspecified (default)
If the tool palette contains a symbol for an open or closed state, the symbol
automatically updates as changes are made. Otherwise, the open or closed
state is reflected in the Properties palette. You can set the open or closed states
as follows.
Open or closed states Property palette setting
Normally Open (default).

Fluid can flow through
without someone having to
manually open a valve. A
normally open state can al-
ways be set to closed.
Normally Closed. Fluid can-

not flow through. A normally
closed state can always be set
to open, but it must be set
manually.
Lock Open
Lock Closed
Car Sealed Open
Car Sealed Closed
If either state is set, and you need to substitute the valve (for example, if you
need to change a flanged gate valve to a flanged ball valve), the substituting
valve maintains the end connection and the open or closed state of the
previous valve.
To place a valve on a line
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Valves tab. Click a valve.
3 Click a line in the drawing area to place the valve on the line.

To set the end connection or the open and closed state of a valve
1 Open a drawing that contains a valve.
2 Right-click a valve in the drawing area. Click Set End Connections, and
select an end connection type (for example: Flanged).
3 Right-click the valve. Click Set Open/Closed State, and select a state (for
example: Car Sealed Open).
You can also set end connections and open or closed states from the Property
palette or the Data Manager.
To place a reducer on a line
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Fittings tab.
3 On the Fittings tab, under Piping Fittings, click a reducer.
4 Click a line in the drawing area to place the reducer on the line.
Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other

Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing
Items that are placed on a drawing but do not contain any reportable data are
called non-engineering items. Non-engineering items include off-page
connectors, pins, flags, flow arrows, gaps, actuators, annotations, spec breaks,
and so on.
All non-engineering items are displayed on the Non-Engineering tab of the
tool palette.
Understand Connectors
Connectors maintain continuity of lines that span across drawings. Off-page
connectors are used in pairs: in the originating drawing and in the connecting
drawing. A line leaving a drawing requires a To connector. The same line in
the second drawing requires a From connector. The same connector symbol
is used for both the To and From connectors.
To connectors are placed pointing outward in the drawing:

From connectors are placed pointing inward:
Both connectors should have the same connector number to visually identify
the continuity between drawings. It is recommended that you number the
From connector before you connect it to a To connector. If a pair of connected
connectors do not have a connector number, it is recommended that you
assign the same number to the two connectors.
Connectors can also show the drawing numbers (for easy tracking), and tag
data.
The following table describes how you display data for an off-page connector
(using the From connector example in the previous illustration).
Item in “From Represents Where data is entered

Connector” ex-
ample
CC Pipe line group service In the drawing, click the line to

which the connector is attached.
Right-click and click Assign Tag. In
the Service drop-down menu, click
CC.
50011 Connector number Double-click the connector, and in

the Properties palette, Connector
Number field, enter 50011.
From Tank T-201 Origin or destination Double-click the connector, and in

the Properties palette, Origin or
Destination field, enter the name of
the component that the connector
originates from, in this case, From
Tank T-201.
Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing | 315
Item in “From Represents Where data is entered
Connector” ex-
ample
PID-111 Drawing number of the In the Project Manager, right-click

connected drawing the drawing the connector comes
from, and click Properties. In the
DWG Number field, add PID-111.
Understand the Rules for Adding Off-page Connectors Between Drawings

Keep the following rules in mind when you use off-page connectors:
■ If one line already has a line number defined, the second line inherits the
number.
■ If both lines have their line numbers defined, a line connection cannot
be made, or the line numbers must be reconciled.
■ If neither line has a line number defined, the lines are grouped and the
connectors are added. A line number can be added later.
■ If an off-page connector is connected to a pipe line, and you are creating

a connection between drawings, you can filter drawings that do not contain
pipe lines that belong to the same line group as the connected line.
■ You can connect two off-page connectors that are in the same drawing,
as long as you connect a To connector to a From connector.
Understand Pins
On the Non-engineering tab of the P&ID DIN tool palette are two pin-shaped
symbols that you use to identify a segment break. In the KKS tagging standard,
pins can identify a change in Unit Number or System Code.
A pin can either be open (no-fill) or closed (black fill):
■ Open pins. Open pins mark the boundaries of a group with a common
property. For example, between open pins, a pipe line has the same Unit

Number. However, simply placing the pins on a line does not change the
properties. You must manually change the properties of the lines beyond
the open-pin boundary.
■ Closed pins. Closed pins identifies a break in piping sub-systems or

branches in a pipe line. For example, a Unit Number might change at this
break. The insertion of the closed pin does not automatically change the
Unit Number in this example; you must change it manually.
Pins act like segment breakers. When you insert a pin into a straight schematic
line, the pin breaks the line into two segments. However, if you insert an open
pin at the end of the line, it does not break the line.
Understand Flow Direction Flags

A flag symbol, like an arrow symbol, indicates the direction of the flow. The
flag symbol contains the line number annotation. In your drawings, you can
use arrow symbols, flag symbols, or both.
Follow these guidelines when using flags:
■ If you change the direction of flow of a line, the flag symbol adjusts to
indicate the new direction of flow. The text adjusts to read from left-to-right
or from bottom-to-top. Changing the flag direction does not alter the flow
direction of the pipe line.
■ In a KKS environment, the tag number for the pipe line appears on two
levels in the flag symbol. On the first level, within the flag, are the Unit,
System Code, and System Number properties. On the second level, between
the flag and the pipe line, are the Function Key Code and Component
Number. Regardless of the orientation and position of the flag on the line,
the component identification code and component number always appear
closest to the pipe line.
To create a line connection between two drawings
Add Off-page Connectors, Flow Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing | 317
2 In the P&ID tool palette, Non-Engineering tab, under Connectors, click
Off-Page Connector.
3 In the drawing area of the first drawing, click near the end of a line to
select a location for the first of two off-page connectors. The off-page
connector snaps to the end of the line.
4 Click the off-page connector. At the pointed end of the connector, click
the connector grip. Click Connect To.
5 In the Create Connection dialog box, click the drawing that contains the
line you want to continue, and do the following:
■ To create a new connection in the second drawing, in the Off-page
Connectors section, click Create New Connection in Selected Drawing.
Click OK. In the drawing area of the second drawing, click the
beginning of the line to place the connector.
■ To override an existing connection in the second drawing, in the

Off-page Connectors section, click Connect to Existing Off-page
Connector. Click OK. In the drawing area of the second drawing, click
the connector on a line to place the new connector data. At the The
off-page connector you selected is already connected to another connector.
Overwrite the existing connection? prompt, select Yes.
6 To display only those drawings that contain pipe lines belonging to the
same line group as the connected line, select Only Show Drawings That
Contain Line Segments in Line Group n.
7 Click OK.
To view an existing line connection between two drawings
■ In the drawing area, click the off-page connector whose connection you
want to view. At the pointed end of the connector, hover over the
connector grip, and click Go to Connector.
In the drawing where the line connection is established, the display is
zoomed in on the off-page connector.
To add a miscellaneous symbol, connector, or trim symbol to a drawing
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Non-Engineering tab.
3 On the Non-Engineering tab, click an item.

4 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the non-engineering
item.
NOTE If the symbol you are inserting is a pin, remember that, although it
breaks the line, you must update the properties appropriately.
Quick Reference
Commands
OFFPAGECONNECT
System Variables
No entries
Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining

Its Data
Edit an existing P&ID component by changing the geometry of the component
and then saving the new geometry.
You might find a component in the tool palette that almost matches a
component that you use in your drawings. Rather than creating a new
component, you can change a single instance of a component by editing its
geometry in the block editor. Only the geometry is edited. Annotations and
other component data is preserved.
For example, if the P&ID tool palette contains a tank that is similar to one
you want to use but is not as tall as you need it to be, you can edit the
component and stretch the lines to create a new instance.
To edit the geometry of a P&ID component while retaining its data
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the tab that contains the component you
want to edit. Click the component.
3 Click in the drawing to place the component.
4 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Edit Block.
Edit the Geometry of a P&ID Component While Retaining Its Data | 319
5 Select the component to open it in the block editor. Modify the geometry
as needed.
6 In the Edit P&ID Object’s toolbar, save changes and exit the block editor.
Quick Reference
Commands
PIDEDITBLOCK
System Variables
No entries
Create and Use Assemblies

Assemblies are combinations of connected components that are placed in a
drawing at the same time.
Assemblies can include P&ID components and lines. For example, a level
gauge assembly might contain an instrument and five valves, including two
ball valves.
When you place an assembly created in a P&ID drawing, the data and
connection behavior is retained for the components and lines that make up
the assembly. For example, if you added a manufacturer and model number
to a valve before you made the valve part of the assembly, that data is retained
in the assembly.
Tagging information is also retained. A question mark is added to the end of
the tag, indicating that the tag must be adjusted to avoid duplication. After
you insert the assembly parts, you can change the tags and assign unique
values where necessary.
To create an assembly and place it in a P&ID drawing
1 In a P&ID drawing, place components and lines to create an assembly.
2 At the Command prompt, enter wblock.
3 In the Write Block dialog box, select Objects.
4 Click Select Objects.

5 In the drawing, select the objects that make up the assembly. Press ENTER
to complete object selection.
6 In the Write Block dialog box, do the following:

■ Under Base Point, click Pick Point to specify a point in the drawing,
or enter the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the point.
■ Under Destination, enter a file name and path for the new drawing,
or click the [...] button to browse to a location.
■ Click OK.
7 On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Block panel ➤ Insert.
8 In the Insert dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Name list, click the assembly you just created, or click Browse
to locate the drawing.
■ In the lower-left corner, select Explode.
■ Click OK.
9 When you move your cursor to the drawing, you are prompted to specify
an insertion point. In the drawing, click where you want to place the
assembly.
10 Change the tagging information for individual components and lines as

needed.
Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing

Schematic lines are dynamic lines that represent pipes lines or instrument
lines. They connect to components, and contain valves and other items. They
are similar to AutoCAD lines, but they contain additional information such
as flow direction, tag information, and line size.
Add Schematic Lines to a P&ID Drawing | 321

The two types of schematic line groups in AutoCAD Plant 3D are pipe lines
and instrument lines. Each line type has its own set of properties (such as
layer, linetype, thickness, linestyle, color, and tag information).
At the end of each line segment, the arrow indicates the flow direction. The
flow direction is determined by the direction you move the line as you create
it.
You can change the direction of flow, using the shortcut menu. For more
information about changing the flow direction of a line, see Define the
Directional Flow of Schematic Lines on page 329
Understand Line Groups, Line Segments, and Linked Line Segments

Schematic lines are represented in the program in two ways: as line groups,
which are conceptual representations (or types) of lines (such as sewage lines
or hot water pipes), and as line segments, which are actual purchasable pipes.
You can link a line segment to another line segment. When a line is linked,
it assumes the tag information of the line to which it is linked. If you link a
line belonging to one group to a line in another group, the line leaves its
original group and joins the new group.
NOTE You can link lines only within a drawing. To link lines across drawings, use
an off-page connector. For more information, see Add Off-page Connectors, Flow
Arrows, and Other Non-Engineering Items to a P&ID Drawing on page 314.
Each time you add a line to a drawing, you are prompted to continue the line
group, start a new line group, or link the line to another line segment.

The following chart explains the important differences between the three
choices. See also SLINE.
Prompt Action Result and Tag Data Manager
Continue You are The new line segment ■ No change to the pipe
sline group prompted to assumes the tag of line group
select an exist- the selected line
■ A new row is created for
ing line group group
the new pipe line seg-
to which the
ment
new line seg-
ment will be
added
New sline The new line A new group is cre- ■ A new row is created for
group segment be- ated, and the new the new pipe line group
comes part of line segment tag is
■ A new row is created for
a newly cre- empty
the new pipe line seg-
ated group
ment
Link sline You are The new line seg- ■ No change to the pipe
segment prompted to ment: line group
select an exist- ■ assumes the tag ■ No new row; the new
ing line seg- of the selected segment is represented
ment to which line segment by the same row as the
the new line
■ is added to selec- segment to which it is
segment will
ted segment’s linked
be linked
group
■ assumes the tag
of the line group
Segments in a group inherit properties from that group. By default, a pipe line
segment tag gets its service and line number from its pipe line group. The
uniqueness of pipe line segments and groups is controlled by the pipe line
group tag.
Understand To and From Line Information

To and From line information is automatically created and stored for the pipe
lines represented in your P&ID drawings. You can’t manually change the
information stored in the To or From fields for a line segment. The From field

indicates where the line segment originates, and the To field indicates a line
segment’s destination. As you make changes to a P&ID drawing by moving
line segments or adding components, the To and From information is
constantly being updated.
The following list explains the different situations in which information is
reported for the From field on a line segment:
■ If the line segment originates from an equipment item, the Equipment tag
is reported.
■ If the line segment originates on another pipe segment, that line segment’s
tag is reported.
■ If the line segment originates from multiple pipe segments, the multiple
tags are separated by commas and are reported.
■ If the line segment originates on a tagged inline item (such as a control

valve), the tag from the inline item is reported. This happens only if the
inline item is being used as the endline item.
■ If the segment originates on a reducer or other segment breaker (Spec

Break), the pipe line segment tag on the other side of the reducer/breaker
is reported.
■ If the segment originates on a non-tagged item (such as a pipe cap), the

component’s description is reported.
■ If the segment does not originate on a component, inline tagged item, or

non-tagged item, no value is reported; the field is blank.
The information for the To field on a line segment is reported the same way
it is for the From field.
NOTE Off-page connectors are not used to determine the values for the To and
From fields for a line segment. When a line segment is attached to an off-page
connector, the To or From field is reported based on what the terminating
component, inline tagged item, or non-tagged item is on the other drawing.
To add a line to an existing line group

The following procedures are valid for both pipe lines and signal lines.
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the Lines tab. Click a line.

3 Click in the drawing area to specify the location for the first point of the
line.
4 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point of the line.
5 To specify any additional points of the line, continue clicking in the

drawing area.
NOTE All lines drawn from the start point to end point (when you press
Enter) form one segment and have one data record.
6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select
Continue Sline Group.
7 When prompted, click the group you want the new line to join.
8 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and join the specified
group.
To add a line to a new line group
pipe line.

drawing area.
6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select New
Sline Group.
7 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and place the new line
segment in a new line group.

To add a line and link it to an existing line
line.

drawing.
6 Press the Down arrow on the keyboard, and when prompted, select Link
Sline Segment.
7 When prompted, click the line to which you want the new line to link.
8 Press ENTER to end the series of line segments and link the line.
Quick Reference
Commands
SLINE
System Variables
SLINEORTHO
Interface Reference
No entries
Connect Schematic Lines to Components

Schematic lines are primarily used to connect components, although they can
also connect to other schematic lines.

When a P&ID schematic line is connected to a component or other schematic
line, it displays a connection grip at the end of the line when the line is
selected.
When a schematic line is not attached to a component, an endline grip is

displayed at the end of the line when the line is selected.
For more information about grips and other AutoCAD Plant 3D interface
elements, see Understand the Drawing Environment on page 273.
To connect a schematic line to a component
3 In the drawing area, move the cursor near the outside of the component
where you want the line to connect. When an attachment point is
displayed, click to connect the line and component.
4 To create more line segments, continue clicking in the drawing area.

■ Press ENTER to end the schematic line.
■ Move the cursor to another component’s edge, and click when the
attachment points are displayed.
Connect Schematic Lines to Components | 327

NOTE If you move the schematic line, the component you added to it moves with
the line.
To connect a component to a schematic line
3 Click in the drawing area to specify the first point of the line.
5 To create more line segments, continue clicking in the drawing area.
6 In the P&ID tool palette, click the tab that contains the component you
want to add. Click the component.
7 In the drawing area, click the end of the schematic line where an
attachment point is displayed, and if prompted, follow the on-screen
instructions to place the component.
NOTE If you move the schematic line, the component you added to it moves with
the line.
Understand Schematic Line Grouping and Linking

Behavior
When you add a schematic line to a drawing and choose to either continue
the line group, create a new line group, or link the line, you can see the groups
and line segments through visual cues. You can also examine how the groups
and lines are represented in the Data Manager.
To view a schematic line group
■ In the drawing area, hover the mouse over the schematic line whose
grouping you want to view.
The line segment is displayed with dashed lines and is highlighted. The
entire line group is displayed with dashed lines.
To select a schematic line segment
■ In the drawing area, click a schematic line to select the active line segment.

To select all schematic linked line segments
■ In the drawing area, press CTRL+~ (tilde) while selecting the linked
segments.
To select a schematic line group
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Schematic Line panel ➤ Sline Group
Select.
2 Click a schematic line in the drawing area.
Command entry: SLGROUPSELECT

Shortcut menu: Select Group
Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines

Schematic lines use flow arrows to display the flow direction. Most signal lines
do not have flow arrows because the flow direction is not relevant to the P&ID
drawing.
Flow arrows are located at the end of each schematic line segment. You can
easily change the direction of the flow arrows.
To change the flow direction of a schematic line
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Sline Edit.
2 In the drawing area, click the schematic line whose directional flow you
want to change.
3 In the Schematic Line Edit list, click Reverseflow.
To delete or move a flow arrow
1 In the drawing area, click the schematic line arrow that you want to delete
or move.
2 Click the Flow Arrow grip and delete it or move it to another location
on the schematic line.
Define the Directional Flow of Schematic Lines | 329

Quick Reference
Commands
SLEDIT
System Variables
No entries
Edit Schematic Lines

After you have placed a schematic line in a drawing, you can perform a number
of editing tasks on the line. You can also use grips to edit a line.
The Schematic Line Edit list includes the following options:
■ Attach. Programatically attaches a line to a component, although the line

and component may not be attached visually. Use this option when space
on the P&ID drawing is limited.
■ Detach. Programatically detaches an attached line from a component.
■ Gap. Adds a gap and gap symbols where a line crosses a component. A line
with a gap in it is still a single line. The gap is visual only.
■ uNgap. Removes a gap and the gap symbols from a line, and automatically
mends the line.
■ Straighten. Straightens a non-orthogonal line to a selected anchor point

on the line. Straightens a curved sline to a straight line.
■ Corner. Adds a corner segment to a line. The direction and length of the
corner segment are determined by points you specify. When this operation
is performed on a curved sline, the corresponding portion of the arc is
removed to create the corner.
■ Reverseflow. Reverses the flow of the line, and flips the arrows to the new
direction.
■ Join. Joins two separate lines on the same or different axis to form a single
line.
■ Break. Creates two separate lines from one line.
■ Link. Links two separate lines.
■ Unlink. Unlinks two lines that were previously linked.

■ eXit. Closes the Schematic Line Edit list.
You can perform other editing tasks on lines, including:
■ Trimming a line when it extends over other lines or components (use the
TRIM command).
■ Extending a line to connect it to other lines or components (use the

EXTEND command).
■ Continuing or shortening a line (use the Endline grip on the line).
■ Stretching a line to move assemblies connected to the line and nozzles on

attached tanks (use the STRETCH command).
To attach a schematic line to a component
1 In a drawing, right-click a schematic line and click Schematic Line Edit

➤ Attach to Component.
2 Select the schematic line that you want to attach.
3 Select the component to which you want to attach.
4 Press ENTER.
To detach a schematic line from a component
1 In a drawing, right-click a schematic line and click Schematic Line Edit

➤ Detach from Component.
2 Select the schematic line that you want to detach.
3 Select the endpoint closest to the component from which you want to
detach.
4 Press ENTER.
To add a gap on a schematic line
2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line where you want to add the
gap
3 At Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click Gap.
4 Click a point in the schematic line where you want to add a gap.
Edit Schematic Lines | 331

5 Click the second point to create the gap.
6 Press ENTER.
To remove a gap on a schematic line
2 In the drawing area, click a point on the schematic line where you want
to remove the gap.
3 At the Schematic Line Edit list prompt, click uNgap.
4 Press ENTER.
To straighten a schematic line
2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic Line Edit
list prompt, click Straighten.
3 Click an endpoint to use as the point of alignment.
To add a corner to a schematic line
2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic Line Edit
list prompt, click Corner.
3 Click another point for the corner segment.
4 Click another point where you want to add the corner.
To join schematic lines
2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and at the Schematic line Edit
list prompt, click Join.
3 Click in the drawing area to specify the second point.
4 Click the next point or press ENTER to end the series of schematic line
segments.

To break a schematic line
2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic line Edit
list, click Break.
3 Click the point where you want to break the schematic line.
4 Click another break point or press ENTER to exit.
To link a schematic line
2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic Line Edit
list, click Link.
3 Click the line segment to which you want the line linked.
4 At the warning prompt, press the Down arrow to select Yes and link the
line.
To unlink a schematic line
2 In the drawing area, click a schematic line and in the Schematic line Edit
list, click Unlink.
3 At the warning prompt, press the Down arrow to select Yes and unlink
the line.
To trim a schematic line
1 At the command line, enter trim.
2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use as the cutting edges.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Click the part of the line you want to trim.
To extend a schematic line
1 At the command line, enter extend.
Edit Schematic Lines | 333

2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use for the bounding
edges.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Click the part of the line you want to extend.
To shorten a schematic line
1 Click the schematic line you want to shorten.
2 Select the Endline grip on the line segment where you want to shorten
the line, and move the cursor to decrease the line’s length.
3 Click to set the new line length.
To continue a schematic line
1 Click the schematic line you want to continue.
2 Select the Endline grip on the line segment where you want to extend
the line, and move the cursor to increase the line’s length.
3 Click to set the new line length.
To stretch a schematic line
1 At the command line, enter stretch.
2 Click the schematic line segments you want to use for the bounding
edges.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Click the part of the line you want to stretch.

Quick Reference
Commands
SLEDIT
System Variables
No entries
Tag Components and Lines

You can assign tags to your components and lines.
Understand the Difference Between a Tag and an Annotation

A tag is data and never appears on a drawing. An annotation, however, often
includes a tag property and displays that property on a drawing. The result is
an annotation, not a tag. Because the terms tag and annotation are easily
confused, they are described in detail in this table.
A tag is: An annotation is:
A unique identifier for a component or line Information about a component or line

segment segment that appears on a drawing
Data Text and (optional) shapes
Located in the data cache Located on the drawing pane
Unique Not necessarily unique
Viewable as a property in the data manager Viewable in the drawing
A single entity for each component or line Not necessarily a single entity per compon-
segment ent or line segment. (A component or line
segment can have multiple annotations.)
Comprised of subparts as defined by the Text defined in the Annotation Style's block
Tag Format definition
Text that can include the tag property of

a component or line segment. This text is
not a tag, but an annotation.
Tag Components and Lines | 335

Add and Modify Tags
You can tag components and lines to identify them as unique items in a
project.
Depending on how your administrator set up your project, you may be
prompted to assign tag information as you place components or lines.
However, if you do not know all of the tagging data at that time, you can
dismiss the prompt and tag a component or line whenever you have the data
available.
You can assign or modify tag information to a component or line by using
the ribbon, the Properties palette, the shortcut menu, or the Data Manager.
For more information about the Data Manager, see Edit Data Properties in the
Data Manager on page 507.
NOTE Do not use Find and Replace to modify tag information.
Components such as equipment, nozzles, valves, instruments, and pipe lines

have the following default tag formatting:





100).

If your tag formats are different than those listed above, your administrator
may have changed the formatting. For more information about the tag formats
that are set up for your company, see your administrator.

When you copy a component or line, or create a new line by inserting
equipment into an existing line, the new item is assigned a temporary tag
that contains a question mark to differentiate it from the original tag. For
example, if the original tag for a component is P-100, the temporary tag might
be P-100?.
Check for Existing Tags

As you assign tags to components and lines in a P&ID drawing, you can check
to see which tags are already used in the drawing. When you are tagging a
nozzle, only the equipment item attached to the nozzle to is scanned for
existing tagged nozzles. The entire project is not scanned.
You can use the listed tag references to either find the next available tag or to
copy the values of a tagged item to the tag fields of the item you are tagging.
Once you copy a tag, you make the necessary changes to it to make sure it is
unique within the drawing.
Understand Temporary Tags

When you copy a component or line, or create a new line by inserting
equipment into an existing line, the new item is assigned a temporary tag
that contains a question mark to differentiate it from the original tag. For
example, if the original tag for a piece of equipment is P-100, the temporary
tag might be P-100?.
To tag a component or line when placing it in a drawing
2 In the P&ID tool palette, click the component you want to place. Click
in the drawing area to place the component.
3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, enter the required data.
4 Click Assign.
To add a tag after a component or line is placed in a drawing
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.
2 In the drawing area, click the component whose tagging data you want
to add or modify.
3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, change the required data.
Tag Components and Lines | 337

4 Click Assign.
To add a tag to a nozzle
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ Assign Tag.
2 In the drawing area, click the nozzle whose tagging data you want to add
or modify.
4 (Optional) To the right of Existing Nozzles, click the arrow, and in the
expanded list below, do either of the following:
■ To ensure that a unique tag is used, view all the nozzles that are
currently attached to the equipment item of the nozzle you selected.
■ To populate the tagging fields for the nozzle, double-click one of the
listed nozzles. Use the existing data as a basis for the new tag.
5 Click Assign.
To add a tag to an instrument
1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click the instrument whose tagging data you

want to add or modify.
2 Click Assign Tag.
4 (Optional) To the right of Existing, click the arrow, and in the expanded
list below, do either of the following:
■ To ensure that a unique tag is used, view all the inline instruments
that are currently in the project.
■ Double-click one of the listed inline instruments to populate the

tagging fields for the inline instrument. Use the existing data as a
basis for the new tag.
5 Click Assign.
To add or edit a tag using the Data Manager
2 In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Show Selected Items.

3 In the drawing area, click the item you want to tag.
In the Data Manager, the item is selected.
4 Scroll to locate the Tag field, and double-click the field.
5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, add or change the required tag data. Click
Assign.
6 Repeat steps 4-6 for other items you want to tag, or close the Data
Manager.
To add or edit a tag using the Properties palette
1 In the drawing, double-click the item you want to tag.
2 In the Properties palette, P&ID section, to the right of Tag, click [...].
3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, add or change the required tag data. Click
Assign.
Quick Reference
Commands
PIDTAG
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Assign Tag Dialog Box
Annotate Components and Lines

You can annotate components and lines at any time.
Add Annotations
Annotation is text placed in a drawing to describe a component or line. It
displays the properties or tag data of a component or line.
Annotate Components and Lines | 339

You can annotate a component or line using any of the following methods:
■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Annotate.
■ Right-click a component or line, and click Annotate.
■ At the Command prompt, enter pidannotate.
■ In the Data Manager, you can annotate components and lines from the
properties displayed in the Data Manager.
For more information about the Data Manager, see Place Annotations in a
P&ID Drawing from the Data Manager on page 510.
Following is an example of a horizontal centrifugal pump annotated with a
pump tag and a pump InfoTag:
Annotations are linked to the properties, or data, of the component or line.

If the data changes, the annotation updates accordingly. However, not all
annotations are linked visually to the component or line. You can add
freestanding annotations, which do not move in the drawing when you move
a component or line, or linked annotations, which move with the item. Linked
annotations might include an instrument bubble or an equipment InfoTag.
Some annotations (such as valve size) are displayed automatically, and some
require that you place them in a drawing.
Components and lines are not required to have tag data before you annotate
them. For example, you can annotate an item with its size, manufacturer, and
so on.

To annotate a component or line
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ P&ID panel ➤ P&ID Annotate.
2 In the drawing area, click the component or line you want to annotate.
3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, enter the tagging data. Click OK.
4 Select an annotation type.

The annotation choices displayed depend on the component or line you
select.
5 If prompted, click in the drawing to place the annotation.
To convert a linked annotation into a freestanding annotation
1 In the drawing, right-click the linked annotation.
2 Clear the Moves with Parent check box to turn off the linking behavior.
To convert a freestanding annotation into a linked annotation
1 In the drawing, right-click the freestanding annotation.
2 Click Moves with Parent.
To move an annotation from its parent component or line
1 In the drawing, right-click the annotation you want to move.
2 Click Place from Parent.
3 Move and place the annotation in the drawing.
To edit an annotation
1 In the drawing, right-click the annotation you want to edit, and click
Edit.
2 In the Edit Annotation dialog box, modify the annotation data, and click
OK.
Annotate Components and Lines | 341

Quick Reference
Commands
PIDANNOTATE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Assign Tag Dialog Box
Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID

Components or Lines
You can identify AutoCAD objects as AutoCAD Plant 3D components or lines
by converting the objects.
You can also add the converted object to the tool palette for use in the current
project.
Convert an AutoCAD Object to a P&ID Component

An AutoCAD block or a group of AutoCAD lines is converted to a specific class
definition in the P&ID schema. For example, you can convert a group of
AutoCAD lines to a component of the “vessel” class definition.
This group of lines is converted into a single AutoCAD Plant 3D component.
It contains the same data and graphical properties as an original AutoCAD
Plant 3D component. The vessel is referenced in the Data Manager and in
relevant reports (such as an Equipment List report).
In addition, the converted object has the same grip behavior and dynamic
behavior as AutoCAD Plant 3D components.
Convert an AutoCAD Object as a P&ID Schematic Line

You can convert AutoCAD lines and polylines (including splines or polylines
with arcs) into line class definitions that are recognized as P&ID data.
Converting an AutoCAD line adds a record for that line in the Data Manager,
and includes it in reports. You can specify P&ID line properties such as size,
service, and spec.

NOTE An AutoCAD line that is converted to an AutoCAD Plant 3D line does not
have the same dynamic behaviors of P&ID schematic lines. For example, a
converted line does not automatically break when inline components are inserted
in the line. It does not have flow direction properties.
Add a Converted Object to the Tool Palette

Once you convert objects to P&ID components or lines, you can add the
converted objects to a P&ID tool palette. The object becomes a tool on the
tool palette, and can be placed in project drawings like any other P&ID tool.
You should understand the following when using converted objects as tools
on the tool palette:
■ The drawing file that contains the converted object must be saved to the
current project.
■ The converted object is available for all drawings in the current project,
but only on the workstation where it was created.
■ Converted objects that become part of your tool palette are not added to
the project components and lines.
To convert a component
1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD object and click Convert to

P&ID Object.
2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a component (for

example, a Centrifugal Pump) in the tree view.
3 Click OK.
4 In the drawing, if prompted, specify an insertion base point.
To convert a line
1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD line and click Convert to

P&ID Object.
2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a line type in the tree
view.
3 Click OK.
Convert AutoCAD Objects to AutoCAD P&ID Components or Lines | 343

To add a converted object to the tool palette
1 In a P&ID drawing, right-click an AutoCAD object and click Convert to

P&ID Object.
2 In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, click a line or component type
in the tree view.
3 Click OK.
4 Save the drawing file.
5 On the tool palette, click the tab where you want to place the new tool.
6 Click and hold the converted object, and drag it to the tool palette.
Quick Reference
Commands
PIDCONVERT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Convert to P&ID Object Dialog Box
Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD

Export a P&ID drawing file to an AutoCAD drawing file format without losing
the visual fidelity of the P&ID drawing.
The exported drawing retains all P&ID components and annotations as
AutoCAD blocks. All P&ID schematic lines are retained as AutoCAD lines. You
can then use AutoCAD to open, view, edit, and plot the exported P&ID DWG
files.
Avoid Proxy Graphics

You can use AutoCAD and AutoCAD P&ID to open and view drawing files in
the DWG file format. However, you cannot use AutoCAD to edit custom
objects created in P&ID, such as pipe lines, nozzles, and other equipment.

AutoCAD treats such custom objects as proxy graphics. You cannot edit or
modify proxy graphics using AutoCAD.
To open a P&ID drawing in AutoCAD, first export the drawing file to AutoCAD.
Exporting the drawing ensures that the AutoCAD drawing looks identical to
the P&ID drawing. Moreover, the custom objects in P&ID are converted to
AutoCAD blocks and lines instead of proxy graphics. You can then edit these
blocks and lines in AutoCAD.
For more information about proxy graphics, see “Work With Custom and Proxy
Graphics” in the AutoCAD Help system.
Maintain Visual Fidelity

In an exported drawing, components (equipment, nozzles, instruments, inline
components, and non-engineering items) look exactly like those in the original
P&ID drawing. All the information that is displayed in the drawing (such as
color, position, and size) is retained in the exported drawing.
For schematic lines, all visual information (such as color, linetype, line weight,
and so on) is retained in the AutoCAD lines.
Annotations placed on components and lines are exported as AutoCAD blocks.
They retain their position, size, and orientation in the drawing.
Save, View, Edit, Plot as AutoCAD Files

To export a P&ID drawing file, save it in one of the following AutoCAD file
formats:
■ AutoCAD 2010 Drawing (*.dwg)
■ AutoCAD 2007/LT 2007 Drawing (*.dwg)
After exporting the P&ID drawing to AutoCAD, you can view, edit, and plot
the drawing as you would any AutoCAD drawing.
All the layers in a P&ID drawing are retained in the AutoCAD file format.
Similarly, all model space, paper spaces, and any user-created layouts are
available in the AutoCAD file format.
NOTE It is recommended that you use the EXPORTTOAUTOCAD command to

export layouts correctly. Using an AutoCAD command, such as EXPORTLAYOUT,
does not export all P&ID layers correctly and might result in lost data or exploded
objects.
Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD | 345

To export a P&ID drawing to AutoCAD
1 If the Project Manager is not already open, click Home tab ➤ Project
panel ➤ Project Manager.
2 If the correct project is not already open, open it now.
3 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing you want to
export to AutoCAD. Click Open.
4 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the drawing. Click Export
to AutoCAD.
If the drawing is not saved, you are prompted to save it.
NOTE You cannot edit read-only drawings. AutoCAD P&ID does not prompt
you to save a read-only drawing when you try to export it.
5 In the Unsaved Drawing dialog box, click Yes to save the drawing and
continue with the export process.
NOTE You cannot export a P&ID drawing when it is not open.
6 In the Export to AutoCAD dialog box, browse to the location where you
want to save the drawing. In the File Name box, specify a file name.

NOTE If a drawing file with the same name already exists in the specified
location, an error message is displayed. You can overwrite the existing file or
use a unique file name. If the existing drawing file is a P&ID project drawing,
you cannot overwrite it. You must specify a unique name for the drawing
file.
7 In the Files of Type box, specify one of the following file formats for the
drawing:
■ AutoCAD 2010 Drawing (*.dwg)
■ AutoCAD 2007/LT 2007 Drawing (*.dwg)
8 Click Save.
Quick Reference
Commands
EXPORTTOAUTOCAD
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Export To AutoCAD Dialog Box
Export a P&ID Drawing to AutoCAD | 347

348
Work with AutoCAD P&ID
Drawings in AutoCAD
Plant 3D
7
You can place Plant 3D equivalents of P&ID objects in your 3D model to minimize data entry.
You can validate the model to make sure that it is synchronized with the P&ID drawing.
Overview
P&ID drawings and Plant 3D models represent many of the same objects in
different forms.
Piping and inline equipment such as fittings and valves, whether they are
represented schematically or in 3D, are closely related. If you have created
AutoCAD P&ID drawings for a project, you can use these drawings to minimize
data entry when creating a 3D model. With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can take
advantage of the relationship between the two drawing types to perform the
following tasks:
■ Create a project that contains both P&ID drawings and Plant 3D models.
For more information about the Project Manager, see Work with Project
■ Use data from P&ID objects to assist in creating Plant 3D objects.
■ View P&ID and Plant 3D data in the Data Manager.
349
Understand the Mapping of Classes and Properties
P&ID classes and properties are mapped to corresponding Plant 3D classes
and properties by default. Your administrator makes sure that P&ID objects
are mapped to their 3D counterparts appropriately.
For more information about the mapping process, see Understand Mapping
on page 182.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIDLINELIST
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
P&ID Line List
Understand the P&ID Line List

You can use the P&ID Line List to view the lines and components available
in a P&ID drawing.
The P&ID Line List window displays all line segments and associated fittings,
valves, and inline components in a P&ID drawing. Pipe line group number
determines the order of lines. You can select any available P&ID object and
place its mapped Plant 3D counterpart in the Plant 3D model. When you place
a Plant 3D object in a model, the property values of the P&ID object are copied
to the Plant 3D model as well.
NOTE A P&ID object must be mapped to a Plant 3D object before you can place
an equivalent Plant 3D object in the model. In the list, unmapped items are
unavailable for placement.
When you place the mouse over the various tree nodes, the tooltip displays
the item name and its mapping.
350 | Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D

To open the P&ID Line List
1 Open a Plant 3D model.
2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID Line
List.
3 In the P&ID Line List window, in the drop-down list, click the P&ID
drawing you want to open.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIDLINELIST
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
P&ID Line List
Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers

You can click a line segment in the P&ID Line List to place its mapped
counterpart in the model.
Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers | 351

The P&ID Line List presents the line segments and related components that
appear in a specified P&ID drawing. You can click any available line segment
and place its Plant 3D counterpart in the 3D model.
To place a line in a Plant 3D model
2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID Line
List.
3 In the P&ID Line List window, do the following:

■ In drop-down list, click the P&ID drawing whose lines and
components you want to view.
■ In the tree view, expand the Pipe Line Group. Click a line segment.
■ Click Place.

■ If the size and spec match, go to step 5.
■ If the size or spec do not match, in the Select Size and Spec dialog
box, do the following:
■ Under Spec, click a spec (for example: CS150).
■ Under Size, click a size (for example: 4”).
■ If you are sure that your choice is accurate for all situations, select
the check box labeled Always Substitute the Selected Size For [size].
(The spec is not saved along with the size.)

■ Click Select.
NOTE If the size you want is not available, you can specify a substitute
that you can correct later. Unless you are sure that your choice is
accurate, do not select the check box labeled Always Substitute the
Selected Size For [size]. See Edit Size Mappings on page 357
5 In the drawing area, click the location for the start point of the pipe.
6 Click the next point of the pipe.
7 Continue clicking additional points of the pipe.
8 Press ENTER.
Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers | 353

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIDLINELIST
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
P&ID Line List
Select 3D Class Dialog Box
Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment

You can choose valves, fittings, and inline equipment from the P&ID Line
List and place mapped Plant 3D counterparts in the model.
Valves, fittings, and inline equipment are listed under each line segment. You
can click any available component and place it in the Plant 3D model. Only
those P&ID objects that have been mapped to corresponding Plant 3D objects
are available for placement. Mapping ensures that the Plant 3D model has the
same property values as the corresponding P&ID object.
If a P&ID object is mapped to more than one Plant 3D object, you can specify
the Plant object when you place it in your drawing.
To place valves, fittings, or inline equipment based on P&ID data in the 3D

model
2 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ P&ID Line List.
3 In the P&ID Line List window, do the following:

■ In the drop-down list, click the P&ID drawing whose lines and
components you want to view.
■ In the tree view, expand the Pipe Line Group. Click an item (for
example: Gate Valve).

■ Click Place.

■ If the size and spec match, go to step 5.
■ If the size or spec do not match, in the Select Size and Spec dialog
box, do the following:
■ Under Spec, click a spec (for example: CS150).
■ Under Size, click a size (for example: 4”).
■ If you are sure that your choice is accurate for all situations, select
the check box labeled Always Substitute the Selected Size For [size].
(The spec is not saved along with the size.)
■ If the size you want is not available, click Edit Size Mappings to
edit the default mapping file. For more information, see Edit Size
Mappings on page 357.
■ Click Select.
Place Valves, Fittings, and Inline Equipment | 355

■ If the P&ID object class is mapped to a single Plant 3D class, go step
6.
■ If the P&ID object class is mapped to multiple Plant 3D classes, in the

Select Plant 3D Class dialog box, in the 3D Classes list, click a Plant
3D class. Click Place.
6 In the drawing area, click a point on a pipe to specify the location for
the inline equipment.
7 Press ENTER.
For more information, see Place Valves on page 471

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIDLINELIST
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
P&ID Line List
Edit Size Mappings

If the sizes in a P&ID drawing do not match the sizes available for a Plant 3D
model, you can edit the default mapping file.
Understand Size Mapping

If the size (or spec) information of the P&ID object is not found in the
corresponding Plant 3D information, you can supply this information. For
example, if a P&ID valve specifies a size that does not exist for any Plant 3D
valve, you are prompted to supply the correct size. If you specify, for example,
4”, you are offered the opportunity of saving that size as a match.
You can also edit the default mapping files to modify or add sizes. Consult
your system administrator if you have size-mapping questions.
To edit size mappings
Edit Size Mappings | 357

3 ■ If you have attempted to place an object and the Select Size and Spec
dialog box is displayed, click Edit Size Mappings.
■ If you want to edit size mappings but the Select Size and Spec dialog
box is not displayed, at the Command prompt, enter
plantpidsizemapping.
4 In the Size Mapping dialog box, click Imperial or Metric, depending on

your needs. In the P&ID Size column, click a size (for example: 3/8”).In
the 3D Size column, in the drop-down list, click an appropriate matching
size (for example: 3/8 inch”).Continue mapping sizes as needed. To add
a new mapping, click Add Row.Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIDLINELIST
PROJECTSETUP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
P&ID Line List
Validate the 3D Model

You can validate a model and step through the Validation Summary to correct
or flag detected discrepancies.
Understand Validation Settings

Plant 3D objects based on P&ID data are not linked to their P&ID counterparts.
Therefore, changes made to the P&ID drawing are not reflected in the model.
However, you can validate the model against a P&ID drawing at any time to
find any mismatches that exist between the two and correct them. For more
information, see Understand the Role of Tags During Validation on page 360.
You can configure validation settings to check for specific discrepancies. For
example, you can check for the following mismatches between a Plant 3D
model and a P&ID drawing:
■ Tagged inline items that exist in one and not the other
■ Items with the same tag that are different types
■ Properties that have different values
■ Inline items that are on different pipe lines
■ Equipment that has more (or fewer) nozzles
Validate the 3D Model | 359

Understand the Role of Tags During Validation
Using mapping, you can place Plant 3D objects in your model with all P&ID
property value information intact. If the mapped properties are not part of a
tag format, the match is straightforward. If, however, the mapped properties
are included in the P&ID tag, these properties must also be included in the
Plant 3D tag.
Equivalent Tags
During validation, if a P&ID object and a Plant 3D object have the same tag
values, the objects are considered equivalent. If the tag values are not the
same, the objects cannot be evaluated during a validation check. If the tags
match, other comparison tests can take place (matching type, matching line,
and so on).
Here is an example of tag equivalence:
■ The P&ID property paint code is mapped to the Plant 3D property color.
■ The tag format for the P&ID object includes paint code (p-paint code).
■ An equivalent tag format for the Plant 3D object includes color (p-color).
Mismatched Tags
Make sure to map every property that you use as a subpart of a P&ID tag
format. Otherwise, the value is not copied when you place the Plant 3D object
in the model.
For example, if you have a P&ID object with a tag format that includes
manufacturer, color, and supplier, but supplier is unmapped, only the values
for manufacturer and color are included in the model. A question mark appears
in the Plant 3D tag. Thus, the tags do not match and the objects are not
compared during validation.
NOTE If you change a default mapping or set up a new mapping, make sure that
associated tag formats match.
Understand the Validation Process

For best results when validating a Plant 3D model against a P&ID drawing,
adhere to the following guidelines:
■ Make sure that the P&ID drawing is the most recent version.
■ Do not validate a model if P&ID information is unavailable.

■ Do not validate a model if you are using placeholder parts. Placeholder
parts are ignored.
For more information about the validation process, see Validate Project
To specify error types to flag
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the P&ID Drawings folder.
Click Validate Config.
2 In the P&ID Validations Settings dialog box, in the Error Reporting tree
view, expand 3D Model to P&ID Checks. Select the check boxes for the
error types you want examined during validation.
3 Click OK.
To validate a 3D model against a P&ID drawing
1 In the Project Manager, right-click the project node. Click Validate Project.
Validate the 3D Model | 361

2 When the Validation Progress dialog box is closed, do one of the
following:
■ If none of the drawings have validation errors, the Validation
Complete message is displayed. Click OK.
■ If there are errors in one or more drawings, the Validation Summary

Window is displayed. Go to the next step.
3 To view information about each error, in the Validation Summary tree,

click an error node. The drawing zooms to the problem object.
4 Perform the error action displayed in the Details pane.
Quick Reference
Commands
VALIDATE
VALIDATECONFIG
VALIDATESUMMARY
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Validation Progress Dialog Box
P&ID Validation Settings Dialog Box
Validation Summary Window
Correct Validation Errors

You can correct errors identified during validation.
After you validate the drawings, a list of flagged errors is displayed in the
Validation Summary window. The following symbol identifies errors:

To zoom to specific errors, click the name of the error. Error and status
information is displayed in the Details area.
You can ignore the error or fix it manually. Errors flagged as Ignored can be
hidden by changing the setting in the Validation Summary window.
Error Validation Reference

When you validate a model, you can flag and correct the following errors.
Inline Component Missing from P&ID Drawing or from Model

Example: Possible reasons for a mismatch include the following:
■ Both items are correctly modeled, but one is mis-tagged.
■ One of the items is missing from the P&ID drawing.
■ One of the items is missing from the Plant 3D model.
Description: Either the tag assigned in the P&ID drawing is not found in the Plant
3D model or the reverse is true.
To Correct: ■ Make the necessary adjustments so that the tags match or add
the missing part.
■ Ignore the error.
Correct Validation Errors | 363

Mismatch Between Class Types
Example: The P&ID class is Valve; the Plant 3D class is pump.
Description: The tags in the P&ID drawing and the Plant 3D model match, but
their class types differ from the types that were mapped.
To Correct: ■ Research and correct the mapping. Or substitute the part with
another type that matches.
Property Mismatch
Example: The P&ID property for valve manufacturer is Gordon and the Plant
3D valve manufacturer is Hopkins Manufacturing.
Description: The tags for the paired items match, but the properties values do
not.
To Correct: ■ Change the property values to match.

Tagged Inline Equipment on a Different Line in 3D Model

Example: A P&ID valve is on different lines in the P&ID drawing and the Plant
3D model.
Description: Inline equipment is not on the same line in the model as its coun-
terpart in the P&ID drawing.
To Correct: ■ Move the equipment to the correct line.

Nozzle Mismatch
Example: A tank in the P&ID drawing has two nozzles and in the Plant 3D
model, the same tank has three nozzles.

Description: The model has a component with an extra nozzle or a missing nozzle
when compared to its corresponding component in the P&ID
drawing.
To Correct: ■ Add or remove the nozzle in question.

Quick Reference
Commands
VALIDATE
VALIDATECONFIG
VALIDATESUMMARY
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Validation Progress Dialog Box

366
Create and Modify a Plant
3D Model
With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create a 3D model of piping systems. You can add pipe,
equipment, structural components, and pipe supports to the model.
When you route pipe in a 3D model, fittings are automatically added when you change
routing direction or pipe size. 3D pipe objects connect to adjacent objects on the same pipeline.
You can modify these objects as a group.
You use a pipe spec when routing to provide information about the pipe and available fittings.
The pipe spec also determines which parts to use by default for a branch connection.
You can add equipment from a library of items including pumps, tanks, vessels, heat
exchangers, and so on. When pipe is connected to a nozzle fittings and fasteners (for example:
bolts and gaskets) are added automatically.
You can add pipe supports such as shoes, trunnions, trapeze bars, or dummy legs from a
library. If you create an isometric drawing from the model it includes pipe supports.
You can create structural elements, such as AISC steel members, structural trim, stairs, and
railing. You can cut and arrange beams into structures such as a pipe rack.
367
368
Create and Modify
Equipment 8
In AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create and modify 3D models of plant equipment such as
tanks, pumps, boilers, and filters.
When modeling equipment, you define its physical dimensions, location, orientation, and
other details. You can also create templates from equipment and add nozzles to connect pipes
to equipment.
Create Equipment
In AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create equipment from parametric patterns or
user-fabricated models, or add custom equipment to a drawing by converting
a 3D DWG model from another program.
When you create an equipment model, you define its geometric information,
location, orientation, and non-geometric information (such as an equipment
tag or description).
Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns

AutoCAD Plant 3D includes patterns for some equipment types. You can use
these patterns as a starting point for your own equipment.
Using equipment patterns, you can create your own piece of equipment simply
by changing the dimensions, placement parameters, and placement location
in the drawing area.
For example, you can create a centrifugal pump from an existing pattern with
a modification to one of the values. In the illustration on the left, the position
for the nozzle discharge (PF1C) of the centrifugal pump is offset to the right by
369
4 inches. The illustration on the right shows the nozzle discharge set to 0", or
centered on the pump.
The following parametric equipment patterns are provided with the program
(you can also create new equipment for any of the following items):
■ Heaters. Includes Box Type Heater, Cylindrical Heater.
■ Heat Exchangers. Includes Breech Lock Heat Exchanger, Plate Frame Heat
Exchanger, Reboiler, Vertical Down Heat Exchanger, and Vertical Up Heat
Exchanger.
■ Pumps. Includes Sump Pump, Hose Pump, Horizontal Splitcase Pump,

Horizontal Splitcase Turbine Pump, Vertical Inline Pump, Vertical Inline
Pump (dual arm), Centrifugal Pump, and Turbine Centrifugal Pump. The
shapes for pumps are fixed.
■ Strainer Equipment. Includes Strainers. The shapes for strainers are fixed.
■ Tanks. Includes Horizontal Tank and Vertical Tank.
■ Vessels. Includes Horizontal Vessel and Vertical Vessel.
You can also create a pattern by stacking individual shapes onto each other
and changing the default dimensions and placement parameters of each shape.
For more information, see Create User-Fabricated Equipment on page 375.
To create equipment from an existing pattern
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Create.
370 | Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment

2 In the Create Equipment drop-down list, click an equipment class (for
example: Vessel). In the flyout menu, click an existing equipment type
(for example: Horizontal Vessel).
3 (For all equipment types except pumps and strainers) Under Shapes, click
Add to add available shapes for this equipment type, or click Remove to
delete an existing shape. Use the Up and Down arrows to change the
stacking order of the shapes.
NOTE In the Shapes list, for vertical equipment, the top-most shape is listed
first, and the bottom-most shape is listed last. For horizontal equipment, the
front is listed first and the end is listed last.
4 Under General, do the following:

■ (Optional) To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. In
the Assign Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type (for example:
V for Vessel). In the Number box, enter a unique numeric identifier.
Click Assign.
■ To assign a description for this piece of equipment, in the Long

Description box, enter a description (for example: Vessel-Custom).
■ To assign an elevation (the vertical distance from the insertion point

to the bottom of the first shape), in the Elevation box, enter a value.
Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns | 371

5 Under Shapes, click a shape. Under Dimensions, enter dimension values.
Repeat this step for each shape dimension you want to change.
NOTE When you click a shape to change its dimension, the shape and its
dimension values are displayed in the preview image.
6 To add a nozzle to or modify an existing nozzle on the equipment shape

you defined, under Shapes, click the shape. On the Nozzles tab, do the
following:
■ To the right of the equipment image, select an existing nozzle or click
Add to add a nozzle to the selected equipment shape.
NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs that are
included in the program. For example, Nozzle 1 (ASME B36.10) for a
Vertical Vessel contains the following default values: Nominal value = 4,
Nominal unit = inches, Pressure Class = 300, End Type = LFL, and Facing
= RF.
■ Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click the part. In the Select Part
dialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end type, and
nominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select.
NOTE If no nozzles are displayed under Description, the combination of

nozzle type, end type, and nominal size you defined is not in the parts
catalog. Try again.
■ Under Parameters, to the right of Location, select the nozzle location

(Top, Bottom, or Radial). To the right of L, add a number to represent
the nozzle length (the program defaults to inches). Add other
parameter information (R = radius, A = angle, L = length, P =
perpendicular, I = inclination, N = rotation, O = offset, H = height,
and T = twist) as necessary.

NOTE When you click a nozzle type, the position of the nozzle is displayed
in the preview image.
7 On the Data tab, add relevant data for items (such as Manufacturer,
Material, Size, and so on).
Create Equipment From Parametric Patterns | 373

8 (Optional) To use this piece of equipment and its data as a template for
other equipment pieces, do the following:
■ Click Templates.
■ In the drop-down list, click Save Current Settings as Template.
■ In the Save Template As dialog box, navigate to the location where

you want to save this template. In the File Name box, enter a template
name. Click Save.
NOTE The file extension for an equipment template is .peqs.
9 In the Create Equipment dialog box, click Create.
10 In the drawing area, click to place the equipment model or enter

coordinates at the desired insertion point.
11 To orient the equipment model, do one of the following:

■ To orient the model to the desired position, enter rotation values or
use the compass tool. Press Enter.
■ Press Enter to accept the default position. You can use AutoCAD
commands such as move, rotate, or 3drotate to further position the
equipment.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTEQUIPMENTCREATE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Create Equipment Dialog Box
Create User-Fabricated Equipment

For less common pieces of equipment (such as turbine compressors), you can
build your own equipment by selecting and assembling shapes along a vertical
or horizontal axis.
You define the stacking order of the shapes along the axis, and specify the
dimensions and placement parameters for the equipment. Depending on the
shapes, you can also define the number, location, and dimensions of nozzles.
NOTE The shapes for pumps and strainers are fixed. You cannot add, delete, or
change the shape of these equipment types. However, you can change their
dimensions.
As the following illustration shows, you can create a vertical column by placing
a large cylinder at the bottom, a cone stacked above it, a narrow cylinder on
top of the cone, and a dish head on the top. You specify the height,
dimensions, and other parameters as you add each shape.
Create User-Fabricated Equipment | 375

For vertical equipment, shapes are stacked along a vertical axis, from top to
bottom. For horizontal equipment, shapes are stacked along a horizontal axis,
from left to right.
The following table lists the shapes that are available for creating user-fabricated
equipment.
Shape Preview Image Description Dimensions
2:1 Torispheric A dished, spherical head Diameter (D)

Head with a flange.
Torispheric A dished, spherical head Diameter (D)

Head with no flange.

Round-to-Rect- Orientation
angle Depth (D1)
Width (W)
Height (H)
Diameter (D2)
Eccentricity (E)
Rotation (A)
Pyramid Orientation
Bottom Depth
(D1)
Top Depth (D2)
Width (W)
Height (H)
Halfsphere A head that is one-half of Diameter (D)

a sphere. The depth is
equal to half the diameter.
Used for high-pressure
vessels due to its inherent
strength. Expensive to
manufacture because of
the higher surface area, so
it is only used when neces-
sary.
2:1 Elliptical A head that is in the shape Diameter (D)

Head of an ellipse, such that the Straight Flange
long axis is twice the Height (SF)
length of the short axis.
The head depth is one-
quarter the diameter. Has
a flange.

Elliptical Head A head that is in the shape Diameter (D)

of an ellipse, such that the
long axis is twice the
length of the short axis.
The head depth is one-
quarter the diameter.
Does not have a flange.
Cylinder Diameter (D)

Height (H)
Cone Orientation
Bottom Diameter
(D1)
Top Diameter (D2)
Height (H)
Eccentricity (E)
Rotation (A)
Cube Depth (D)

Width (W)
Height (H)
To create fabricated equipment
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Create.

2 In the Create Equipment drop-down list, click an equipment class (for
example: Vessel). In the flyout, click New <equipment type> (for example:
New Vertical Vessel).
NOTE For most equipment types, you create a piece of equipment that builds
on a vertical or horizontal axis.
3 Click Add to add available shapes for this equipment type. Use the Up
and Down arrows to change the position of the shapes.
4 Under General, do the following:

■ (Optional) To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. In
the Assign Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type (for example:
V for Vessel). In the Number box, enter a unique numeric identifier.
Click Assign.
■ To assign a description for this piece of equipment, in the Long

Description box, enter a description (for example: Vessel-Custom).
■ To assign an elevation (the vertical distance from the insertion point

to the bottom of the first shape), in the Elevation box, enter a value.
5 Under Shapes, click a shape. Under Dimensions, enter dimension values.

Repeat this step for each shape dimension you want to change.

NOTE When you click a shape to change its dimension, the shape and its
dimension values are displayed in the preview image.
6 To add a nozzle to an equipment shape you defined, under Shapes, click

the shape. On the Nozzles tab, do the following:
■ To the right of the equipment image, click Add to add a nozzle to the
selected equipment shape.
NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs, which are
= RF.
■ Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click the part. In the Select Part
dialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end type, and
nominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select.

catalog. Try again.
■ Under Parameters, to the right of Location, select the location where

you want to place the nozzle (Top, Bottom, Radial, or Line). To the
right of L, add a number to represent the nozzle length (the program
defaults to inches). Add other parameter information (R = radius, A
= angle, L = length, P = perpendicular, I = inclination, N = rotation,
O = offset, H = height, and T = twist) as necessary.

NOTE When you click a nozzle type, the position of the nozzle is displayed
in the preview image.
7 On the Data tab, add relevant data for items (such as Manufacturer,
Material, Size, and so on).

■ In the Save Template As dialog box, navigate to the location where

name. Click Save.
9 In the Create Equipment dialog box, click Create.
10 In the drawing area, click to place the equipment model or enter

coordinates at the desired insertion point.
11 To orient the equipment model, do one of the following:

■ To orient the model to the desired position, enter rotation values or
use the compass tool. Press Enter.
■ Press Enter to accept the default position. You can use AutoCAD
commands such as move, rotate, or 3drotate to further position the
equipment.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTEQUIPMENTCREATE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Create Equipment Dialog Box
Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment

You can convert any 3D DWG model to an AutoCAD Plant 3D equipment
model.
To convert a 3D DWG model to an AutoCAD Plant 3D equipment model
1 In the Project Manager tree view, right-click the Plant 3D Drawings folder.
Click Copy Drawing to Project.
2 In the Select Drawings to Copy to Project dialog box, navigate to and

select the DWG file containing the objects you want to convert. Click
Open.
3 In the Project Manager, double-click the drawing that contains the 3D

model you want to convert.
4 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Convert

Equipment.
5 In the drawing area, select the objects you want to convert.
6 When you are finished selecting objects, press Enter.
Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment | 383

7 In the Convert to Equipment dialog box, click the equipment class you
want to assign to the object (for example: Compressor) so that the
converted object is identified in the Data Manager, on the Properties
palette, and in reports. Click Select.
8 To specify the insertion base point, click to place the item in the drawing
area.
9 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, do the

following:
■ To create a description for the equipment, in the Long Description
box, enter a description.
■ To assign a tag to the equipment, click in the Tag box. In the Assign
Tag dialog box, in the Type box, enter a type. In the Expression box,
enter a unique numeric identifier. Click Assign.
10 (Optional) To add nozzle metadata to a nozzle you specified in the

equipment object you defined, on the Nozzles tab, do the following:
■ Click Add to add a nozzle to the converted object.

NOTE Nozzles are based on the DIN or ISO nozzle catalogs, which are
= RF.
■ Under Part Properties, in the Part box, click to select a part. In the
Select Part dialog box, add relevant information (nozzle type, end
type, and nominal size). Under Description, click a nozzle. Click Select.

catalog. Try again.
■ Under Parameters, to the right of Location, click Mark.
11 In the drawing area, click a location on the converted object where you
want to place the center of the nozzle. Select a second point.
12 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Data tab, add relevant data
for items (such as Manufacturer, Material, Size, and so on).
Convert a 3D Model to AutoCAD Plant 3D Equipment | 385

■ In the Save Template To dialog box, navigate to the location where

name. Click Save.
14 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTEQUIPMENTCONVERT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Convert to Equipment Dialog Box
Modify Equipment
You can modify equipment models created in AutoCAD Plant 3D or converted
from another program.
When modifying an equipment model, you can change all values except
equipment type and equipment class.
You can modify custom equipment (equipment converted from another
program), but you can change only its tag data and nozzle values. You cannot
change dimensions or other geometric parameters.
To modify equipment
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Modify

Equipment.
2 In the drawing area, click the equipment model you want to modify.
3 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, edit the tag
data, description, or dimension values as needed. Add or remove shapes
as needed.
4 Click Apply to see the changes reflected in the drawing without closing
the dialog box.
5 On the Nozzles tab, edit the nozzle data as needed.
6 Click OK.
Modify Equipment | 387

To modify custom equipment
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Modify

Equipment.
2 In the drawing area, click the custom equipment model you want to
modify.
3 In the Modify Equipment dialog box, on the Equipment tab, modify the
tag data and description as needed.
4 Click the Nozzles tab and modify the nozzle data as needed.
5 When you are finished making changes, click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTEQUIPMENTMODIFY
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Modify Equipment Dialog Box
Position and Manipulate Equipment in a Drawing

After you create an equipment model, you define its position and orientation
in the drawing.
Reorient Equipment in a Drawing

After an equipment model is placed in a drawing, you can reorient the
equipment using standard AutoCAD commands (such as MOVE or ROTATE).
You can also use grips to reorient equipment.
NOTE Nozzles on equipment are fixed and cannot be moved independently of

the equipment. To move nozzles, select the equipment item and on the ribbon,
click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Modify Equipment.

To reorient or move equipment in a drawing
1 In the drawing area, click the equipment model you want to move or
rotate.

■ Click the Move grip. Drag the equipment to the desired location.
■ At the Command prompt, enter move. Follow the instructions on the

command line.
■ At the Command prompt, enter rotate. Follow the instructions on

the command line.
Copy Equipment
You can create an equipment model by copying an existing one.
All settings for the copied equipment model are the same as the original,
except that the tag contains question marks.
To copy equipment
1 In the drawing area, select the equipment item you want to copy.
2 At the Command prompt, enter copy, and follow the instructions on the
command line.
Attach Graphics to Equipment

You can add graphics to equipment, making them part of the equipment.
Attached graphics may include objects such as brackets, davits, clips, boots,
domes, or integral railings.
Copy Equipment | 389

Once you add a graphic to an equipment model, it becomes part of the model,
and is moved, copied, or deleted along with it.
To edit an attached graphic, first detach it from the equipment. After editing,
you can attach it again.
To attach graphics to equipment
1 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Attach Equipment.
2 In the drawing area, click the equipment model to which you want to
attach objects.
3 Click the objects you want to attach to the equipment.
4 When you are finished selecting objects to attach, press Enter.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTEQUIPMENTATTACH
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Detach Graphics from Equipment

You can detach previously attached graphics from equipment.
Detach a graphic from an equipment model to either edit the graphic or
remove it.
To detach a graphic from equipment
1 On the ribbon, click Home ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Detach Equipment.
2 In the drawing, click the equipment model that contains an attached

graphic.
3 Click Yes to detach all graphics from the equipment model.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTEQUIPMENTDETACH
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space

Reserve space is empty space that you designate when an open area is needed
for service or maintenance of a piece of adjacent equipment.
You can define reserve space using standard AutoCAD commands. Then, you
can attach the reserve space object to an equipment model. The reserve space
object is marked with a special flag and is placed on a separate layer.
To add reserve space to a piece of equipment
1 Create an AutoCAD object (such as a box or a sphere) to use as reserve

space.
2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Attach

Equipment.
3 In the drawing area, click to select the equipment model to which you
want to attach reserve space.
4 At the Command prompt, enter S (attach reServe space), and click the
object to set it as the equipment reserve space.
To modify reserve space
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Detach

Equipment.
2 In the drawing area, click to select the equipment model that has reserve
space attached to it.
3 Click Yes to detach all objects.
Create and Modify Equipment Reserve Space | 391

4 Change the object being used as the reserve space.
5 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Equipment panel ➤ Attach

Equipment.
6 In the drawing, click to select the equipment model.
7 At the Command prompt, enter S (attach reServe space), and click the
object to set it as the equipment reserve space.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTEQUIPMENTATTACH
PLANTEQUIPMENTDETACH
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries

Create and Modify
Structure 9
You can create a structural model in your AutoCAD Plant 3D drawing.
Understand Structural Modeling in AutoCAD Plant 3D

AutoCAD Plant 3D provides lightweight structural modeling capabilities.
You can use AutoCAD Plant 3D to create structural objects. When put together
with piping, equipment, and other objects, the structural tools in AutoCAD
Plant 3D can help you detect issues such as interference in your plant models.
Including structural objects also enables client reviews for hazards and
approximates structural design on piping plans and other orthographic drawings.
Set the Structural Model Representation

You can set the structural model representation that controls the display of
structural objects.
The structural model representation applies to all structural objects in a drawing.
You can change the model representation at any time.
393
The following list describes model representation options in increasing level
of complexity and detail.
Model Representation Model Representa- Description

Name tion
Line Model This model is best for tasks that do not

require extensive detail, such as creat-
ing a member. In line model, objects
are represented as lines, and you can
easily select insertion points for new
objects.
Symbol Model This model is best for quickly making

small changes or additions to a large
project.
Outline Model This model is best for output files and

measuring distances. Insertion points
are not easy to see in this model, so it
is not the recommended representa-
tion for creating objects.
Shape Model This model displays objects at their

original dimensions.
To set the structural model representation
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Line Model

drop-down.
394 | Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure

2 Click one of the available model representations: Line Model, Symbol
Model, Outline Model, or Shape Model.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELSETREP
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Work With Structural Grids

Before placing structural objects, you can create a structural grid in the drawing
area.
Grids are optional, but make it easier to create a structural model in 3D space.
When you create a grid, you specify the grid name, X, Y, and Z positions, and
a coordinate system. Structure units default to the base unit (Imperial or Metric)
specified for the project.
Work With Structural Grids | 395

You can create a grid using the world coordinate system (WCS), user coordinate
system (UCS), or 3 points. If you use the 3 Points option, you specify the origin
and direction of the three axes that define the grid.
You can specify relative coordinates, which are based on the last point entered.
Use relative coordinates when you know the location of a point in relation
to the previous point specified.
To specify relative coordinates, precede the coordinate values with an @ sign.
For example, entering @3,4 specifies a point 3 units along the X axis and 4
units along the Y axis from the last point specified.
To create a structural grid
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Grid.
2 In the Create Grid dialog box, in the Grid Name box, enter a name for
the grid.
3 Under Coordinate System, click WCS, UCS, or 3 Points to set the

coordinate system for creating the grid. If you choose 3 Points, specify
the origin and direction of the three axes of the grid.
4 To specify the axis value, do one of the following:

■ In the Axis Value box, enter the desired coordinate values. Use an @
sign to enter point coordinates either relative to the origin or relative
to values.
■ Click to specify points in the drawing space. Press Enter when

finished.

5 To specify the row value, do one of the following:
■ In the Row Value box, enter the desired values.

finished.
6 To specify the platform value, do one of the following:

■ In the Platform Value box, enter the desired values.

finished.
7 Click Create.
To edit a structural grid
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structure Edit.
2 In the drawing, click the grid to edit.
3 In the Edit Grid dialog box, modify values as needed. Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELGRID
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Create Grid Dialog Box
Edit Grid Dialog Box
Work with Structural Members

A structural member is a 3D structural object, such as a beam or column.
Work with Structural Members | 397

You can specify member settings, create and edit structural members, and
manipulate structural members in various ways.
Specify Member Settings

Member settings are default values for new structural members. You can change
these settings as needed.
Structural member settings focus mainly on shape, size, and orientation. When
you create a new structural member, it derives its properties from the current
member settings. For example, if member settings are currently set to ANSI
standards, Pipe - Shapes ASTM shape type, and 2” shape size, then all new
structural members you create have these settings by default.
You can edit individual structural members. Suppose you need several structural
members with most of the same properties, but at slightly different sizes. You
can specify the member settings, create the structural members, and edit
individual members to change the size as needed.
To specify member settings
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Settings menu ➤

Member Settings.

2 If a member exists in your drawing that has the properties you want to
use for all new members, click Match Properties and select the member
in the drawing area. The Member Settings dialog is populated with the
appropriate values. Modify the values if needed, as described in the
following steps. When finished modifying values, skip to Step 10.
3 In the Member Settings dialog box, in the Shape Standard list, click a
shape standard.
4 Under Shape Type, click the desired shape type in the list. To search for
a shape type, enter the entire shape type name or part of the shape type
name in the box, and click .
5 In the Shape Size list, click the desired shape size. The available sizes
depend on the currently selected shape type. To search for a shape size,
enter the entire shape size or part of the shape size name in the box, and
click .
Specify Member Settings | 399

6 In the Material Standard list, click the desired material standard to use
for newly created members.
7 In the Material Code list, click the desired material code to use for newly
created members.
8 Under Angle, enter the desired angle value, or click a value in the list.
You can click to increase the current value by 90 degrees.
9 Optionally, do any of the following to change member orientation:

■ Click a point in the Orientation preview image to define a justification
point.
■ Select the Flip About Y Axis check box to orient the Y axis in the
opposite direction.
■ Select the Align Y Axis with Z UCS to align the Y axis of the member
with the Z UCS.
10 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
No entries
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Member Settings Dialog Box
Create a Structural Member

You can create a structural member by specifying its start point and end point,
or by aligning the member with a line that you select in your drawing.
When you create structural members, you are prompted to specify points on
the structure. You can set properties such as shape and size before creating
the structure.

To create a structural member by specifying start and end points
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Member.
2 In the drawing area, specify the start point.
3 In the drawing area, specify the end point.
4 The prompt is redisplayed to enable you to create multiple members.

Press Enter when finished creating members.
To create a structural member by aligning with a line in the drawing
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Member.
2 At the command prompt, enter l (Line).
3 In the drawing area, click a line to align the member to.
4 The prompt is redisplayed to enable you to create multiple members.

Press Enter when finished creating members.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELMEMBER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Edit a Structural Member

You can edit an individual structural member to change its settings.
When you edit a structural member, you can change the same settings that
you specify in member settings. If you want to change settings for all new
structural members, use member settings instead.
You can also use the Properties palette to edit member properties.
Edit a Structural Member | 401

To edit a structural member
2 In the drawing area, select the member object you want to edit.
3 In the Edit Member dialog box, edit the values as needed. Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELEDIT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Edit Member Dialog Box
Change the Length of a Structural Member

You can make a structural object longer.
You can change the length of a member using plantsteellengthen or by
dragging the grips. You can use any of the following options when using
plantsteellengthen:
■ Delta. Specify the number of increments by which to increase or decrease

the length.
■ Total. Specify the total absolute length from the endpoint that is closest
to the point where you selected the member.
■ Disregard prompts and click a member in the drawing area to display the
current length of the member.
To change the length of a structural member incrementally
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Lengthen

Member.
2 In the drawing area, select the member you want to lengthen or shorten.
3 At the Command prompt, enter d to specify the new length in increments.
4 At the Command prompt, enter a positive value to lengthen the member,

or a negative value to shorten the member. The distance is measured
from the end point that is closest to the selection point.
Change the Length of a Structural Member | 403

To change the length of a structural member using absolute length
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Lengthen

Member.
3 At the Command prompt, enter t to specify the absolute length.
4 At the Command prompt, enter a positive value to indicate the total

absolute length of the member, as measured from the end point that is
closest to the selection point.
To change the length of a structural member using grips
2 Select a stretch grip on the member.
3 Move the pointing device and click to specify the stretch point.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELLENGTHEN
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Cut a Structural Member

You can cut a structural member with respect to the boundaries of another
structural member.
You can cut a structural member in one of two ways:
■ Cut the member to the boundary of another member.
■ Cut two members to the boundaries of each other.

After you cut one or more members, you can specify the gap between the cut
member and the member boundary.
To cut a structural member to the boundary of another member
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Back Member.
2 At the command prompt, enter b (Both).
3 In the drawing area, click the first structural member whose boundaries
you want to cut a second member to.
4 Click the other member you want to cut.
To cut two structural members to the boundaries of each other
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Back Member.
2 At the command prompt, enter b (Both).
3 At the command prompt, enter o (One).
4 In the drawing area, click the limiting structural member (the member
whose boundaries you want to cut another member to).
5 Click the member you want to cut.
Cut a Structural Member | 405

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELCUT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Miter Two Structural Members Together

You can fit two structural members together in a miter joint.
You can miter two members together in one of two ways:
■ Use a bisector cut.
■ Align the profile edges.
After performing a miter cut, you can select additional members to miter cut
and you can specify a gap between members.
To miter two structural members together
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Miter Cut

Member.
2 In the drawing area, click the first member to miter.

3 Click the second member to miter together.
To align the edges of two structural members

Member.
2 (Optional) To specify a gap between the two structural members, at the

command prompt, enter g (Gap). Specify a distance or positive value and
press Enter.
Miter Two Structural Members Together | 407

3 At the command prompt, enter a (Align edges).
4 In the drawing area, click the first member to align.
5 Click the second member to align.
To create a bisector cut between two structural members

Member.
2 (Optional) To specify a gap between the two structural members, at the

command prompt, enter g (Gap). Specify a distance or positive value and
press Enter.
3 In the drawing area, click the first member on which to apply a bisector
cut.
4 Click the second member on which to apply a bisector cut.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELMITER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Trim or Extend a Structural Member

You can trim or extend a structural member to meet a plane.
You can specify the intersection plane that defines the boundary for trimming
or extending the member.
To trim a structural member
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Trim Member.

2 In the Trim to Plane dialog box, Under Intersection Plane, click a plane
to use as the boundary. Click OK.
3 In the drawing area, click the member to trim.
NOTE To switch to plantsteelextend, hold down SHIFT and click the member
you want to extend.
To extend a structural member
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Extend Member.
Trim or Extend a Structural Member | 409

2 In the Extend to Plane dialog box, under Intersection Plane, click a plane
to use as the boundary. Click OK.
3 In the drawing area, click the member to extend.
NOTE To switch to plantsteeltrim, hold down SHIFT and click the member you
want to trim.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELEXTEND
PLANTSTEELTRIM
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Trim to Plane Dialog Box
Extend to Plane Dialog Box
Edge Cut a Structural Member

An edge cut trims multiple structural members according to the edge of another
member.
You can specify a gap value between the cut member and boundary.
To edge cut a structural member
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Cut Member

Edges.
2 At the prompt, enter a positive value to indicate the gap between the
member you intend to cut and the boundary.
3 In the drawing area, select one or more members. The members are
trimmed at both ends.
Edge Cut a Structural Member | 411

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELEDGECUT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Restore a Structural Member

You can restore a structural member to its original condition.
The endpoint that is closest to the selection point is restored. You can make
repeated selections to restore multiple objects.
To restore a structural member
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Cutting panel ➤ Restore Member.
2 In the drawing area, select the member that you want to restore.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELRESTORE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Work with Structural Trim

You can add structural trim to your 3D models, including railings, stairs, and
ladders.
Use structural trim in your model for interference detection, client reviews of
hazard and other operations, and showing approximate design on piping
plans.
Work with Railings

You can add railings to your structural models.
Specify railing settings to provide default values for all new railings. When
you create a railing, its settings come from these railing settings. You can
change the railing settings or edit an individual railing.
To specify railing settings

Railing Settings.
Work with Structural Trim | 413

2 In the Railing Settings dialog box, enter the desired geometry values. To
change shape values:
■ Under Shape click the [...] button that corresponds with the railing
shape (Handrail, 1st Mid Rail, Kick Plate, or Post) you want to change.

In the Railing Settings dialog box, make desired changes and click
Select.
■ To specify a continuous middle rail, under Shape, select the Middle

Rail (Continuous) check box.
3 Click OK.
To create a railing
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Railing.
2 In the drawing area, click to specify the start point of the railing.
3 Specify the end point of the railing. Press Enter.
To create a railing and align it with another object
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Railing.
2 At the command prompt, enter o (Object).
3 In the drawing area, click to specify the object you want to align the
railing to.
To edit a railing
2 In the drawing area, select the railing to edit.
Work with Railings | 415

3 In the Edit Railing dialog box, modify the geometry values as needed. To
edit shape values:
■ Under Shape click the [...] button that corresponds with the railing
shape (Handrail, 1st Mid Rail, Kick Plate, or Post) you want to change.

In the Railing Settings dialog box, make desired changes and click
Select.
■ To specify a continuous middle rail, under Shape, select the Middle

Rail (Continuos) check box.
4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELRAILING
PLANTSTEELEDIT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Railing Settings Dialog Box
Edit Railing Dialog Box
Work with Stairs

You can create steps or a staircase in your structural model.
Use stair settings to specify default values for all new stairs that you create.
After you create stairs, you can edit individual steps or staircases to change
the settings as needed.
Stairs do not include handrails, but you can add handrails after the stairs have
been placed. For more information about handrails, see Work with Railings
on page 413.
To specify stair settings

Stair Settings.
Work with Stairs | 417

2 In the Stair Settings dialog box, enter the desired geometry values.
3 To change step data:

■ Under Shape, Step Data click the [...] button, In the Select Step dialog
box, make desired changes and click OK.
4 To change stair shape:

■ Under Shape, Stair Shape click the [...] button, In the Select Stair Shape
dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.
5 Click OK.
To create stairs
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Stairs.
2 To select the first point of the stairs, click in the drawing area.

3 To select the next point of the stairs, click in the drawing area again. To
create a series of contiguous stair segments, continue clicking in the
drawing area to specify each segment. Press Enter when finished.
To edit stairs
2 In the drawing area, select the stairs you want to edit.
3 In the Edit Stair dialog box, modify the geometry values as needed.
4 To edit step data:

■ Under Shape, Step Data click the [...] button, In the Select Step dialog
box, make desired changes and click OK.
Work with Stairs | 419

5 To edit stair shape:
■ Under Shape, Stair Shape click the [...] button, In the Select Stair Shape
dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.
6 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELSTAIR
PLANTSTEELEDIT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Edit Stair Dialog Box
Stair Settings Dialog Box
Work with Ladders

You can add ladders to your structural model. Optionally, the ladder can have
a cage.
Specify ladder settings to control the properties of all new ladders. If needed,
you can then edit each individual ladder.
To specify ladder settings

Ladder Settings.

2 In the Ladder Settings dialog box, Ladder tab, under General, click a type.
Under Description, enter the desired description for the ladder.
3 Under Geometry, enter desired geometry values.
4 To change shape values, do any of the following:

■ Under Shape, Ladder Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Ladder
Shape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.
■ To rotate the ladder shape by 90 degrees, select the Switch X and Y

axes check box.
Work with Ladders | 421

■ Under Shape, Rung Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Rung
Shape dialog box, make desired changes and click Select.
5 Click the Cage tab and do any of the following:
■ Under General, click the Draw Cage check box to specify a cage, if
desired. Under Description, enter the desired description for the cage.
■ Under Geometry, edit geometry values as needed.
6 Click OK.

To create a ladder
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Ladder.
2 To specify the bottom point of the ladder, click in the drawing area.
3 To specify the top point of the ladder, click again in the drawing area.
4 To specify the orientation of the ladder, click a third time in the drawing
area. Press Enter.
To edit a ladder
2 In the drawing area, select the ladder you want to edit.
3 In the Edit Ladder Settings dialog box, Ladder tab, under General, make
desired changes.
4 Under Geometry, modify geometry values as needed.
5 To change shape values, do any of the following:

■ Under Shape, Ladder Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Ladder
Shape dialog box, edit values as needed and click Select.
■ To switch X and Y axes, select the Switch X and Y axes check box.
■ Under Shape, Rung Shape, click the [...] button. In the Select Rung
Shape dialog box, edit values as needed and click Select.
6 Click the Cage tab, and do any of the following:

■ Under General, modify settings as needed.
■ Under Geometry, edit geometry values as needed
7 Click OK.
Work with Ladders | 423

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELLADDER
PLANTSTEELEDIT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Ladder Settings Dialog Box
Edit Ladder Dialog Box
Explode Structural Trim Objects

You can explode structural trim objects into individual members.
Railings, stairs, and ladders are complex structural objects made up of multiple
structural members. If you want to edit parts of the object in a way that is not
possible by editing the complete object, you can explode the object into
individual members.
To explode a structural object
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Structural Explode.
2 In the drawing area, click a structural trim object to explode.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELEXPLODE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Work with Footings

When you create a structural footing in your model, you can specify its length,
width, and depth.
You can specify footing settings to determine the values for all new footings.
Then you can customize the settings by editing individual footings as needed.
To specify footing settings

Footing Settings.
2 In the Footing Settings dialog box, enter the values to use for new
footings. Click OK.
Work with Footings | 425

To create a footing
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Footing.
2 To specify the insertion point of the footing, click in the drawing area.
To edit a footing
2 In the drawing area, click the footing you want to edit.
3 In the Edit Footing dialog box, modify the values as needed. Click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELFOOTING
PLANTSTEELEDIT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Footing Settings Dialog Box
Edit Footing Dialog Box
Work with Plates

You can add a plate or grate to a structural model.
When you create a plate, you specify its type, materials, placement, shape,
and other information.
To create a plate
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Parts panel ➤ Plate.
2 In the Create Plate/Grate dialog box, in the Type list, click Plate or Grating.
3 In the Material Standard list, click the material standard to use.
4 In the Material Code list, click the desired material code.
5 In the Thickness list, click the desired thickness for the plate or grating.
6 For gratings only, in the Hatch Pattern list, click the desired hatch pattern.
7 For gratings only, in the Hatch Scale box, enter the desired hatch scale
value.
8 Under Justification, specify the reference point.
9 Under Shape, specify a rectangular or polyline shape. Click Create.
10 To specify the corner of the plate, click the drawing area.
11 To specify the opposite corner of the plate, click the drawing area again.
Work with Plates | 427

To edit a plate
➤ In the drawing area, select the plate to edit.

■ To change plate size, click a stretch grip and move the cursor to
increase or decrease size.
■ To change other properties, right-click the plate. In the Property

Palette, change properties as needed.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTSTEELPLATE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Create Plate/Grate Dialog Box
Export Structural Objects to SDNF

You can select structural objects in a drawing and export them to Steel
Detailing Neutral Format (SDNF).
Structural objects you can export to this format are:
■ Structural members
■ Railings
■ Ladders
■ Stairs
■ Plates
When you export railings, ladders, and stairs to SDNF, they are exploded into
individual members. Ladder cages are not included in an export.

To export structural objects to SDNF
1 On the ribbon, click Structure tab ➤ Export panel ➤ SDNF Export.
Export Structural Objects to SDNF | 429

2 In the SDNF Export dialog box, under Output File, click the [...] button
to select a location for export.
3 In the Export SDNF File dialog box, navigate to and select a folder for
storing the exported file. In the File Name box, enter a name for the
exported file. Click Save.
4 In the SDNF Export dialog box, under Title Packet Information, enter
information about the project.
5 To select objects to export, under Objects, click Select Objects.
6 In the drawing area, select the objects to export.
7 Click Export.
Quick Reference
Commands
SDNFEXPORT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
SDNF Export Dialog Box

Create and Modify Piping
10
Route piping and place valves in the 3D model. You can also create and place specialty items
and instruments, add insulation, and set the pipe spec and line number.
Select a Pipe Spec

Use pipe specs when routing pipe, fittings, and valves in the 3D model.
When you are routing pipe, pipe fittings, or valves to an AutoCAD Plant 3D
model, you start with a pipe spec.
A pipe spec indicates which fittings to use when you change pipe size, change
pipe direction, or branch. For example: use socket weld fittings for pipe under
3”.
A 3D piping model is spec-driven. A spec-driven model references piping
components listed in a pipe spec. When you work with piping in a 3D model,
the pipe spec provides the material, rating, and connection details. For more
information about pipe specs, see Introduction to the Specs and Catalogs Editor.
You can set pipe spec, size, and line number in the ribbon before routing pipe
in the model, or change them while routing.
In combination with the project’s joint settings, the pipe spec determines which
fittings and fasteners are used when connecting and routing pipe. Each pipe
segment and fitting in the model originates from a pipe spec, except for custom
parts.
431
Before routing pipe in the model, you can select a spec file to be used as the
pipe spec. Spec files are created using the Specs and Catalogs Editor.
The spec sheets folder is set in the Project Manager. For more information,
see Set Plant 3D Paths on page 148.
NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D includes sample spec files that are used in the procedures
of this guide.
To select a pipe spec
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Selector
drop-down list.
2 In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).
To view a pipe spec
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec Viewer.
2 In the Spec Viewer, in the Spec list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).
432 | Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping

Set Line Numbers
You can assign a line number to group pipe segments and fittings in the 3D
model.
Pipe segments and fittings are grouped based on a line number. You can assign
a line number before routing pipe.
Line numbers are formatted using project manager the same way tags are
formatted. Any Plant 3D object can have a tag. Pipe lines and fittings also
have line numbers.
You can use the P&ID Line List to create pipe using a line number. The line
number is assigned in the model if the line number tag formats are compatible.
For more information, see Route Pipe Based on P&ID Line Numbers on page
351.
You can assign line numbers globally, by name, using the Data Manager to
rename the line number. You cannot rename to a line number that already
exists in the project, and you must have exclusive project access rights.
Items do not have to be connected to belong to the same line group. However,
some features do not operate if the line group is not connected.
You can use the line number to select pipe in the model. For more information,
see Select Piping on page 466.
When you create pipe that is assigned to a line number you can set the layer
name that the pipe is created on to include the line number in the name. For
more information, see Configure Automated Layer and Color Assignments
on page 171.
If you remove the last item that is assigned to a line number from the model,
the line number is removed from line number lists.
Set Line Numbers | 433

Understand the Line Number Format
The default line number format includes only the line number property (for
example: 101).
You can set the line number format in the P3d Line Group class. For more
information, see Set Up Tag Formatting on page 214. If you set the line number
format to Spec-Service-Line, you can assign the following line number:
CS300-P-101.
Pipe lines in a P&ID drawing and a model are independent of each other and
are not linked. You can check for property differences by validating matching
line numbers, but the values are not linked. For more information, see Validate
the 3D Model on page 359.
Compare P&ID Line Groups and Line Numbers in the Model

In a P&ID drawing, the line number is a property of the line group. Any pipe
line segment or component that belongs to the same line group has the same
line number.
P&ID line groups are managed as a unit. You can add lines and components
to the group (for example: using SLGROUPEDIT). When you change the line
number of a group in a P&ID drawing, the line number changes for all lines
and components in the group.
In a Plant 3D drawing, if you select a single piece of pipe and change its line
number, connected pipe and fittings do not change. To help avoid accidentally
adding disconnected pipe into the same group, the Properties palette does not
allow you to set a line number if selected items are not connected.
To change a pipe line number
1 In a Plant 3D drawing, select one or more pipe components that are

connected end to end.
2 Right-click in the drawing area. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Tag ➤ Line Number Tag.
NOTE The Line Number Tag list cannot be set in the Properties palette if the
selected pipe is not connected.
4 In the LineNumber list, click New.

5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the box labeled TargetObject.Number,
enter the line number (for example: 105).
6 Click Assign.
Set Line Numbers | 435

To rename a pipe line number
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab > Project panel > Data Manager.
2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Current Drawing Data.
3 In the tree view, expand Area. Click Pipe Lines.
4 In the data view, double-click in the Tag column of the line number that
you want to change.
5 In the Assign Tag dialog box, in the box labeled Number, enter the line
number (for example: 105).
6 Click Assign.
NOTE Exclusive project access is required to change the line number using
Data Manager. Renaming a line number can modify more than one project
drawing.

Create Piping
You can route pipe in a model by specifying the start point and end point of
a pipe segment.
By default, the points you specify are on the center line of the pipe, but you
can choose from a number of alignments (for example: bottom of pipe). For
more information about aligning pipes, see Offset Pipe Placement on page
447.
Fittings (for example: elbows) are added automatically when you change
direction while continuing to route pipe from the previous end point.
In addition to specifying the end point in the model, you can type a distance
to specify the position of the next fitting. For more information about the
tools and procedures that help you place pipe at exact locations see Precision
Location on page 448.
Create Piping | 437

When you change direction, you can pick a point that aligns with the next
pipe segment. Pipe length is automatically cut back for the fitting.
As you add pipe segments, the pipe spec provides a list of fittings available to
make the connection. If more than one fitting is available, a default fitting is
selected based on the part use priority. For more information about fitting
priority, see Modify a Spec Sheet.
You can attach pipe to equipment nozzles using node object snap. Connection
hardware (for example: a weldneck flange, gaskets, and bolts) is added from
the pipe spec, based on the size and type of the nozzle.
You add a pipe using the ribbon, a Continuation grip, the spec viewer, the
tool palette, or the plantpipeadd command.
Insert Pipe Using the Ribbon

You can use the ribbon to set a pipe spec, pipe size, and set the line number
before routing pipe in the model.
You can route pipe using either a new or existing line number.
For more information, see 3D Piping Home Tab on page 275.
Route Pipe with the Continuation Grip

You can continue a route or create a branch using a Continuation grip.
Continuation grips are available from pipe, pipe fittings, and nozzles.

Equipment nozzles have Continuation grips.
When you use a Continuation grip, the initial pipe size and direction are
assumed. When continuing from a pipe or pipe fitting, the pipe spec and line
number are also assumed.
Continuation grips are available at open ports, and at default branch locations
(For example: the middle of a pipe segment). A continuation grip does not
appear if the port is in an xref, or the port is connected to from another project
drawing as an xref.
If a nozzle is incompatible with the current pipe spec an error message displays
and a connection is not made. When you change the pipe size, a reducer is
inserted, if one is listed in the pipe spec.
Place a Piping Component from the Spec Viewer

If you want to choose a specific part before adding it to the model you can
use the Spec Viewer.
Create Piping | 439

If you connect to a pipe component in the model, you do not pick the part
size in the Spec Viewer. The part size is set based on the component that you
connect to.
Create a Tool Palette from a Spec

You can add frequently used parts to the tool palette. Before you can insert
parts from the tool palette, you first add the parts to the tool palette.
For information on placing parts, see AutoCAD Plant 3D Tool Palettes on page
284.
You add parts to the tool palette using the Spec Viewer or by dragging a part
from the model to the tool palette. You can also create a tool palette for the
parts by right-clicking an existing tool palette and clicking New Palette.
See Work With Spec Files in a Plant 3D Model to add parts to the tool palette.
Route Pipe and Change Settings using the Command Line

You can route pipe using the plantpipeadd command.
You can set command options using the shortcut menu when routing pipe.
If you do not want to use a fitting when connecting to a branch, you can set
Stub-in mode at the command prompt. If you want to switch between
horizontal and vertical routing easily, you can change the routing plane.
AutoCAD Plant 3D does not support adding valves or fittings from the
command line.
To create a pipe line
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Pipe Spec list.
2 In the list, click Route New Line.

3 In the Assign Tag dialog box, do the following:
■ In the box labeled TargetObject.Number, enter the line number (for
example: 101).
To create an unassigned pipe line, leave this box blank.
■ In the Spec list, click a spec (for example: CS300).
■ In the Size list, click a size (for example: 6”).
■ Click Assign.
4 In the drawing area, click to specify the location for the start point of the
pipe.
5 Click to specify the next point of the pipe.
6 Press ENTER to finish routing pipe.
Create Piping | 441

To route pipe using ribbon settings
1 If the pipe spec, size, or line number are not set in the ribbon, do the
following:
■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec
Selector drop-down list.
■ In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).
■ In the Pipe Size Selector drop-down list, click a pipe size (for example:
4”).
■ In the Line Number Selector drop-down list click a line number (for
example: 101 or Unassigned).
2 On the ribbon, click Route Pipe.
3 In the drawing area, click to specify a location for the start point of the
pipe.
4 Click to specify the next point of the pipe.
5 Continue clicking in the drawing to specify any additional points of the

pipe.

To begin routing from an equipment nozzle
1 If the pipe spec or line number are not set in the ribbon, do the following:
■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Spec
Selector drop-down list.
■ In the drop-down list, click a pipe spec (for example: CS300).
■ In the Line Number Selector drop-down list click a line number (for
example: 101 or Unassigned).
2 In the drawing area, select an equipment object that has a nozzle.
3 Click the Continuation grip.
Create Piping | 443

4 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the pipe.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIPEADD
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Route Piping
You can position pipe and pipe fittings in your model by choosing precise
segment and fitting locations or by setting up the program to calculate the
fitting type and location.

A number of placement tools and settings are available to help you position
pipe and pipe fittings, including pipe grips and the compass.
Use Pipe Grips

You can route pipe from the open port of selected pipe using a Continuation
grip. You can also use a Move grip to locate and stretch pipe.
Use the Move grip at the end of a pipe segment to change the length of the
selected pipe.
In addition to routing pipe, you can use the Continuation grip at an open
port to add an elbow. If you use a Continuation grip that is not at an open
port, a branch is created.
Pipe segments have a branch Continuation grip in the middle of the segment.
Pipe fittings also have branch Continuation grips. For example: an elbow has
a branch Continuation grip that allows you to convert the elbow into a tee.
For more information about grips, see Plant 3D Grips on page 287.
Route Pipes Using the Compass

Use the compass to route pipe at precise angles. When you are prompted to
indicate a pipe routing direction, the compass is displayed in the drawing
area. When the compass is displayed you can snap to the angle indicated on
the compass.
NOTE The points that you specify using the compass are restricted to the routing
plane. You can disable the compass to specify a point that is not on the routing
plane.
The compass displays tick marks on a circle. You can set the angle between
tick marks, change the size of the compass, or turn off the compass .
Route Piping | 445

The compass helps you specify a precise angle at a specified interval. You can
set the compass tick marks and the compass snap angle to different values.
NOTE The compass snap increment is also used in response to the Specify Rotation
Angle prompt (for example: when using the rotation grip). You can disable the
compass angle snap to use the exact rotation specified.
When you add a fitting, the compass tick marks are set to match the available
fitting angles in the pipe spec.

You can set a tolerance angle to allow for slight angle variations when
connecting pipe end to end, or adding a fitting. For example: you can specify
a 91 degree angle using a 90 degree elbow.
If you turn the tolerance angle on, the compass displays tolerance angle
tickmarks. By default, the tolerance angle is off.
Offset Pipe Placement

When routing pipe, you can specify eight offset directions in addition to the
center line. If you set the offset to Bottom of Pipe (BOP), you can then specify
support locations directly.
Offset is relative to your routing direction: it is not absolute. When you route
pipe in a vertical direction, the BOP alignment is relative to a wall. You can
■ Set the alignment and the offset in the ribbon before routing pipe.
■ Set or change alignment from the command line while routing pipe.
Route Piping | 447

If you want to use object snap while offset routing to specify a point on a pipe,
but do not want to connect to the pipe, you can turn off plantoffsetconnect.
Precision Location
You can specify precise object snap points when Continuation grips are not
available or not at a desired location.
In general, if you want to connect to pipe when you are routing you use object
snap. Use object snap to specify an exact location and indicate that you want
to make a connection.
You can use node or end object snaps to connect to the end of another pipe.
If you want to connect to pipe at a right angle use the perpendicular object
snap. Use the near object snap to specify a point that is on the pipe center
line.
NOTE Use Node object snap to connect to nozzles.
For more information on object snaps, see Snap to Locations on Objects (Object
Snaps).
You can use tracking to specify a point that aligns with another point. For
more information, see Track to Points on Objects (Object Snap Tracking).
You can enter a distance (pipe length) to specify the next point. For more
information, see Enter Direct Distances.

If you want to snap to an object and maintain your current elevation,
you can use Elevation Snap. For example, you can connect to vertical pipe.
Use Routing Solutions

If you specify connection and the endpoints are not in-line, AutoCAD Plant
3D can route pipe and add fittings automatically to complete the connection.
You can choose from multiple solutions if multiple paths are available.
To set node object snap mode for pipe routing
1 On the status bar, right-click Object Snap.
2 In the shortcut menu, click Settings.
3 Check Node.
When you click in the drawing to specify a point near a pipe end or
equipment nozzle, you will snap to the center of the port.
4 Click OK.
To continue a pipe line
1 In the drawing area, select a pipe that has an open port.
2 Click the Continuation grip at the end of the selected pipe.
Route Piping | 449

3 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the pipe.
To finish a route at an open port
1 This procedure begins with pipe routing in-progress.

If you are not at the Specify Next Point prompt do the following:
■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.
■ In the drawing, click to specify a start point.

2 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Node.
3 Move your mouse over an open port. Click the Node object snap.
If a path to the open port cannot be found, you cannot continue this
procedure. You can use precision placement to align the pipe route with
the port (For example: route the pipe to a matching elevation) and start
this procedure again.
4 If multiple solutions are available do the following:

■ At the command prompt, enter n (Next).
Route Piping | 451

■ Continue pressing ENTER until the solution that you want to use
displays.
■ At the command prompt, enter a (Accept).
To change elevation while routing
1 This procedure begins with pipe routing in-progress.

If you are not at the Specify Next Point prompt do the following:
■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.
■ In the drawing, click a start point.

2 On the ribbon, in the Elevation & Routing Line panel, click the down
arrow to expand the panel.
3 In the Elevation box, enter an elevation (for example: 36).
4 In the drawing, click to specify a point at the new elevation.
5 Continue clicking in the model to specify any additional points of the

pipe.
To route with offset alignment
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Elevation & Routing Line ➤ Center
(current alignment).
Route Piping | 453

2 Click a justification from the drop-down list (for example: Bottom Left).
3 On the ribbon, in the horizontal Offset box, enter a horizontal offset (for
example: 24).
You can use a negative number to offset in the opposite direction.
4 On the ribbon, click Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.
5 In the drawing, click to specify a start point that is aligned with another
object (for example: at a wall).
6 In the drawing, click to specify the next point of the pipe (for example,
at a wall corner).
7 At the command prompt enter p (plane). In the drawing, click to specify

the next point of the pipe.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTCOMPASS
System Variables
PLANTOFFSETCONNECT
Interface Reference
No entries
Route pipe at a slope

Apply slope as you route horizontal pipe.
When you specify points for a pipe route at the same elevation, AutoCAD
Plant 3D can roll or cutback elbows to automatically apply a desired slope.
You can apply slope to pipe that is in the model using the plantpipeslope
command.
To route new pipe at a slope
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Slope panel ➤ Slope Rise.
2 In the Slope Rise box, enter a slope rise (for example: 1).
3 In the Slope Run box, enter a run length (for example: 120).
Route pipe at a slope | 455

4 On the ribbon, click Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.
5 In the drawing, click to specify a start point.
6 In the drawing, click to specify a point at the same elevation.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIPESLOPE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Edit Slope dialog box
Create a Branch
Create or connect a branch segment to a header.
You can use the Continuation grip in the middle of a header pipe segment to
begin routing a branch.
You can create a branch using object snap to route into another pipe.
For precise placement of the branch segment, you can select and move the
branch fitting up or down the header. The connected branch moves with the
fitting.
The branch table in the pipe spec identifies the fittings (if any) and fasteners
that are used when you connect to another pipe. For example: a tee when
connecting to a pipe of the same size, or an o-let when branching to a smaller
pipe. For more information, see Work with the Branch Table.
To create a tee branch
1 In the drawing, select a pipe.

2 Near the middle of the pipe, click the Continuation grip.
3 In the drawing, click to specify the next point of the branch.
To create a stub-in branch
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Route Pipe.
2 In the drawing, click to specify a start point.
3 At the command prompt, enter st (STub-in).
4 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click an object
snap (for example: Perpendicular).
5 In the drawing, click to specify a point on the pipe header.
Create a Branch | 457

To create an o-let branch
2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select an o-let (for example: sockolet).
3 In the Pipe Spec Viewer, click Insert in Model.
4 If the insertion point is not located at the desired port, press CTRL.
snap (for example: Midpoint).
6 Click to specify a point on the pipe line to snap to.
7 Click an o-let rotation or press ENTER for zero.
8 Press Enter.
9 In the drawing area, click the o-let to select it.
10 Click the Continuation grip on to create a branch.
11 In the drawing area, click to specify the next point of the branch.

To branch from fittings
1 In the drawing area, click a fitting (for example: an elbow).
2 Click a branch Continuation grip.

A Continuation grip that is not located at an open port is a branch
Continuation grip.
Create a Branch | 459

To branch from a precise distance down a header
2 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click From.
4 Click to specify a point at end of a header.
5 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Nearest.
6 Move your mouse over the header to display the osnap glyph (do not
click).
You are now tracking down the header.
7 Enter a distance to create the branch (for example: 24).

Modify Piping
After pipe and pipe fittings have been placed in the drawing, you can move
connected pipe and change part properties.
If you modify the location, spec, or size of pipe, AutoCAD Plant 3D will attempt
to retain pipe connections. If you make a change that cannot be resolved, the
connection is marked with a property-mismatch glyph, or it is disconnected.
AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a number of tools you can use to modify pipe.
Substitute Parts
You can use the Substitution grip to replace compatible parts.
A compatible part has the same size and type (for example: you can substitute
a gate valve with a ball valve).
Using Alignment Lines to Help Move Pipe

You can use alignment lines as visual tools. When you select pipe in the
drawing, alignment lines display along the axis of connected pipe.
Modify Piping | 461

Alignment lines help you to identify connected pipe, and to determine which
direction you can move the pipe.
When you use a Move grip, you move the pipe axis and all connected parts
that share the axis. Conceptually, this is the same as stretching alignment
lines with Ortho mode on.
Changing part Properties

You can use the properties palette to change pipe and fitting properties.
You can change a part in the drawing by modifying the size or spec property.
If you change a part, AutoCAD Plant 3D can retain connections by adjusting
adjacent fittings. For example: changing the pipe size adds (or removes)
reducers.
You can change the property value of multiple items at once. Selecting all
connected items before you change size or spec allows you to avoid temporary
incompatibilities that can add unnecessary fittings or cause disconnections.
For more information on selecting connected pipe, see Select Piping on page
466.
You can also change properties using the Data Manager.
Update a Pipe Spec

You can update the drawing when a change is made to a spec (extension .pspx)
file.
Fitting geometry, material properties, and connection type (endcode) are set
in the pipe spec. If a part is unavailable in a spec, a placeholder part is used.

For more information, see Update a Spec in a Plant 3D Model.
To move pipe using grips
1 In the drawing area, click an elbow to select it.

Alignment lines display on connected pipe.
2 Click a move part grip.
3 Specify a location to move the elbow to (for example: to the left).
Modify Piping | 463

You can move the elbow only in a direction that is perpendicular to an
alignment line.
To connect adjacent piping
1 At the command prompt, enter plantconnectjoint.
2 In the drawing area, select a part with an open port.
3 Select a second part that has an open part at the same location.
The disconnect glyph no longer displays.
To change pipe size or spec
1 In the drawing area, select one or more pipe or fitting objects.
2 Right-click in the model.
3 In the shortcut menu, click Properties.
4 If you want to change the pipe spec do the following:

■ In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D group ➤ Spec.
■ In the Spec list, click a pipe spec.

5 ■ In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D group ➤ General ➤
NominalDiameter.
■ In the NominalDiameter list, click a different size.
Lock Pipe Placement

You can lock pipe after it has been positioned to meet your design
requirements.
If you move pipe, connected pipe that is locked does not move.
Lock Pipe Placement | 465

A locked part displays a lock glyph when the part is selected or
highlighted. If you move a connected part the axis of the locked part does
not change. Locked pipe can be shortened (or lengthened) to accommodate
new fittings, but the axis does not change.
Locking a part does not prevent you from making changes directly to the part.
For example, you can move a locked part using its Move grip.
To lock or unlock piping
1 In the drawing area, click to select one or more Plant 3D objects.
3 In the shortcut menu, click Lock/Unlock Placement.
A lock glyph displays or hides in the model.
Select Piping
You can select connected pipe, or select pipe using the line number.
You can select all parts that have the same line number, or all connected parts
that have the same line number. For information on setting a line number,
see Set Line Numbers on page 433.
To select connected pipe
1 In the drawing area, click to select one or more pipe components.
3 In the shortcut menu, click Append to Selection ➤ Connected Parts ➤

All Connected Parts.
Place Pipe Fittings

Pipe fittings are added as you route pipe, or you can select and insert a pipe
fitting.

When you route, elbows are automatically added when you change direction.
Tees, o-lets, and other fittings are added when a branch is created. Flanges are
added to pipe when connecting to another flanged fitting.
Fittings are chosen based on current spec file, and the joint settings in the
project. The spec file provides the list of available fittings, the priority order
in which compatible fittings are selected from the list (if there are multiple
options), and the branch table.
You can place in-line pipe components such as valves after first selecting the
component from the Spec Viewer or the Tool palette.
Pipe fittings must belong to the pipe spec or must be created using the Custom
Parts dialog box. AutoCAD Plant 3D does not support attaching AutoCAD
objects, such as block references, into a pipe line.
Using Fitting Grips

Fittings have a flip and rotation grip, in addition to all the grips available on
a pipe segment. You can orient a fitting by flipping and rotating using grips.
For more information about grips, see Plant 3D Grips on page 287.
Erasing Connected Fittings

When you erase pipe or pipe fittings, the fittings and fasteners that were
automatically placed are also erased.
To delete only the selected fittings, hold the CTRL key when erasing.
Automatic Placement
Pipe fittings are selected and placed at joints when routing pipe. The type and
placement of fittings are determined by:
■ Geometry
■ Adjacent parts
■ Pipe Spec
■ Project settings - Connections
■ Ribbon values
The pipe spec and project connector settings determine how fittings are
selected when routing. The pipe spec provides the part detail (including end
type). The connector settings control what joint is used to connect the parts.
For more information, see Configure Connectors on page 179.
Place Pipe Fittings | 467

Understand Endcodes and Joint types
An endcode describes the open end (port) of piping and equipment nozzles.
For example, the endcode of a buttweld elbow is BV (for Beveled). The endcode
of an equipment nozzle is typically FL (for Flanged).
You can use the Properties Palette to view the endcodes of piping and nozzles
in the drawing. You cannot change the endcode using the Properties Palette.
In general, you do not manipulate endcodes directly. They are a Read-only
property of the part used in the pipe spec or the equipment nozzle.
Default Endcodes
Endcode Description Example Joint (Match)
PL Plain End, Socket Male Socket Weld (SWF)
BV Beveled End Butt Weld
THDM Threaded Male Threaded (THDF)
THDF Threaded Female Threaded (THDM)
SW Socketweld Female Socket Weld (PL)
FL Flanged Flanged
WF Wafer Wafer flanged (FL)
LAP Lap Collar Lapped (PL)
GRV Grooved Grooved (PL)
SO Slip On Slip on weld (PL)
PPL Plastic Plain Fusionweld
PSW Plastic Socket Female Glue (PPL)
LFL Lined Flange
LLP Lined Lap
LUG Lug Flanged (FL)

Default Endcodes
Endcode Description Example Joint (Match)
BELL Bell Bell and spigot (SPIG)
SPIG Spigot Bell and spigot (BELL)
TAP Tap Tap (PL)
Pipe adapts to different end connections. Plain, beveled, threaded male, and
grooved end types are all compatible and adjust to match the joint. For
example, if a threaded elbow is connected to a pipe that has a Port Property
of PL for EndType1, the pipe end type connects as THDM.
To add an elbow
2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select an elbow (for example: ELL 90 LR).
6 In the drawing area, click to specify an open port on a pipe line.
7 Click to specify an elbow rotation or press ENTER for zero.
8 Press ENTER to finish adding elbows.
To roll an elbow while routing
1 In the drawing area, select a pipe that has an open port.
Place Pipe Fittings | 469

2 At the end of the pipe, click a Continuation grip.
3 At the command prompt, enter r (Rollelbow).
4 In the drawing area, click to specify an elbow angle (for example: 90).
5 It the compass angle snap is not set to an increment of the desired roll
angle, do the following:
■ On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Compass panel ➤ Snap
Increments.
■ In the Snap Increment list, click a snap increment (for example: 15).
6 In the drawing area, click to specify a roll angle (for example: 30).

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTCONNECTJOINT
PLANTDISCONNECTJOINT
PLANTREMOVEORPHANFASTENERS
System Variables
PLANTCONNECTIONMARKER
Interface Reference
No entries
Place Valves
You can place valves using the Spec Viewer or from the tool palette.
You can use the rotation grip to orient the valve after insertion. After you
have placed the valve, you can pick an actuator using the Substitution grip
on the valve.
The pipe spec determines the valve operator that is placed with the valve.
To insert a valve
2 In the Spec Sheet, click to select a valve (for example: globe valve).
snap (for example: Midpoint).
6 Click to specify a point on the pipe line.
Place Valves | 471

7 Click a valve rotation or press ENTER for zero.
8 Press ENTER to finish adding valves to the model.
To change a valve operator
1 In the drawing area, click to select a valve.
2 Right-click in the drawing area. Click Properties.
3 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Part Properties ➤ Valve

Operator.
4 In the Operator list, click a valve operator (for example: HandWheel).
To place a valve at a precise distance from a fitting
1 In the Spec Viewer, in the Spec Sheet, click a valve.

2 Click Insert in Model.
The port aligns with piping flow, regardless of which port you use.
4 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click From.
6 Click to specify a point on a fitting.
7 Hold down SHIFT and right-click in the drawing area, click Nearest.
8 Move your mouse over the header to display the osnap glyph (do not
click).
You are now tracking down the pipe.
9 Enter a distance to create the branch (for example: 48).
Place Valves | 473

10 Press ENTER to finish adding valves.
NOTE You can specify the center of a valve using the mid osnap.
Create Custom and Placeholder Parts

You can create and add parts to a pipe line that are not in the pipe spec.
Piping components that are not in the pipe spec are either custom parts or
placeholder parts. A custom part does not have a relationship with a pipe spec.
A placeholder part is added when the pipe spec is not complete.
In addition to direct placement, placeholder parts can be created during a spec
update if a part is orphaned from a spec. This occurs when an incompatible
change is made to the part size, or if the part is removed from the pipe spec.
There are three types of components that can be added to a pipe line:
■ Catalog part. A part that is added from a catalog to the pipe spec. Most
components are catalog parts.
■ Placeholder. An object that is temporarily used until the part is added to

the pipe spec. After the part is added to the pipe spec, you can use the
substitution grip to update it.
■ Custom part. A part that is not available in the catalogs, and will not be
added to the pipe spec. For example, a specialty item or instrument.
When an item is added to the pipe spec, the part’s geometry (parametric) is
copied from the catalog to the pipe spec. Custom and placeholder parts are
drawn with simplified geometry.

NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 does not provide for authoring parametric content
for catalog parts. Custom parts allow you to add a part that is not available in the
catalogs.
To create a custom part
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Custom Parts.
2 In the Custom Parts dialog box, click Custom Part (permanent).
3 In the Size list, click the size of the pipe the part attaches to (for example:
4).
4 In the Part class list, click the class (for example: Inline Instrument).
5 In the Part Display list, click the part shape (for example cylinder).
6 Under Part Geometry, enter the part dimensions (for example: D 6, L 12).
7 Click Place.
Create Custom and Placeholder Parts | 475

snap (for example: Nearest).
NOTE If the custom part is flanged, you can add a flange to the pipe before
attaching the custom part.
9 Click a pipe.
10 Click to specify a rotation or press ENTER for zero.
11 Press ENTER to finish adding custom parts.
To create a placeholder part
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Part Insertion panel ➤ Custom Parts.
2 In the Custom Parts dialog box, click Placeholder Part (temporary).
3 In the Size list, click a pipe size (for example: 6”) this part attaches to.
4 In the Part class list, click a part class (for example: Nipple).
5 In the Required from Spec list, click the pipe spec that needs this part
(for example: CS300).

6 Click Place.
snap (for example: Node).
8 Click to specify a point on the pipe line.

The placeholder part is connected to the pipe line.
Create Custom and Placeholder Parts | 477

9 Press ENTER to finish adding placeholder parts.
A glyph appears near placeholder part if plantplaceholderdisplay is on.
You can use the substitution grip after the catalog part is added to the
spec.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTCUSTOMPARTS
PLANTCUSTOMPARTSCLOSE
System Variables
PLANTPLACEHOLDERDISPLAY
Interface Reference
Custom Parts Window
Edit Placeholder Part Geometry dialog box
Assign Tags
You can assign tags in the 3D model similar to the way you tag in P&ID
drawings.
A tag is a unique identifier for a Plant object. In a 3D model, pipe, pipe fittings,
pipe supports, and equipment have a tag by default. You can add a tag to
structure.
Pipe and pipe fittings have a line number tag in addition to the tag that all
Plant objects can have. For more information about line numbers, see Set Line
Numbers on page 433.
Annotation is not supported for the Plant 3D object tags.
To tag a plant 3D object
1 In the drawing area, select one Plant 3D object.

4 In the Properties palette ➤ Plant 3D group ➤ Tag, click the [...] button.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTTAG
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Insulate Piping
You can add insulation to a pipe line by setting insulation properties and use
a display command to control insulation visibility.
You can assign insulation to a pipe line using Data Manager, or to individual
pipe components using the properties palette.
You can display or hide insulation using the plantinsulationdisplay

button on the ribbon.
To add insulation to a pipe
1 In the drawing area, select one or more pipe or fitting objects.
Insulate Piping | 479

4 In the Properties palette, click Plant 3D ➤ Process Line group ➤
Insulation Thickness.
5 In the Insulation Thickness box, enter the thickness.
6 In the Insulation Type box, enter the type.
7 NOTE You can also use Data Manager to assign insulation to Pipe Lines.
Quick Reference
Commands
No entries
System Variables
PLANTINSULATIONDISPLAY
Interface Reference
No entries
Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings

You can connect to the open port of pipe, pipe fittings, and equipment nozzles
that are in a referenced (xref) drawing. When you connect to an xref, fittings
and fasteners are added to the current drawing.
The xref drawing must be part of the current project. If the xref drawing is
not in your current project DWG folder you can link to it. It is not necessary
to copy the drawing first. For more information, see Link or Copy Files to the
Project Folders on page 243.
Xrefs must be inserted at the world coordinate origin (0,0,0), and cannot be
moved, scaled, or rotated.
If you select an xref, Continuation grips are not available. You can use a node
object snap to connect to the xref port.
Understand Detached Xref Connections

If a connection is broken because of changes made to the Xref, no attempt
made to reconnect. Fasteners that were used to connect to the separated port
are called orphaned fasteners.

When you first open a drawing that contains Xrefs, the drawing is checked
to determine if there are orphaned fasteners. With your permission, they are
removed. Orphaned fasteners can also be removed using
plantremoveorphanfasteners.
To connect to equipment in an Xref
1 If the xref is not already placed in the model, do the following:

■ On the ribbon, click Insert tab ➤ Reference pane ➤ Attach.
■ In the Select Reference File dialog box, browse to select a drawing file
that is in the current project.
■ Click Open.
■ Under Insertion Point, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.
■ In the X, Y and Z box, enter (0, 0, 0).
■ Under Scale, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.
■ In the X, Y and Z box, enter (1, 1, 1).
■ Under Rotation, clear the Specify On-screen checkbox.
■ In the Angle box, enter 0.
■ Click OK
4 In the drawing area, click to specify a point on an open port (pipe or

nozzle) on the xref.
Work with External Reference (Xref) Drawings | 481

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTREMOVEORPHANFASTENERS
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Copy Plant 3D objects

You can use the clipboard to copy and paste Plant 3D objects.
When you copy a Plant 3D object, the tag is assigned a question mark ( ? ). If
the object is a pipe component, the line number is set to Unassigned.
To connect to existing pipe, you must use a port location as your base point.
NOTE If the drawing is not in the current project, you can copy Plant 3D objects
only to the clipboard. You cannot modify or create Plant 3D objects in a drawing
that is not in the current project.
To paste a pipe component into an existing line
1 At the command prompt, enter copybase.
3 Click to specify a point on the pipe at a port (the port does not have to
be open).

4 In the drawing area, select the pipe components you want to copy.
5 Press ENTER to finish selection.
6 At the command prompt, enter pasteclip.
snap (for example: Near).
8 In the drawing area, click to specify a point at the new location.
Copy Plant 3D objects | 483

484
Create and Modify Pipe
Supports 11
You can create and connect pipe supports to pipe in a 3D model.
Isometric drawings and drawings exported to PCF file format for interference detection include
pipe supports.
Pipe supports include the following types:
■ Shoes
■ Hangers (with or without springs)
■ Trunnions, dummy legs
■ Pipe stanchions (with or without saddles)
■ Trapeze bars (with or without springs)
■ Ubolts
■ Pipe guides
■ Pipe clamps (including riser clamps)
■ Pipe rolls
You can customize pipe supports by attaching AutoCAD objects to a pipe support. If the
support type that you need is not included in the library, you can convert AutoCAD objects
into a custom pipe support type.
Add Pipe Supports

You can create and connect pipe supports to pipe or components in a 3D model.
485
You create 3D models of pipe supports from a parametric library, as you would
create 3D models of mechanical equipment.
When you connect pipe supports to pipe, the support orientation and size is
set from the pipe line. If you connect a support to sloped piping, the support
is oriented along the axis (not the pipe) to align precisely with a structure or
foundation.
A trapeze bar does not connect to a pipe line because it can support multiple
pipe lines.
NOTE Pipe supports connect to pipe when the support is created.
You can set pipe support dimensions for each type of support. The outside
diameter of pipe is used to set dimension default values.
If a pipe support contains variable dimensions (for example: shoe height or
hanger length), you specify those dimensions after selecting the insertion
point and orientation.
Understand Pipe Support Tagging

You can assign tags to pipe supports. Like other Plant 3D objects, pipe supports
are displayed in the Data Manager.
Pipe support position and type are included in a PCF export, which allows
pipe supports to be included with the pipe line in isometric drawings, for
model stress analysis, and for design checking.
To add pipe supports
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Create.
2 In the drawing area, select a pipe or pipe component object.
3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click a support
type (for example: Slide ➤ Clamped Slide 1).
Default support dimensions are provided based on outside diameter.
4 Click Insert.
5 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click an object
486 | Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports

6 Click a pipe.
7 If the support type requires a rotation, do one of the following:

■ Press ENTER to indicate zero rotation.
■ Click to indicate a rotation.
8 Press ENTER to finish adding pipe supports.
To add a dummy leg support
Add Pipe Supports | 487

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe or pipe component object.
3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click Dummy
Leg ➤ Dummy Legs.
4 Click Insert.
5 Press and hold SHIFT. In the drawing area, right-click, click Node.
6 Click to specify an Elbow connection point.
7 Press ENTER to finish adding dummy legs.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIPESUPPORTADD
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Add Pipe Support Dialog Box
Modify Pipe Support Dimensions

Modify the dimensions of a pipe support in the 3D model.
You can change the dimensions of a pipe support after it has been created,
but you cannot change the pipe support type.
If you modify a support that has been customized, attached AutoCAD objects
are erased. You can first detach AutoCAD objects and reattach them after the
support has been modified.
To change pipe support dimensions
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Modify.
2 In the drawing area, select a pipe support object (for example: a Spring
Hanger).
3 In the Modify Pipe Support dialog box, modify a dimension (for example:
change height to 36).
Modify Pipe Support Dimensions | 489

4 Click OK.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIPESUPPORTMODIFY
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Modify Pipe Support Dialog Box
Edit Pipe Supports

You can copy, move, and erase pipe supports.
If you copy a pipe support, it adjusts to match the size of the pipe it is copied
to. If the pipe support is copied into space, it is disconnected.
You can move a pipe support from one pipe line to another.
If a pipe support is not attached to pipe, it displays a disconnect glyph.

NOTE Use grips to edit pipe and connected supports. If you use the AutoCAD
move command, pipe supports do not move unless pipe and supports are both
selected.
If pipe is moved using grips, connected pipe supports move with the pipe. If
pipe is erased, connected pipe supports are erased by default.
To move supports with pipe
1 In the drawing area, select a pipe object that has supports attached.
2 Click the Move Part grip.
3 Specify a new location for the pipe.

The pipe and pipe support move together.
Create Custom Supports

You can customize supports by attaching AutoCAD objects to a support. You
can also create a custom support type by converting AutoCAD objects into a
pipe support.
You can create a custom pipe support type such as a pick-up.

A custom pipe support type cannot contain other pipe supports, pipe, or pipe
components. Only AutoCAD objects can be converted into a custom pipe
support type. You can explode a pipe support to obtain AutoCAD objects from
a pipe support.
If you want to reuse a custom support you can add it to the tool palette.
To attach AutoCAD objects to a pipe support
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Attach Support.
Create Custom Supports | 491

2 In the drawing area, select a pipe support object (for example: a Simple
Support).
3 Select one or more AutoCAD objects to attach (for example: an AutoCAD

cylinder).
To detach AutoCAD objects from a pipe support
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Detach

Support.
2 In the drawing area, select a customized pipe support object.
To create a custom pipe support type
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Pipe Supports panel ➤ Convert

Support.
2 In the drawing area, select one or more AutoCAD objects.
4 Click a pipe or pipe component.

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPIPESUPPORTATTACH
PLANTPIPESUPPORTCONVERT
PLANTPIPESUPPORTDETACH
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Work with Sloped Piping

You can attach vertically aligned pipe supports to sloped piping.
Pipe supports that attach to a foundation or structure aligns in a precise

horizontal or vertical orientation when attached to sloped pipe.
To add pipe support to a sloped pipe
2 In the drawing area, select a pipe object that has a slope.
3 In the Add Pipe Support dialog box, in the drop-down list, click a support
type (for example: Dual Clamp Stanchion).
Work with Sloped Piping | 493

4 Click Insert.
6 Click a pipe.

■ Press ENTER to indicate zero rotation.
■ Click to indicate a rotation.
8 Press ENTER to finish adding pipe supports.

Control the Plant 3D Model
Display 12
You can change the display style to show realistic and wireframe visual styles. You can also
show or hide individual plant 3D objects.
Control the Visual Style of the Plant 3D Model

When you use a wireframe visual style, you generally configure display settings
that are different from those set for a realistic visual style. Configuring visual
style settings can benefit display appearance and performance.
Default display settings show isolines when using a wireframe visual style.
495
You can configure the wireframe visual style to display true silhouettes. If you
change back to a realistic visual style, you can turn off silhouettes to improve
display performance.
For more information, see Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects.
To turn on silhouettes for wireframe display
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visual Styles pane ➤ Visual Styles
Manager.
2 In the Visual Styles Manager palette, click Available Visual Styles in

Drawing ➤ 2D Wireframe.
3 In the Face Settings ➤ Draw True Silhouettes list, click Yes.
4 In the Countour Lines box, enter 0 (zero).
5 At the Command prompt, enter regen.
NOTE The 2D wireframe silhouette and isoline display settings also affect
the 3D wireframe settings.
Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects

You can set the visibility of all Plant 3D objects, including pipe, equipment,
and structure.
When you want to work without visual interference from other objects in
large drawings, you can hide Plant 3D objects.
NOTE Plant 3D visibility control is separate from AutoCAD layer visibility.
496 | Chapter 12 Control the Plant 3D Model Display

To hide Plant 3D objects
1 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects you want to hide.
2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visibility pane ➤ Hide.
To display only selected Plant 3D objects
1 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects you want to display.
2 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Visibility pane ➤ Hide Others.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTISOLATE
PLANTHIDE
PLANTSHOWALL
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Set Visibility of Plant 3D Objects | 497

498
Manage Data and Generate
Reports 13
You can use the Data Manager to view, edit, export, and import data and to generate reports.
Work with the Data Manager

You can view, modify, export, and import drawing and project data, and generate
reports using the Data Manager.
Using the Data Manager, you can export data for drawings and projects, modify
the data externally, and import it back into the Data Manager. You can export
data and reports to Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheets and comma-separated value
(CSV) files.
NOTE You can also export Plant 3D data to Piping Component Format (PCF) files.
By default, the Data Manager is docked in the drawing area. You can undock it
and float it, or anchor it to the top or bottom of the drawing area. You can also
make the Data Manager transparent or use auto-hide to conserve desktop space.
For more information about how to control the display of the Data Manager,
see Control the Display of the Drawing Space on page 293.
Understand Data Views

Data views in the Data Manager display hierarchically organized data for the
current drawing, project, or report. In the Data Manager drop-down list, you
can select various data views, including any customized views.
499
The following table outlines each data view:
View Purpose
Current Drawing Data Displays data for the current drawing.
P&ID Project Data Displays data for the current P&ID project.
Plant 3D Project Data Displays data or the current Plant 3D project.
Project Reports Displays project reports data.
Customized Displays customized views for drawings or projects.
Current Drawing and Project Data Views

In the Current Drawing Data view, the tree view shows data for the active
drawing grouped by nodes. Data for a selected node is displayed in the data
table.
The tree view for Current Drawing and Project Data views in Plant 3D is
organized differently than the tree view for P&ID drawings. For more
information about tree views and nodes, see Understand Tree Views and Nodes
in this section.
In Project Data view, data is organized and displayed as it is in the Current
Drawing Data view. You use Project Data view to view data for all drawings
in a project.
Project Reports View

In Project Reports view, the tree view lists the project report types that you
can use to generate reports. When you select a report, data for the report is
displayed in the data table based on the report definition.
500 | Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports

NOTE Check with your system administrator for more information about Plant
3D-specific reports.
Customized Views
In a customized view, the tree view lists the properties for each node of the
customized view (for example: Manufacturer, Model Number, and Supplier).
For more information about customizing views for P&ID drawings, see
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (P&ID) on page 53.
For more information about customizing views for Plant 3D drawings, see
Configure Customized Views for the Data Manager (Plant 3D) on page 150.
Understand Tree Views and Nodes

In a data view, you view data grouped by nodes for the active drawing or
project. Data for a selected node is displayed in the data table. By default, the
tree displays only nodes that have content, but you can choose to view all
nodes.
In P&ID drawings and projects, you view tree nodes grouped by object type
(class), with Engineering Items and Non-Engineering Items as the primary
nodes.
Work with the Data Manager | 501

In Plant 3D drawings and projects, you view tree nodes grouped by Area (a
physical area in a model), or by Object type. The default view grouping is
Area.
You can specify the Area property when you create a project drawing. Area
nodes include equipment, pipe lines, and structural members. For more
information about specifying the Area property, see Set Drawing Properties
on page 249.
For more information about displaying nodes, see Control the Display of the
Tree View on page 511.
To view current drawing data

To view P&ID project data
2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click P&ID Project Data.
To view Plant 3D project data
2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Plant 3D Project Data.
To view Project Reports
2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.
To select customized views in the Data Manager
2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate

customized view.
To turn Auto-hide on and off for the Data Manager
2 In the Data Manager, right-click the title bar. Click Auto-hide.
To make the Data Manager transparent
1 Make sure that hardware acceleration is disabled.
Work with the Data Manager | 503

NOTE For information about how to disable hardware acceleration, see To
Tune Performance Manually in the AutoCAD Help system.
3 In the Data Manager, right-click the title bar. Click Transparency.
4 In the Transparency dialog box, move the slider to specify the percentage
of transparency. Click OK.
To synchronize the Data Manager with symbols and annotations in a P&ID

drawing
■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Synchronize PID Symbols

and Annotations.
To refresh data in the Data Manager
■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Refresh.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects

You can zoom to a Plant 3D object in a drawing from the data table.

When you select a Plant 3D object in a drawing, the data record for the Plant
3D object is displayed and highlighted in the data table.
Using the Data Manager, you can also zoom to a Plant 3D object in a drawing
from its data table record.
You can zoom to a Plant 3D object by clicking the empty cell in the left column
that corresponds to the Plant 3D object. If you click a cell for a Plant 3D object
that is in an unopened drawing, the drawing opens and zooms to the Plant
3D object.
To locate a Plant 3D object in a drawing

■ To locate a record in the Data Manager, on the Data Manager toolbar,
click Show Selected Items. Click the Plant 3D object in the drawing
area.
■ To locate a Plant 3D object in the drawing area, on the Data Manager

toolbar, click Show All Items. Click the row header of the record in
the data table.
To turn persistent zoom on or off
2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the appropriate data
view.
3 In the tree view, click the node you want to display.
4 On the toolbar, click Turn Zoom Toggle On or Zoom Toggle Off.
NOTE To zoom to multiple Plant 3D objects, press and hold the CTRL key when
clicking the appropriate cells in the Zoom column of the data table.
Zoom To and Scroll To Plant 3D Objects | 505

To display a record in the data table by selecting an item in a drawing
view.
3 On the toolbar, click Show Selected Items so that it is toggled on.
4 In the drawing, click a Plant 3D object.
NOTE The data for the selected Plant 3D object is displayed at the top of
the data table. If the selected item was filtered out by a current filter, the filter
is removed.
To scroll through records in the data table
view.
4 At the bottom of the data table, click the left and right arrows to scroll
through the records.
NOTE You can scroll to the first or last record by clicking the arrow buttons
with vertical lines.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager

You can edit properties in the Data Manager by updating the data table.
You can update multiple cells simultaneously and copy and paste data from
one cell to another or from other programs. In the data table, read-only cells
are displayed with a shaded background and cannot be edited.
When you try to edit data for a Plant 3D object in a drawing that is not
currently open, the drawing opens. Read-only drawings do not open when
you attempt to edit properties.
To edit data for a Plant 3D object that spans more than one drawing, all the
drawings that contain the Plant 3D object must be editable. If drawings are
read-only, you cannot change the data.
To edit a property by entering a value
view.
4 In the data table, click in the cell of the property to edit. If the property
is in Acquire mode, click the yellow icon in the cell and click Override
mode on the list.
5 Enter a new value in the cell.
Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager | 507

NOTE A pencil icon in the row marker indicates that the record is in edit
mode.
6 Press ENTER or click in another cell to commit the new value.
To edit a property by selecting a listed value
view.
4 In the data table, click the cell of the property to edit. If the property is
in Acquire mode, click the yellow icon in the cell and click Override mode
in the list.
5 Click the arrow to display the list.
6 Click a value on the list.
7 Press ENTER or click in another cell to commit the new value.
To edit a property by copying and pasting
view.
4 In the data table, right-click the cell that contains the value you want to
copy. Click Copy.
NOTE It is recommended that you copy values from only one column at a
time.
5 Click one or more cells where you want to paste the value.

NOTE To select more than one cell, press and hold the CTRL key while clicking
the cells.
6 Right-click and click Paste.
To clear a cell value
view.
4 In the data table, click one or more cells where you want to clear the
value.
NOTE To select more than one cell, press and hold the CTRL key while clicking
the cells.
5 Press DELETE.
Edit Data Properties in the Data Manager | 509

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Place Annotations in a P&ID Drawing from the Data

Manager
You can place annotations in a P&ID drawing by dragging a cell value from
the data table.
When placing annotation text in a drawing, a temporary line connects the
annotation text to the P&ID object. Annotations you place by dragging cell
values from the Data Manager are linked annotations. When you move a P&ID
object with a linked annotation, the annotation moves with it. When you
change annotation data in the data table, the annotations in the drawing are
updated accordingly.
You can convert a linked annotation into a freestanding annotation.
Freestanding annotations do not move with P&ID objects.
Annotations you add to a drawing using the Data Manager inherit the default
AutoCAD text style. You can change the text style of annotations by changing
the AutoCAD text style; however you cannot edit annotations with AutoCAD
text editing commands.
NOTE You cannot place annotations in Plant 3D drawings from the Data Manager.
To place linked annotations in a P&ID drawing from the Data Manager
view.

4 Click the cell you want to use to annotate the P&ID object and drag it
from the data table to the drawing area.
5 Release the button and click the drawing area where you want to place
the annotation.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager

You can use filters and sorting to organize the data you view in the Data
Manager.
You can filter and sort data, and manipulate the order and display of the
columns in the Data Manager.
Control the Display of the Tree View

You can specify the nodes displayed in the tree view.
By default, the tree view shows only nodes with content in the current drawing
or project. You can change this setting to show all nodes.
NOTE When the tree view is displayed by area (the Plant 3D default), you can
view only nodes with content.
Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager | 511

To show all nodes or only nodes with content
view.
3 In the tree view, right-click a node. Click Show All Nodes or Show Only
Nodes with Content.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Filter Information in the Data Table

In the data table, you can select the information you view by applying filters.
You can view all items or only selected items, or filter the data based on specific
field values or value ranges. You view only records for Plant 3D objects selected

in the drawing. Selections you make in the drawing determine what is
displayed in the Data Manager.
Filters apply to each view, each user, and each AutoCAD Plant 3D session, so
when you switch views or open a new drawing, your filters are saved. You can
easily remove or apply filters to any view, or apply multiple filters
simultaneously.
To view only items selected in the data table
view.
3 In the tree, click the node you want to display.
4 In the data table, right-click a cell that contains the value whose data
you want to filter. Click Filter By Selection.
To view all items except items selected in the data table
view.
4 In the data table, right-click a cell that contains the value you want to
exclude from the filtered view. Click Filter Excluding Selection.
To filter by field values and ranges of values
view.

4 In the data table, right-click a cell for the property where you want to set
a filter.
5 In the Filter For box, enter a value for the filter. You can use the following
conditions individually or concurrently:
NOTE Surround a string entry with single quotation marks (‘). Entries are
case-sensitive.
Conditions (can be Purpose Examples

used cumulatively)
containing strings
other than 700
with cell data not
equal to an empty
ing rows with empty
cells
cified string

string Bosch

cells empty cells

data
Question mark (?) to display any single LIKE ‘SCH?0’ displays

and so on

6 Press ENTER.
To view data for selected Plant 3D objects in the drawing
2 In the drawing, select the Plant 3D objects whose data you want to view.
3 In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Show Selected Items.
To remove all filters in the current data view
view.
3 In the data table, click a cell.
4 Click Remove Filter.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Sort Records in the Data Table

You can sort data by column in the data table. A small arrow in the column
header indicates the current sort order.
When you view records in the data table, you can freeze columns so they do
not move when you scroll the data table. You can also hide columns that have
no data.
To sort columns in ascending or descending order
view.
4 In the data table, click a column header to change the sort order.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Control the Display of Columns in the Data Table

You can control the display and order of columns in the data table.
You can arrange column order to reduce the amount of scrolling required to
view or edit values in the data table. You can also freeze columns so they do
not move as you scroll in the data table, or hide columns you do not want to
view.
The display and order of columns in the data table for any data view are saved
to a project-specific Data Manager Settings (DMS) file.
After the display or order of the columns for a project is set, a file with the
name <project name>.dms is created in the following folder: \Documents and
Settings\<user profile>\Application Data\Autodesk\<product name>\<product
version>\<language>\Support\PnPProjects. The variable <project name> is the
name of the project file that is opened in the Project Manager.
To freeze a column in the data table
view.
4 In the data table, right-click the header of the column to freeze. Click
Freeze.

NOTE When you freeze a column, the column and all columns to the left of
it in the data table hold their position when scrolling. You can unfreeze a
column by right-clicking its header and clicking Unfreeze.
To hide or show a column in the data table
view.
4 In the data table, right-click the header of the column to hide. Click Hide.
5 To display hidden columns, right-click any column header and click

Unhide.
To resize a column in the data table
view.
4 In the data table column header, place your cursor over the separation
line between two columns.
5 Drag the separation line to change the column width.
To rearrange column order in the data table
view.

4 In the data table, click the column header of the column to move and
drag it right or left to a new location.
NOTE When you close AutoCAD Plant 3D, the column order you specify in
this procedure is written to the <project name>.dms file, which is saved in the
PnPProjects folder. The PnPProjects folder is located under the folder
\Documents and Settings\<user profile>\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD
Plant 3D 2010\<product version>\<language>\Support.
To copy column order for a project on another workstation
1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the following folder: \Documents and

Settings\<user profile>\Application Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Plant 3D
2010\<product version>\language\Support\PnPProjects.
2 Locate the file <project name>.dms and copy it to a shared folder on the
network.
3 In Windows Explorer, on the workstation where you want to copy the

column order, browse to the shared network folder and copy the file.
4 On the workstation where you want to copy the column order, browse
to the following folder: \Documents and Settings\<user profile>\Application
Data\Autodesk\AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010\<product
version>\<language>\Support\PnPProjects. Paste the <project name>.dms file
into the folder.
To revert to the default data table column order
view.
3 In the tree view, right-click a node whose data table column order you
want to reset, and do one of the following:
■ To reset the data table column order for only a selected node, click
Reset Node Column Order.
■ To reset the data table column order for a selected node and all child
nodes, click Reset All Child Node Column Orders.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
View Read-Only Data and Property Acquisition Data

You can view read-only and acquisition data from the Data Manager.
Acquisition properties in Acquire mode are displayed with a gray background
in the data table. You can edit a property in Acquire mode by changing it to
Override mode. For more information about Acquire and Override modes, see
Set Up Property Acquisition (P&ID) on page 90.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Print Data from the Data Manager

You can print the data displayed in the Data Manager.
To print Plant 3D object data from the Data Manager
view.
4 On the toolbar, click Print.
5 In the Print dialog box, specify the printer and other print settings. Click
OK.
Print Data from the Data Manager | 521

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Export and Import Data in the Data Manager

You can export Plant 3D object data for projects and drawings, modify the
data externally, and import it into the Data Manager.
Export Data from the Data Manager

You can export data to a Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheet, to a comma-separated
values (CSV) file, or to a Piping Component Format (PCF) file.
NOTE You cannot use import or export custom settings when importing or
exporting in Area view.
Export Active Node and Child Nodes

You can export data for the active node and all child nodes under it, or for
the active node only. If you include all child nodes, you export a spreadsheet
that contains a worksheet for each node, or a CSV file for each node. If you
include only the active node, you export a spreadsheet with a single worksheet,
or a single CSV file.

For example: if the Engineering Items node is active, and you export the active
node and all child nodes to a spreadsheet, the spreadsheet contains a separate
worksheet for each node.
View Exported Data

When you export the current data table, the resulting file includes all columns
and rows displayed in the Data Manager. An exported file does not include
hidden columns and rows.
Read-only columns in the data table are write-protected in the exported
spreadsheet. The exception to this rule is that properties in Acquire mode can
be edited in an exported file.
Each worksheet or CSV file contains a row for each Plant 3D object and a
column for each property, such as PnPID number, description, and
manufacturer.
Export Data from the Data Manager | 523

Name Exported Files
You can specify a name for an exported file, or accept the name that the
program suggests. The following default file name structures vary by file type
and by data table settings in the Data Manager.
File Type Project Data View Drawing Data View
Spread- ProjectName-ActiveNodeName.xls DrawingName-ActiveNode-

sheet (or .xlsx) Name.xls (or .xlsx)
CSV File ProjectName-ActiveNode- DrawingName-ActiveNode-

Name-ChildNodeName.csv Name-ChildNodeName.csv
In an exported spreadsheet, worksheet names are derived from the display

names of the nodes being exported. The column headings are derived from
the display names of the column headings (properties) in the data table. If
the display name is longer than 31 characters, the node name is used to name
the worksheet.
NOTE To ensure successful export and import, it is recommended that project

administrators use node names that are no longer than 31 characters.
To export Plant 3D object data
view.
3 In the tree view, click the node to export.
4 On the toolbar, click Export.

5 In the Export Data dialog box, in the Select Export Settings list, click
Displayed Data or a custom setting.
NOTE Only Displayed Data is available for area or customized views.
6 Under Include Child Nodes, click the appropriate option to include the
active node and all child nodes, or the active node only.
7 Under Enter File Name and Location for Exported Data, do one of the
following:
■ To use the default file path and file name, click OK and go to step 9.
■ To select a different file path or file name, click Browse.
Export Data from the Data Manager | 525

8 In the Export To dialog box, do the following:
■ Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported files.
■ In the File Name box, enter a file name or use the default file name
provided.
■ In the Files of Type box, select the file format for the exported files:
CSV, XLSX, or XLS (the default).
■ Click Save.
9 In the Export Data dialog box, click OK.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Export To Piping Component Format (PCF)

You can export to PCF format from the Data Manager.
If the Data Manager tree is ordered by area, you can export line number node
data to PCF files for use in third-party applications.
To export to a PCF file.
2 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click the drawing or project
data view.
3 In the tree view, right-click a line number node. Click Export To PCF.
4 In the Save PCF As dialog box, do the following:

■ Navigate to the appropriate folder to save the file.
■ In the File Name box, enter a file name or accept the default file name
for the file.
■ Click Save.
Export To Piping Component Format (PCF) | 527

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Modify Exported Data

You can add and modify data in an exported Microsoft®Excel®spreadsheet or
a comma-separated value (CSV) and import it back into the Data Manager.
Modify Exported Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets

In Excel, you modify the worksheet that corresponds to the active node where
you plan to import the spreadsheet. If you edit a worksheet that represents a
child node, the import process ignores your changes.
For example, you export the Engineering Items node and choose to include
all child nodes. The exported spreadsheet contains multiple worksheets:
Equipment, Tanks, Vessel, Pumps, and so on. If you plan to import the data
at the Engineering Items level, you modify only the EngineeringItems
worksheet.
It is important not to modify the names of worksheets in an exported Microsoft

Excel spreadsheet. The import process uses worksheet names to identify a
match with data in the Data Manager.

Modify Exported CSV Files
When you include child nodes in an export to CSV, you create multiple CSV
files. You can edit data in the CSV files for import back into the Data manager.
Understand Read-Only Exported Data

Some properties, such as PnPID, are read-only in the Data Manager. These
read-only properties are also write-protected in an exported Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet. While it is possible to edit read-only data in a CSV file, a
subsequent import ignores these changes.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Import Data to the Data Manager

You can import data from a Microsoft®Excel®spreadsheet or a comma-separated
value (CSV) file to the current data table.
Determine the Node to Import

When you import a worksheet or CSV file, you import data for the currently
active node. Select the node that corresponds to the worksheet or CSV file
containing the data you want to import.
Import Data to the Data Manager | 529

For example, you export the Engineering Items node and include all child
nodes. In the resulting spreadsheet, you enter data only in the Equipment
node. Before importing data, you select the Equipment node to make it active
and to import the correct data.
If you select a node that does not correspond directly to the modified
worksheet or CSV file, the import ignores the changes.
If you change more than one exported worksheet or CSV file, you import each
modified node individually. Generally, it is more efficient to edit a worksheet
or CSV file that contains all the nodes you plan to edit. You can then import
the files at that node level.
Select Import Settings

When you import data, you can accept the default import setting or select a
custom setting. The default setting is Displayed Data, which is the data
currently displayed in the Data Manager.
NOTE You cannot use import or export custom settings when importing or
exporting in Area view.
When a custom setting is configured in Project Setup for this purpose, you
can import data from another program. Select this custom setting during
import.
Accept and Reject Edits

After you import data, the Data Manager displays modified properties in yellow
highlighting.
You accept or reject edits using the Accept and Reject buttons on the toolbar.
You can accept or reject edits all at once, or individually.

AutoCAD Plant 3D creates log files in My Documents (Windows XP) or
Documents (Windows Vista) folder under your Windows user profile.
These log files are based on the data that you accept or reject after importing
a spreadsheet or CSV file:
■ The log file ACCEPTED_<date>.log contains the imported data that you
accepted during the import.
■ The log file REJECTED_<date>.log contains the imported data that you
rejected.
The variable <date> in the file name indicates the date when you accepted or
rejected the imported data. For example, the file name
ACCEPTED_10-16-2007.log contains a record for each accepted edit from an
import on October 16, 2007.
NOTE You cannot import a spreadsheet exported from an earlier version of

AutoCAD Plant 3D. First, migrate the project or drawing to AutoCAD Plant 3D.
You can then export and import data as needed. For more information about
migrating project data, see Migrate Projects and Drawings on page 575.
Import Modified Acquisition Properties

Properties in Acquire mode appear gray in the Data Manager. You can edit
these properties in an exported spreadsheet or CSV file, import the modified
data, and accept or reject each edit. If you accept a change to an acquired
property, the property adopts the new value and changes from Acquire mode
to Override mode. For more information about Acquire Mode and Override
Mode, see Understand Acquire Mode and Override Mode on page 92.
To import Plant 3D object data from Excel
view.
3 In the tree view, click the node where you want to import data.
NOTE Make sure to select the node that corresponds to the worksheet or
CSV file containing the data you want to import.

4 On the toolbar, click Import.
5 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message is displayed, click OK.
NOTE The message indicates the location of the log files for accepted and
rejected edits from the imported spreadsheet or CSV file. You can click the
link in the message to open the folder. After you accept and reject edits, you
can access the log file in the folder.
6 In the Import From dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Files of Type list, click the type of files to display (XLS, XLSX,
or CSV).
■ Navigate to and select the spreadsheet or CSV file you want to import.
■ Click Open.
7 In the Import Data dialog box, do the following:

■ To select a different file to import, click Browse. Repeat step 6.
■ In the Select Import Settings list, click Displayed Data or a custom

setting.

NOTE To import data from another program, click the appropriate custom
setting. (Custom settings are unavailable, however, if you are importing
into an area or customized view.)
■ Click OK.
To accept or reject changes in imported data
1 In the Data Manager tree view, click the node that contains the imported
changes.
2 Review the imported data in the data table.
NOTE Pending changes are displayed with yellow highlighting.
■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Accept or

Reject to accept or reject changes one at a time.

■ In the Data Manager, on the toolbar, click Accept All
or Reject All to accept or reject all changes at once.
NOTE Switching data views or closing the Data Manager during this process
causes you to lose all changes that you have not yet accepted or rejected. If you
lose changes during this process, repeat the import procedure to finish accepting
and rejecting imported changes.
To view the accepted or rejected logs from imported data
1 Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the My Documents (Windows

XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder.
2 Double-click the ACCEPTED_<date>.log or REJECTED_<dat>.log file.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Project Report Selection Dialog Box
Generate Reports in the Data Manager

The Data Manager provides several types of reports you can use to view and
present data.
You can view, print, and export reports that contain both P&ID and Plant 3D
data. You can export to Microsoft® Excel®, comma-separated value (CSV), or
PCF (Piping Component Format) files.
In the Project Reports data view, the tree view shows the reports available for
all drawings in the project, listed by report type.

The following table describes the default reports in Project Reports:
Report Contents
Control Valve List Data about control valves, the drawing

where they are located, the line number,
sizes, and so on.
Document Registry Data about drawings in the project.
Equipment List Equipment components and the drawing

where each component is located.
NOTE Your administrator can modify this

report to include AutoCAD Plant 3D data.
Instrument Index Data about instruments, the drawing

where they are located, and the object to
which they are connected.
Line List Data about piping segments grouped by

line number and the drawing where they
are located.
Line Summary List Data about the pipeline groups and the
drawing where they are located.

Nozzle List Data about nozzles, equipment, the draw-

ing where they are located, and the line
(segment and group) to which they are
connected, if any.
Generate Reports in the Data Manager | 535

Report Contents

report to include Plant 3D data.
Valve List Data about valves, the line segment, or

group where they are located, and the
drawing location.

The Project Reports data view includes the default report types and any custom
report types. Consult your system administrator about available customized
AutoCAD Plant 3D reports.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
View Data in Reports

All reports contain a column that lists the project with which the data is
associated.
When a Plant 3D object is present in more than one drawing, the report
contains a separate entry for each drawing that contains the Plant 3D object.
You can manipulate what you see in a report by filtering and sorting the report
data. For more information about filtering and sorting data in the Data
Manager, see Filter and Sort Data in the Data Manager on page 511.

To view data in a report

■ In the Project Manager, click Reports flyout ➤ Reports.
■ In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.
2 In the tree, expand the Project Reports node, if it is not already expanded.
3 Click the report node you want to view.
NOTE Project report types are preconfigured and cannot be modified.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Export Reports
You can export project reports from the Project Manager or the Data Manager.
Export Reports | 537

You can export one or more report types as a single report.
If you export to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, the report contains a separate
worksheet for each of the report types you export.
If you export to CSV files, you create a separate CSV file for each report type
you export.
To export a report

2 In the Data Manager tree view, do one of the following:

■ To export one report, click the report you want to export.
On the toolbar, click Export. Go to step 3.
■ To export multiple reports, click Project Reports.
On the toolbar, click Export. Go to step 4.
3 In the Export To dialog box, do the following:

■ Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported report file.
■ In the Files of Type list, select a file format for the report: XLS (the
default), XLSX, or CSV.
for the report.
■ Click Save.
4 In the Export Report Data dialog box, do the following:
Export Reports | 539

■ Under Reports, select one or more report types to include in the report.
■ Under Export File, review the default report name and file path.
Optionally, click Browse to specify a new file name or file path for
the report.
NOTE By default, AutoCAD Plant 3D exports reports to the My Documents

(Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder.
■ Click Export.
NOTE The Export button only becomes active when you select one or
more report types and have specified an export file.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Import Reports
You can import a project report from Microsoft® Excel® or comma-separated
value (CSV) files.
The file you import must use the same report template as the report into which
you are importing the report.
Import Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets

You can import a spreadsheet to the Project Reports node or to an individual
report node. If you import a spreadsheet to the Project Reports node, you
choose a worksheet to import. If you import a spreadsheet to an individual
report, the spreadsheet must contain a worksheet that matches the report.
Import CSV Files

If the report type of the imported CSV file does not match the report type
into which you are importing, the import ignores the content. For example,
you select a report type for a Valve List. If you import a CSV file containing
an Equipment List, the import ignores the Equipment List report because it
does not contain valve data.
Whether importing a spreadsheet or a CSV file, you can only import primary
table files back into AutoCAD Plant 3D. For example, a valve list can only
import data into the valve table; however, it cannot import cells from joined
tables.
To import a report from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet
1 In the Data Manager, in the drop-down list, click Project Reports.
Import Reports | 541

2 In the Project Reports tree view, click the Project Reports node, or click
the report where you want to import data.
4 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message is displayed, click OK. Otherwise, go

to the next step.
link in the message to open the folder containing the files. After you accept
and reject edits, you can access the log files in that folder.

■ In the Files of Type list, select the type of spreadsheet files to display
(XLS or XLSX).
■ Navigate to the location of the spreadsheet you want to import and

select it.
■ Click Open.
6 If you are importing data at the Project Reports level, the Project Report
Selection dialog box is displayed. In the Select Project Report to Import
list, select the report you want to import. Click OK.

NOTE Requested changes are displayed in yellow highlighting.
To import a report from a CSV file

2 In the Data Manager tree view, click the report node where you want to
import data.
4 If the AutoCAD Plant 3D message box is displayed, click OK. Otherwise,

go to the next step.
link in the message to open the folder containing the files. After you accept
and reject edits, you can access the log files in that folder.

■ In the Files of Type list, select CSV.
■ Navigate to the location of the CSV file you want to import and select
it.
■ Click Open.
Import Reports | 543

6 If you are importing data at the Project Reports level, the Project Reports
Selection dialog box is displayed. In the Select Project Report to Import
list, select the file that contains the report data you want to import. Click
OK.
To end the current import
■ Do one of the following:

■ In the Data Manager, right-click the active node. Click End Current
Import.
■ Close the Data Manager.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
DATAMANAGERCLOSE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports

You can review the changes to data made to an imported report. You can
accept or reject the requested changes.
View Pending Changes in a Drawing

In a drawing, you can graphically view each Plant 3D object that has pending
changes before you accept or reject the change. Simply click the row header
(the left column) of the Plant 3D object with the pending change in the Data
Manager.
Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports

From an imported report, modified values and their corresponding row headers
are displayed with yellow highlighting. You can accept or reject changes
individually or all at once.
When you accept all changes in the report and you encounter a problem with
a pending change, the acceptance process terminates. Reject the problem
change before you continue accepting or rejecting changes either individually
or all at once.
You cannot accept changes that are from read-only P&ID drawings; you can
only reject them. A tooltip shows the original value of a changed field when
you place the pointer over the field.
You can switch to Project Data or Drawing Data view during data reconciliation
for an imported report. When you switch back to Project Reports view, pending
Reconcile Changes To Imported Reports | 545

changes are still yellow and you can continue to accept or reject them. Until
you have reconciled all pending changes, you cannot edit any of the fields in
the report.
To accept or reject changes in an imported report
1 In the Data Manager tree view, select the imported report to view.

■ On the toolbar, click Accept or Reject to accept or reject specific
changes in the selected record.
■ On the toolbar, click Accept All or Reject All to accept or reject all
changes in a selected record.
NOTE If any files cannot be opened for editing, you are notified after all
other changes have been made.
To view the original value of a modified field
1 In the Data Manager tree view, select the report to view.
2 In the data table, place the cursor over the modified field to display the
original value.

Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
View Report Logs

When you accept or reject requested changes in imported reports, log files
store the changes you accept and reject.
When you accept or reject any changes made to reports, the program generates
the following log files:
■ ACCEPTED_date.log—a list of accepted changes
■ REJECTED_date.log—a list of rejected changes
The log files are tab-delineated files. Each line of the file displays a change.
The changed tag number, ID, and drawing are displayed with the file name,
date, and time of the report.
Log files do not overwrite previous log files; however, you can manually erase
them. In AutoCAD Plant 3D, log files are stored in the project directory with
the names ACCEPTED_date.log, and REJECTED_date.log. For example, the
accepted log file appears as follows, modifying the manufacturer and model
for Valve V1234.
Valve.Manufacturer=GOULD Valve.tagNo = V1234
Valve.GUID=03832qnjfa3 PID1.DWG V51PROJ.xls 6/6/2006
To view a report log
1 Navigate to the root directory of the appropriate project.
View Report Logs | 547

2 In the root directory folder, double-click ACCEPTED_date.log or
REJECTED_date.log to view the appropriate log file.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Print Reports
You can print reports in the Data Manager.
The data for the selected data view prints as a spreadsheet.
To print a report

2 In the Data Manager tree view, click the report you want to print.

3 On the toolbar, click Print.
Quick Reference
Commands
DATAMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Data Manager
Print Reports | 549

550
Generate Isometric
Drawings 14
With AutoCAD Plant 3D, you can create annotated and dimensioned isometric drawings
based on your 3D models.
Understand Isometric Types

AutoCAD Plant 3D includes three common isometric types, check, stress, and
final, from which you can create isometric drawings.
These isometric types differ from each other in the amount of detail included
and in the format in which the information is presented. You can also customize
the three isometric drawing types included with AutoCAD Plant 3D to create
other isometric types.
Check Isometrics
You create check isometric drawings to make sure that all necessary components
are represented in the model. A check isometric also confirms that the model
runs through Isogen without errors when it is time to produce the final
deliverable. The details in check isometric drawings facilitate comparison with
AutoCAD P&ID.
Stress Isometrics
Stress isometrics are drawings that convey geometric data pertinent to stress
checking. Typically, you create these isometrics only for pipelines requiring
stress analysis, such as high temperature lines, lines with large pipe sizes, critical
service lines, and in some cases, high pressure lines.
551
You can also create a piping component file (PCF) to run through a stress
analysis application or to create a loose drawing. The stress engineer uses this
drawing to analyze the stresses and loading on the pipeline.
Final Isometrics
Final isometrics are the key deliverable documents that you create from 3D
piping models. You typically produce final isometrics during the last stages
of a project. These drawings include a bill of materials (BOM) and become the
issued documents of record that are used for fabrication and construction.
Create Isogen Messages and Information Items

You can add notes and annotations to your piping model and include them
in a generated isometric drawing.
You can create Isogen messages with the option of including enclosures. You
can also place Isogen information items such as floor symbols, arrows, location
points on your drawing. You can edit or delete the contents of the messages
or information items.
Messages and information items are typically created while you engage in
other modeling tasks. For more information about creating models, see Create
and Modify a Plant 3D Model on page 367.
Create an Isogen Message

You can create an Isogen message of up to 75 characters in length. You can
preview the message before placing it on the piping model. The message is
displayed in the generated isometric drawing.
552 | Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings

You have the option of placing messages in the drawing without enclosures
or with the following enclosure options:
■ Round ended box
■ Rectangular box
■ Circular enclosure
■ Triangular enclosure
■ Diamond shaped enclosure
■ Double circle
■ Ellipse
■ B.I.P. identifier
To create an Isogen message
1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Isogen panel ➤ Isogen Message.
2 In the Create Isogen Message dialog box, Enclose Message In drop-down

list, click the message enclosure.
3 Enter the desired message text in the Message box.
4 To draw the dimension to message, select the Draw Dimension to Message

check box.
5 Click OK.
6 In the drawing area, click an insertion point on the center line of a pipe.
7 Press ENTER.
Create an Isogen Message | 553

Quick Reference
Commands
No entries
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Create Isogen Message Dialog Box
Create an Isogen Information Item

You can create Isogen information items such as floor symbols, flow arrows,
and break points, and then place them on your 3D model. The information
item is displayed on the generated isometric drawing.
To create an Isogen information item
1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Isogen panel ➤ Isogen Info.
2 In the Create Isogen Information dialog box, in the Select item type list,
click the item type you want to add to the model.
3 Click OK.
4 In the drawing area, click an insertion point on the center line of pipe.
5 Press ENTER.

Quick Reference
Commands
No entries
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Create Isogen Information Dialog Box
Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing

A quick isometric is a drawing you create to check lines in your drawings. You
can create a quick isometric for any isometric type.
You can check all or a few of the lines, either by selecting them from a list or
by selecting them in the drawing area. Because quick isometrics are not kept
as drawings of record, they do not become project documents accessible in
the project manager.
A designer often generates a quick stress isometric drawing to hand off to the
stress engineer.
To generate a quick isometric drawing
1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ Quick Iso.

■ In the drawing area, select the objects that you want to include in the
Quick Iso.
■ Press L for line list selection. Enter the line numbers you want to
include in the Quick Iso.
3 Press ENTER.
4 In the Create Quick Iso dialog box, Iso type list, click the iso type you
want to create.
5 To select a different output directory, under Output Directory, click the

[...] button and click a folder. click Open.
Generate a Quick Isometric Drawing | 555

6 Do any of the following:
■ To process components in the current drawing only, select the Process
Components in Current Drawing Only check box.
■ To create a DWF file, select the Create DWF check box.
■ To stop the isometric creation process when a line fails, select the If
a Line Fails to Process, Stop Iso Creation check box.
■ To overwrite previously generated isometric files for current isometric

type, click Options. In the Set Quick Iso Options dialog box, select
the Overwrite Previous Generated Iso Files check box. Click OK.
■ To specify fields that break the isometric, click Options. In the Set
Quick Iso Options dialog box, under Break the Iso When the Following
Fields Change, select check boxes for desired fields. Click OK.
7 Click Create.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTQUICKISO
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Set Quick Iso Options Dialog Box
Create Quick Iso Dialog Box
Generate a Production Isometric Drawing

You create a production isometric when you are ready to create the final
deliverable drawings for all lines in all drawings.
You can create any of the included (check, stress, and final) or customized
isometric drawing types as production isometrics. You have the options of
overwriting previously generated isometric files and creating a DWF file from
all isometrics created in the process.

To generate a production isometric drawing
1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ Production Iso.
2 In the Select Lines Dialog box, under Display Lines, click entire project
or current Drawing.
3 Under Filter Line Numbers, enter the lines numbers you want to filter
out of the selection set.
4 Under Select Lines, Create Isos From the Following Lines, select check
boxes that correspond to the lines you want to create the drawing from.
5 In the Create Production Iso dialog box, under Iso Type, click an iso type.
6 Under Output Settings, do any of the following:

■ To overwrite previously generated isometric files for current isometric
type, select the Overwrite Previous Generated Iso Files check box.
■ To create a DWF file, select the Create DWF check box.
■ To stop the isometric creation process when a line fails, select the If
a Line Fails to Process, Stop Iso Creation check box.
7 Click Create.
Generate a Production Isometric Drawing | 557

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPRODUCTIONISO
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Select Lines Dialog Box
Create Production Iso Dialog Box
Review Isometric Results Details

After you generate an isometric drawing, you review the creation details to
check for errors and warnings, and to verify the location and number of Piping
Component Files (PCF) created.
AutoCAD Plant 3D provides a notification after generation of each isometric
drawing has completed. You can review these results immediately after
generation or refer to the log file later.
By default, isometric drawings that are created are processed in the background,
so that you can return immediately to your drawing. While a job is being
processed in the background, you can check its status by placing the cursor
over the isometric icon on the right side of the status bar. You can also view
details about all completed isometric jobs that you have generated from the
current session.
Isometric details are saved in a log file for future reference. This file is located
in the Messages directory that corresponds to the iso type created. The log file
takes the default name Isogen Log File, appended with the date of creation.
For example: [Project Name]\Isogen\Final\Messages\Isogen Log
File_3-15-2009.log. You can use any any text editor, such as Microsoft Notepad,
to view the log file.
To review isometric results details
1 In the status tray, double-click the isometric icon.
2 In the Isometric Details dialog box, view details about completed isometric
jobs.

NOTE Only isometric details from the current session are accessible by clicking
the status tray icon. To view details from a prior session, review the isometric log
file.
To review an isometric log file
1 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the Messages directory that corresponds

to the iso type (check, stress, or final) used to created the isometric
drawing.
2 In the Windows Explorer selection box, right-click the log file and click
Open.
Quick Reference
Commands
No entries
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Isometric Details Dialog Box
Export a Piping Component File (PCF)

When you generate an isometric drawing, a Piping Component File (PCF) is
automatically created behind the scenes. You do not have to create one.
If you are not generating an Isometric drawing, you can still export a PCF if
you need one for the stress engineer or pipe fabricator.
The line number is the default file name for the exported PCF.
To export a PCF
1 On the ribbon, click Isos tab ➤ Create Iso ➤ PCF Export.
2 Right-click the line number you want to export. Click Export to PCF.
3 In the Save PCF As dialog box, do the following:

■ Navigate to and select a folder to store the exported PCF.
Export a Piping Component File (PCF) | 559

for the file.
4 Click Save.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTPCFEXPORT
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries

Generate Orthographic
Drawings 15
You can create orthographic drawings that show exact 2D representations of a 3D model.
Overview: Generate Orthographic Drawings

You can select Plant 3D models and create custom orthographic views to place
in an AutoCAD 2D drawing.
Orthographic drawings are AutoCAD DWG files. An orthographic drawing can
contain multiple orthographic views with data extracted from Plant 3D drawings.
Orthographic drawings display two-dimensional views of piping, valves,
equipment, and structural steel in Plant 3D models.
In an orthographic drawing, you can create multiple orthographic views from
one or more Plant 3D models.
You can copy orthographic drawings into a project or link to orthographic

drawings outside of a project.
561
You can set up a customized template for your orthographic drawings with a
title block, or you can use the default template. For more information about
creating templates, see “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing” in the
Understand Drawing References (Xrefs) and Overlaid Xrefs

Drawings that contain references to other drawings are available for
orthographic drawings. However, referenced drawings that are overlaid are
not available. For more information about overlaid drawings, see “Nest and
Overlay Referenced Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help system.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTORTHOCREATE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Select Reference Models Dialog Box
Select Orthographic View Dialog Box
Create an Orthographic Drawing

You can create orthographic drawings from one or more Plant 3D models.
When you create orthographic views, you create individual AutoCAD 2D
viewports based on specified views of a Plant 3D model. Then, you can add
them to an orthographic drawing.
A process overview for creating orthographic drawings is as follows (see the
procedure tab for detailed instructions):
■ Create or open a drawing in the orthographic paper space.
■ Select the Plant 3D model or models on which to base the orthographic

drawing.
■ Specify an area in the model to be displayed in the orthographic drawing.
562 | Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings

■ Set the scale and orthographic view.
■ Place the generated view on the orthographic drawing.
■ Create and place additional views in the orthographic drawing.
■ Annotate and add dimensions to Plant objects in the orthographic drawing.
Create an Orthographic View

Once you have specified the model to use, a temporary drawing containing
the model and the Orthocube is displayed.
You use the OrthoCube, a semi-transparent 3D box, to define the boundaries

of the orthographic view. The OrthoCube is the only editable object in the
temporary drawing.
You can use grips on the OrthoCube to adjust the dimensions and placement
of the OrthoCube. You can also specify the geometric dimensions of the
OrthoCube using the Properties palette. For more information about using
grips to modify 3D cubes, see “Use Grips to Edit 3D Solids and Surfaces” in
the AutoCAD Help system.
After you specify the placement and dimensions of the OrthoCube, you select
a standard orthographic view to create, and specify the scale. You can select
an orthographic view based on any of six sides of the OrthoCube. The standard
orthographic views are Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front, and Back.
You can save an orthographic view and load it in any Plant 3D model to
generate views of a consistent size.
Save an Orthographic View

When you have completed configuring the orthographic view, you place the
view onto your orthographic drawing. The views you save are project-specific
Create an Orthographic Drawing | 563

and stored in a filed named ortho.dcf. You can copy this file and reuse it in
other projects.
To create an orthographic drawing
1 In the Project Manager, click the Orthographic DWG tab.
2 In the tree view, expand the project node and click the Orthographic
Drawings folder.
3 On the Orthos toolbar, click New Ortho DWG.
4 In the New DWG dialog box, under Drawing Properties, do the following:
■ In the DWG Number box, enter a number for the drawing.
■ In the Author box, enter a name for the author.
■ In the DWG Title box, enter a title for the drawing.
■ In the File Name box, enter a name for the ortho drawing.
■ Click OK.
5 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ New View.
6 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, select
one or more models to use as a reference for the orthographic drawing.
Click OK.
NOTE Attached DWG references (xrefs), if any, are included in the temporary
drawing along with the models you select. However, overlaid xrefs are not
included.

7 If necessary, move the Select Orthographic View dialog box aside so you
can view the temporary drawing. Do the following:
■ (Optional) In the drawing, click the OrthoCube. Drag the size grips
on the edges of the OrthoCube to specify the boundaries and
placement of your view.
■ In the Orthographic View list, click a view (for example: Front).
■ (Optional) In the drawing, make further adjustments with the

OrthoCube as needed.

NOTE By default, the temporary drawing that is displayed is set to zoom in
on all elements currently in the drawing. The ViewCube is set to Top view
using WCS (world coordinate system).
8 Again in the Select Orthographic View dialog box, do the following:

■ In the Scale list, click a scale (for example: 1:16). If the scale you want
is not in this list, enter a scale at the command prompt when you
place the ortho drawing.
■ (Optional) Click Save to save the view. In the Save View dialog box,
enter a name for the orthographic view. Click OK.
■ Click OK.

9 In the orthographic drawing paper space, specify the position of the
lower-left corner of the viewport.
NOTE At the Command prompt, you can specify the scale of the viewport
before placing the viewport in the drawing. You can also specify the exact
coordinates for the drawing.
You can now annotate your orthographic drawing. For more information
about annotations, see Annotate an Orthographic Drawing on page 569.
To load a saved orthographic view
2 In the Orthos tree view, expand the project and the Orthographic
Drawings folder. Double-click an orthographic drawing.
4 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, click
Click OK.
5 In Select Orthographic View dialog box, click Load.
6 In the Load View dialog box, under View List, click the name of the view
you want to load. Click OK.
To rename a saved orthographic view
4 In the Select Reference Models dialog box, under Project Models, click
Click OK.
5 In Select Orthographic View dialog box, click Load.
6 In the Load View dialog box, under View List, double-click the name of
the orthographic view you want to rename. Type the new name and click
OK.

NOTE You can also rename an orthographic view in the Save View dialog
box.
Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTORTHOCREATE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Select Reference Models Dialog Box
Select Orthographic View Dialog Box
Link or Copy Orthographic Drawings to a Project

Using the Project Manager, you can either link or copy drawings to the project.
When you link a file to a project, the file is externally referenced from the
project. Any changes you make to the file are saved in the referenced file, and
no copy is stored in the project.
When you copy a file to a project, any changes you make to the file are saved
in the project. The original file is not modified or referenced after you make
a copy.
Linking is faster than copying, but either method can be used to add drawings
to a project. Select the method that best serves your project requirements.
To link an orthographic drawing to the current project
Drawings folder.
3 On the Orthos toolbar, click Link To Ortho DWG.

4 In the Select Drawings To Link To Project dialog box, locate and click the
drawing file you want to link to the current project. Click Open.
To copy an orthographic drawing to the current project
Drawings folder.
3 On the Orthos toolbar, click Copy Ortho DWG To Project.
4 In the Select Drawings To Copy To Project dialog box, locate and click
the drawing file you want to copy to the current project. Click Open.
Quick Reference
Commands
PROJECTMANAGER
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Project Manager
Annotate an Orthographic Drawing

You can select a Plant object in an orthographic drawing to annotate.
In an orthographic drawing, you can annotate valves, equipment, and
components as you can in any AutoCAD drawing. The annotation is based
on the AutoCAD default text style. For information about adjusting the style
of annotation text, see “Work with Annotative Styles” in the AutoCAD Help
system.
Annotate an Orthographic Drawing | 569

To add an annotation to an orthographic drawing
3 In the orthographic paper space, in an orthographic drawing, double-click

the viewport that contains the component you want to annotate.
4 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Orthos panel ➤ Plant Annotate.
5 In the drawing, click a component to annotate.
6 In the Specify Annotation Style list, click a value to specify the annotation
tag style.
7 Use the cursor to move the annotation in the drawing. Click to set the
annotation.
NOTE Polar Tracking restricts cursor movement to specified angles. To place

annotations at any angle from the component, click Polar Tracking on the
application status bar to free cursor movement.

Shortcut menu: Right-click an object in an orthographic drawing and click
Annotate.
Command entry: PLANTORTHOANNOTATE
To move an annotation in an orthographic drawing

the viewport that contains the Plant object annotation you want to move.
2 Click the annotation.
3 Drag the annotation to any location on the drawing using the move grip.
Annotate an Orthographic Drawing | 571

Quick Reference
Commands
PLANTORTHOANNOTATE
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing

You can add dimensions to a selected Plant object in an orthographic drawing.
In an orthographic drawing, you can add dimensions in the orthographic
viewports as you can in any AutoCAD drawing. For more information about
adding dimensions in drawings, see “Create Dimensions” in the AutoCAD
Help system.
To add a dimension to an orthographic drawing

the viewport that contains the component to which you want to add a
dimension.
4 On the ribbon, click Orthos tab ➤ Dimensions panel ➤ Dimension.
5 In the drawing, specify the first and second extension line origins or press
ENTER to select an object to dimension.
6 Use the cursor to move the dimension line in the drawing. Click to set
the dimension line.
Shortcut menu: Right-click an object in an orthographic drawing and click

Annotate.
Quick Reference
Commands
See “Create Dimensions” in the AutoCAD Help system.
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
No entries
Add Dimensions to an Orthographic Drawing | 573

574
Migrate Projects and
Drawings 16
Migrate projects and drawings created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID to ensure data
integrity with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
Overview: Migrate Projects and Drawings

When you open a project or drawing created in an earlier version of AutoCAD
P&ID, the project and drawing migration process starts automatically. AutoCAD
Plant 3D 2010 starts the Project Migration or Drawing Migration wizard when
it detects that a project or drawing requires migration.
During migration, the program updates project or drawing-level data. For
example, it changes point parameter names to support end-coded valves, or
adds To/From properties for pipe line segments.
Migration can be time-intensive, depending on how large a project is or how
many drawings are associated with the project. Once the migration is complete,
you can work on the project and its drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
NOTE You can migrate files created with AutoCAD P&ID 2008 and AutoCAD P&ID
2009 only. Migrate projects and drawings created in AutoCAD P&ID 2008 first to
AutoCAD P&ID 2009 before migrating to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
NOTE AutoCAD Plant 3D does not migrate user profiles, including custom tool
palette settings. Instead, you can save the user profile from an earlier version of
AutoCAD P&ID and import it to AutoCAD Plant 3D. For more information, see “Save
& Restore Interface Settings” in the AutoCAD Help system.
575
Verify Projects and Drawings
Before you open AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 to start migrating a project or
drawing, verify that the project and its related drawings are not in use.
You can migrate only those projects and drawings that are not already locked.
If a project or drawing is in use or if files are missing, the File Unavailable page
is displayed and lists the invalid files. Once you begin migration, other
designers cannot open the project or its associated drawings for editing until
migration is complete.
Use the version of the product that created the project or drawing to verify
that it is not in use. For example, if you used AutoCAD P&ID 2009 to create
the project you plan to migrate, open the project with that version.
After you open the project in AutoCAD P&ID 2009, you can view the Project
Manager to see if any of the related drawings are in use. If someone is editing
a drawing that is part of the project, the Locked Drawing icon is displayed in
the Project Manager. Save and close the drawing. Once you close all drawings,
make sure to close the entire project before exiting AutoCAD P&ID 2009.
Now you can safely proceed with migration.
Migrate Projects
Migrate projects created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID before opening
them with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
When you open a project created in an earlier version of AutoCAD P&ID, the
Project Migration wizard starts. It displays the Project Migration Launch dialog
box. During the migration process, you can back up the project and associated
drawings. A backup ensures that the project still opens in the earlier version
of AutoCAD P&ID. If you cancel the migration process, the project and its
related files return to their original state.
AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 makes the following changes when migrating a
project from AutoCAD P&ID 2009.
Project-level changes Description
Project version number Updates the project version number from

2009 to 2010
576 | Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings

When migrating a project from 2008 to 2009, the following changes are made.
Project version number Updates the project version number from

2008 to 2009.
Integrate Property Acquisition data Adds Property Acquisition rules and trig-
gers to the AutoCAD P&ID 2009 pro-
ject.xml file and renames the file as PnID-
Part.xml.
New project.xml file Creates a new project.xml file based on the

project.xml template in the install direct-
ory. The templates are crucial to the migra-
tion process.
Update of the ProcessPower.dcf file Makes the following changes to the Process-
Power.dcf file:
■ Changes the underlying database en-
gine to SQLite.
■ Adds new tables and columns to the
database to support AutoCAD Plant
3D 2010 features such as Acquisition
Properties.
■ Assigns a tag property to the
PipeLineGroup. The default value is
Line Number.
Replacement of ProcessPower.xsd and Pro- Replaces the ProcessPower.xsd and Process-

cessPower.xml Power.xml files with ProcessPower.dcfx.
Update to the projSymbolStyles.dwg and Scans all block definitions that have Attach-
each drawing associated with a project. mentPoint1 and AttachmentPoint2 in the
right to left (negative x-axis) direction or
in the up to down (negative y-axis) direc-
tion. Swaps the attachment points, if
present, so they are in the positive x or y-
axis direction.
This change in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 is
important because AttachmentPoint1 rep-
resents the inlet and AttachmentPoint2
Migrate Projects | 577

represents the outlet of blocks when attach-
ing and aligning them with schematic
lines.
Addition of the PnIDMigration.xml file Adds the PnIDMigration.xml file. Use this
file to replace AutoCAD P&ID 2009 blocks
with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 blocks
manually. Enter the block names that you
want to replace.
Understand Conversion to Acquisition Properties

When you take the interim step to migrate a project from AutoCAD P&ID
2008 to AutoCAD P&ID 2009 before migrating to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010,
the program converts some properties to acquisition properties.
In the following table, the Acquisition Property column shows the properties
that the migration process converts to acquisition properties. The Source
Property column displays the properties from which each acquisition property
acquires its value when the acquisition property is in Acquire mode.
HandValves.Size PipeLines.Size
HandValves.Spec PipeLines.Spec
InLineInstruments.Size PipeLines.Size
PipingSpecialtyItems.Size PipeLines.Size
PipingSpecialtyItems.Spec PipeLines.Spec
PipingFittings.Size PipeLines.Size
PipingFittings.Spec PipeLines.Spec
If a migrated property value from a project is equal to the corresponding source

property value, the property converts to an acquisition property in Acquire
mode. If the migrated property value is not equal to the corresponding source
property value, the property converts to an acquisition property in Override
mode.

NOTE To detect migration errors after you migrate a project, you can validate
the project drawings. In the Project Manager, right-click a migrated drawing and
click Validate.
To migrate a project
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.
2 In the Project Manager, in the drop-down list, click Open.
3 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the folder that contains the project
you want to migrate.
4 Click the project.xml file. Click Open.

The Project Migration wizard starts.
5 Verify that the project and its related drawing files are closed. On the
Project Migration Launch page, click Next.
6 If the File Unavailable page is displayed, your project has files that are
missing or currently in use . Find and close all project files. On

the File Unavailable page, click Exit and repeat steps 1-5.

7 To back up the files, on the File Available page, select Backup These Files
Before Migration (Recommended), if it is not already selected. To add
other files to the backup, click Add Files For Backup, find and select the
files you want to add, and click Open. (To remove an added file, click
Remove.)
NOTE It is recommended that you back up your files in case they require
further work in AutoCAD P&ID 2009.
8 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup files.
9 Click Next. The Project Migration Backup page shows the progress of the
backup and indicates whether it successfully backs up each file.

10 Click Migrate. The Project Migration Progress page indicates the progress
of the migration.

11 Click Finish. The project opens in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
Migrate Drawings
Migrate drawings created in earlier versions of AutoCAD P&ID before adding
them to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 projects.
When you attempt to add an AutoCAD P&ID 2009 drawing to a project you
created with AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010, the Drawing Migration wizard starts.
Migration occurs only for the drawing you are adding to the project. You can
create a backup during migration in case the drawing requires further editing
in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. If you cancel the drawing migration process, the
drawing returns to its original state.
AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 makes the following changes occur when migrating
a project from AutoCAD P&ID 2009.
Drawing-level changes Description
Drawing version number Updates the drawing version number from

2009 to 2010.
The following changes occur when migrating a project from AutoCAD P&ID
2008 to AutoCAD P&ID 2009 in preparation for migrating to AutoCAD Plant
3D 2010.
Drawing version number Updates the drawing version number from

2008 to 2009.
Update to inline instrument properties Applies property acquisition to valves and

other inline instruments so that they adopt
the properties of the schematic line with
which they are associated.
The properties of inline components are
overridden in favor of the schematic line
properties.
Update to AttachmentPoint1 and Attach- Scans all block definitions that have Attach-
mentPoint2 of all blocks in the drawing mentPoint1 and AttachmentPoint2 in the
right to left (negative x-axis) direction or
in the up to down (negative y-axis) direc-
tion. If present, the attachment points are

exchanged so that they are in the positive
x or y-axis direction.
This change in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 is
important because AttachmentPoint1 rep-
resents the inlet and AttachmentPoint2
represents the outlet of blocks when attach-
ing and aligning them with schematic
lines.
The migration process can change the way drawings look in AutoCAD Plant
3D. Part of the migration process updates the drawing with the symbols and
settings of the new project. The drawing may appear different due to changes
in AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 symbols and settings.
NOTE If you try to migrate a drawing that has the same file name as a drawing
in the current project, a naming conflict message is displayed. You can either
migrate the drawing with an assigned new name or stop migration.
NOTE To detect migration errors after you migrate a project, you can validate
the project drawings. In the Project Manager, right-click a migrated drawing and
click Validate.
To migrate a drawing by linking it to the current project
1 If the Project Manager is not already displayed, on the ribbon, click Home
tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.
2 In the Project manager, in the toolbar, click Link to Drawing.
3 In the Select Drawings to Link to Project dialog box, navigate to the folder
that contains the drawing you want to migrate.
4 Click the drawing file. Click Open.

The Drawing Migration wizard starts.
Migrate Drawings | 583

5 Verify that the drawing file is closed.
6 On the Drawing Migration Launch page, select Backup the Drawing Before
Migration (Recommended), if it is not already selected.
NOTE It is recommended that you back up your drawing in case it requires

7 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup file.
8 Click Migrate. The Drawing Migration Progress page indicates the progress
of the migration.

9 Click Finish. The drawing opens in your AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 project.
To migrate a drawing by copying it to the current project
1 If the Project Manager is not already displayed, on the ribbon, click Home
tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager.
2 In the Project manager, in the toolbar, click Copy Drawing to Project.
3 In the Select Drawings to Copy to Project dialog box, navigate to the

folder that contains the drawing you want to migrate.
4 Click the drawing file. Click Open.

The Drawing Migration wizard starts.
Migrate Drawings | 585

5 Verify that the drawing file is closed.
6 On the Drawing Migration Launch page, select Backup the Drawing Before
Migration (Recommended), if it is not already selected.
NOTE It is recommended that you back up your drawing in case it requires

7 Click Browse and specify a location to store the backup file.
8 Click Migrate. The Drawing Migration Progress page indicates the progress
of the migration.

9 Click Finish. The drawing opens in your AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 project.
Resolve Migration Failure

Project and drawing migration failure can occur for several reasons.
The following table contains some common migration failure scenarios and
their resolutions.
Failure scenario Resolution
Files are in use If a designer is editing a drawing that is

part of the project you want to migrate,
AutoCAD Plant 3D cannot place a lock on
that file. The File Unavailable dialog box
lists files in use with the following status
symbol:
Resolve this situation by making sure that
no one is editing the drawing. Restart the
migration process to lock the offending file
so migration can proceed.
Resolve Migration Failure | 587

Missing files If a file residing in your project folder is re-

named or moved to another folder, the
Migration wizard is unable to lock it. The
file is no longer associated with the project
and the migration fails.
Missing files are displayed in the File Un-
available dialog box.
The File Unavailable dialog box lists files
that are missing with the following status
symbol:
Resolve this problem by renaming a mis-
named file with its original name or by
adding a drawing with the new name back
to the project in AutoCAD P&ID 2009. If
the File Unavailable dialog box lists missing
files, find and move them back to the pro-
ject folder.
Migrating an AutoCAD Plant 3D 2008 You cannot directly migrate projects and
project or drawing drawings created in AutoCAD P&ID 2008
to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
Resolve this problem by migrating the
project or drawing first to AutoCAD P&ID
2009. When that migration is complete,
save the project or drawing and migrate it
to AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
Platform incompatibility AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010 is available in 32-

bit and 64-bit versions. AutoCAD P&ID
2009 was available in both 32-bit and 64-
bit versions, but cross migration does not
work. Direct file migration from AutoCAD
P&ID 2008 can only be achieved between
32-bit versions. AutoCAD P&ID 2008 was
only available in a 32-bit version.
You cannot migrate an AutoCAD P&ID
2008 project or drawing to a 64-bit install-
ation of AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
Resolve this problem by first migrating the
AutoCAD P&ID 2008 project or drawing

to the 32-bit version of AutoCAD Plant 3D
2010. After you save the file, you can edit
the project or drawing in either platform
version of AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010.
Resolve Migration Failure | 589

590
Validate P&ID Drawings
17
Make sure that your project drawing complies with company standards by validating your
drawing regularly.
Overview: Validate P&ID Drawings

Validate your drawing and complete the Validation Summary to correct or flag
detected errors.
Running the validation process for your P&ID project ensures that project
drawings comply with industry or company standards. Use the validation tool
in AutoCAD P&ID to detect errors as you work rather than waiting until late in
a project cycle, when mistakes are more costly and difficult to resolve.
For each project, you specify the types of errors that are flagged when you run
a validation. After running a validation, you can correct or ignore the detected
errors.
NOTE For information about validating a 3D model against a P&ID drawing, see
Validate the 3D Model on page 359.
Validate Project Drawings

You can run validations for an individual drawing, several drawings, or all
project drawings at any stage of a project.
Understand the Drawing Validation Process

The validation process is as follows:
■ You run validations for individual drawings or for an entire project.
591
■ In the Validation Summary window, you click each error to zoom in to
drawing the area you need to check. The description at the bottom of the
window helps to identify the problem.
Understand Validation Settings

You can configure validation settings to check for potential errors. For example,
you can check for the following conditions in a drawing or project:
■ Size mismatches
■ Spec mismatches
■ Non-terminating lines
■ Unconnected components
■ Flow direction conflicts
■ Orphaned annotations
■ Unresolved off-page connectors
■ The presence of base AutoCAD objects, which can be misinterpreted as

P&ID objects in plotted output
Before changing these settings, ask your system administrator what the
standards are for your company.
To specify error types to flag
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate Config.
2 In the P&ID Validation Settings dialog box, in the Error Reporting tree,
expand the P&ID objects and Base AutoCAD objects nodes. Select the
check boxes for the error types to be flagged during project validation.
3 Click OK.
Command entry: VALIDATECONFIG
To validate project drawings

■ To validate a specific drawing or all the drawings in a specific folder,
in the tree view, click the drawing or the drawing folder. On the
ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate.
592 | Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings

■ To validate all the drawings in a project folder, in the tree view, click
the project folder. On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel
➤ Validate.
The Validation Progress dialog box is displayed.
NOTE The Validation Progress dialog box displays the validation progress
for each drawing being checked for errors and overall progress for all the
drawings being validated in the current session (n of n format).
2 When the Validation Progress dialog box closes, do one of the following:
■ If none of the drawings have validation errors, the Validation
Complete message is displayed. Click OK.
The drawings are validated and the validation process is complete.

■ If there are errors in one or more drawings, the Validation Summary
Window is displayed. The validated drawings are displayed in the tree
view. In the Validation Summary window, the Details pane displays
the following information about the validation:
■ Number of errors identified
■ Number of errors ignored
■ Total number of errors
Go to the next step.
3 To see information about each error, in the Validation Summary tree,

click an error node. The drawing zooms in on the problem object. The
Details pane displays the following information about the error:
■ Error type
■ Error action
NOTE For some errors, the Details pane displays additional error-specific
information. For information about the Details pane, see Validation Summary
Window.
Command entry: VALIDATE

For information about correcting specific types of errors, see Correct Validation
Errors on page 594.
Validate Project Drawings | 593

Quick Reference
Commands
VALIDATE
VALIDATECONFIG
VALIDATESUMMARY
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference
Correct Validation Errors

Address the errors that are identified during the validation process.
After you validate the drawings in a project, the Validation Summary window
is displayed, with a list of flagged errors. Errors are identified by the following
symbol:
To zoom in to specific errors, click the name of the error. The Details area
displays information about the error and its status.
You can ignore the error or fix it manually. Errors flagged as Ignored can be
hidden by changing the setting in the Validation Summary window.

NOTE For information about validating a 3D model against a P&ID drawing, see
Validate the 3D Model on page 359.
Error Validation Reference

When you validate a drawing or project, you can flag and correct the following
errors.
Base AutoCAD Object

Example:
Description: An AutoCAD object or block (instead of an AutoCAD P&ID compon-

ent) has been inserted in the drawing. Such blocks do not show up
in reports or in the Data Manager, even though they may look like
a P&ID component.
To Correct: ■ Erase the object.


Size Mismatch
Example:
Description: The size of a line and its associated component do not match. This
condition is usually caused by manual changes to the component
properties.
To Correct: ■ Manually fix Size Mismatch errors. You must change the size of
either the line or its associated component at the connection
point so that they match.
Spec Mismatch
Example:
Description: The specification properties (details such as the component material)

for lines and inline components do not match. This condition is
usually caused by manual changes to the properties.

To Correct: ■ Manually fix Spec Mismatch errors. To correct the problem,
change the specification property of either the line or its associ-
ated component so that they match.
Non-terminating Line
Example:
Description: Process lines do not terminate through a connection to an endline

component, or do not end with an endline symbol signifying an air
vent, water outline, drain, or other valid terminator.
To Correct: ■ Create a connection with another line or component.


Unconnected Component
Example:
Description: No true connection exists for lines and their associated components,
even though they appear to be connected. This error may result if
a proper connection was never established, or if a component was
dragged away from a line.
To Correct: ■ Create a connection with another line or component.

Specific rules apply to the following components:
■ Equipment: All attachment points on must be connected
to a schematic line.
■ General instruments: At least one signal line must be con-
nected to a general instrument.
■ Inline instruments and control valves: These components
must be placed on a pipe line.
■ Tanks and vessels: Tanks or vessels must be connected to
at least one pipe line. Tanks and vessels that have a place-
ment point must be connected to a pipe line at the place-
ment point.
For information about components, see Add Compon-

ents to a P&ID Drawing on page 302.

Flow Direction Conflict
Example:
Description: The flow direction is incorrect for a line or component.
To Correct: ■ Update the flow direction.

Orphaned Annotation
Example:
Description: An annotation tag has been moved away from the component with
which it is associated.
To Correct: ■ Drag the annotation to within the acceptable distance, or toler-

ance, of its associated object or enter new coordinates.

Unresolved Off-page Connectors

Example:
Description: Off-page connectors used to connect the current drawing with an-
other drawing do not specify a valid project location.
To Correct: ■ Specify a valid connector in another drawing.

To correct Base AutoCAD Object errors
1 Validate the project or drawing following the procedure described in

Validate Project Drawings on page 591.
2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Base AutoCAD Objects tree,

click the error node. Do one of the following:
■ To convert the Base AutoCAD object to a P&ID component, in the
drawing, right-click the object to be converted. Click Convert to P&ID
Object. In the Convert to P&ID Object dialog box, select a component.
Click OK. If prompted, in the drawing, specify an insertion base point.
■ To erase the object, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error
node. Click Erase.
■ To ignore the error, in the Validation Errors tree, right-click the error
node. Click Ignore. The error is moved to the Errors Marked as Ignored
folder in the Validation Errors tree.

NOTE To change the status of an ignored error, in the Errors Marked as
Ignored folder, right-click the error node. Click <Unassigned>.
3 To validate the drawing for this error again, in the Validation Errors tree,
right-click the Base AutoCAD Object folder. Click Refresh.
To correct Size Mismatch errors

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Size Mismatch error tree, click
the error node. Do one of the following:
■ To manually fix size-mismatch errors, in the drawing, change the size
of the mismatched component or the size of the line or lines
connected to the component to match the other.
node. Click Ignore.
right-click the Size Mismatches folder. Click Refresh.
To correct Spec Mismatch errors

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Spec Mismatch error tree,

click the error node. Do one of the following:
■ To manually fix Spec Mismatch errors, in the drawing, change the
size of the mismatched component or the spec of the line or lines
connected to the component to match the other.
node. Click Ignore.

To correct Non-terminating Line errors

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Non-terminating Line error

tree, click the error node. Do one of the following:
■ To manually create a connection, re-create or move the endpoint of
the line so that a connection is established.
node. Click Ignore.
right-click the Non-terminating Line folder. Click Refresh.
To correct Unconnected Component errors

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Unconnected Component

error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following:
■ To manually create a connection, attach the component to a line at
all available attachment points on the component. If the unconnected
component has no attachment points, at least one line must be
connected to it.
node. Click Ignore.
To correct Flow Direction Conflict errors

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Flow Direction Conflict error

■ To update the flow in the drawing area, correct the flow direction of
the line originating or ending at that point.

node. Click Ignore.
To correct Orphaned Annotation errors

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Orphaned Annotations error

■ To move the annotation closer to its related component, in the
drawing, drag the annotation or enter coordinates.
node. Click Ignore.
right-click the Orphaned Annotations folder. Click Refresh.
To correct Unresolved Off-Page Connector errors

2 In the Validation Summary window, in the Unresolved Off-page

Connectors error tree, click the error node. Do one of the following:
■ To specify a connector in another drawing, in the drawing area,
right-click the connector. Click Off-Page Connector ➤ Connect. The
Create Connection dialog box is displayed. In the dialog box, specify
the information required to resolve the error.
node. Click Ignore.
right-click the Unresolved Off-Page Connectors folder. Click Refresh.
To display or hide ignored error flags
1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Validate panel ➤ Validate Summary.

2 In the Validation Summary window, select the check box for Don’t
Display Errors Marked as Ignored.
Quick Reference
Commands
VALIDATE
VALIDATESUMMARY
System Variables
No entries
Interface Reference

Glossary
Acquire mode The mode in which a property acquires its value from another
source (properties for a project, drawing, or class).
See also Override mode and Initialization only.
Acquisition A property type that acquires its value from another source such
as project properties, drawing properties, or class properties.
Annotation An AutoCAD object comprised of text and (optional) shapes. In

AutoCAD Plant 3D, annotations are used to display data values of P&ID
components (including equipment, valves, lines, and so on). These values are
displayed as text.
Assembly A group of connected components that are commonly placed in a

drawing at the same time. For example, a level gauge assembly might contain
an instrument and five valves. You can place an assembly from a tool palette
instead of selecting each component individually.
Assumed nozzle A type of nozzle that is automatically added as a record in

the Data Manager when a pipe line is connected to a piece of equipment.
Unlike other nozzle types, an assumed nozzle is not visible in the drawing.
Automatic annotation A type of annotation that gets automatically inserted

when a component is created. See also Annotation and Linked Annotation.
Bill of materials (BOM) List of components needed to fabricate a pipeline.
Child table See Object table.
Class A specific type of a class, as opposed to a class family. For example,

Centrifugal Pump is a class from the Pumps class family.
Class family A class that is used to categorize other classes and set a starting
point for class properties, tags, and annotations for those classes. For example,
Pumps and Equipment are class families; Centrifugal Pump and Ball Valve are
classes.
Glossary | 605
Class property A property of a class; it reflects a data value. For example, the
HandValve class type may have attributes of size, spec, and manufacturer. The
Pumps class type may have flow, TDH, and manufacturer.
Component A native AutoCAD Plant 3D object type. AutoCAD Plant 3D

components include Equipment, Nozzles, Lines, Instruments, and Inline
components.
Component class See Class.
Connection symbol The graphical element in a drawing that indicates an

off-page or on-page line connection. You can choose from several symbols.
Convert To change an AutoCAD object to an AutoCAD Plant 3D component

or line; the converted item is included in data reports.
Converted support A pipe support that was created by converting one or

more AutoCAD objects.
Data Manager An enhanced secondary window in AutoCAD Plant 3D; it

displays data in a table.
DWF (P&ID) A Design Web Format file; it is a compressed file format created
from DWG files in a project. DWF files are easy to publish and view on the
Web.
Equipment InfoTag An annotation style. A multiline set of attributes that

displays selected data values for a placed piece of equipment. One Equipment
InfoTag for each equipment component is typically placed at the top of a
drawing or in a grid across the bottom of the drawing.
Family table A table that contains information about different classes within
a class family. For example, the Equipment family table contains information
about pumps, tanks, blowers and other classes found under the Equipment
class family.
Flag A symbol, like an arrow, that indicates the direction of the flow. The flag
symbol contains the line number annotation. It is on the Non-engineering
tab of the P&ID DIN tool palette.
Flip grip A grip that flips an object in the direction shown in the grip arrow.
Flow arrow The direction in which a schematic line flows. You can control
the direction of the flow arrow using dynamic grips.
Freestanding annotation Text that is associated with a component; it does

not move when the component moves. However, the data associated with
606 | Glossary
the annotation updates with the component. Just the text gets disconnected.
Annotations are either freestanding or linked. See also Linked Annotation.
Gap crossing A visual indication on a drawing that a line breaks on either

side of a crossing.
Initialization only A property setting that limits property acquisition to a

one-time event, when a component is first initialized. If the property is set to
initialization only, it acquires its value from its designated source and changes
immediately to override mode.
See also Acquisition and Override mode.
Inline component A component with an alignment grip that can be dropped

onto a line.
Instrument A device or combination of devices used directly or indirectly to

measure, display, or control a variable.
Isometrics Stylized drawings of parts of a model which convey the information

required to build this model section.
KKS (Kraftwerk-Kennzeichensystem) A power plant classification system

managed and developed by VGP Working Panel. KKS is usually used with the
DIN 2481 standard.
Line designation table (LDT) List of pipe lines and their properties.
Linked annotation Graphic, text, or text with a graphic that labels a

component. The text values reflect the data attribute values of a component.
Examples of linked annotations are a line ID, a valve size, instrument function
symbol, or Equipment InfoTag. Linked annotation moves when the component
moves.
Loop crossing A visual indication on a drawing that a line loops over another
line.
Object table A table that contains specific information about a class or a

property of a class. For example, Pumps is an object table of the Equipment
family table.
Off-page connector The graphical representation on a P&ID drawing of the

continuance of a line from one project drawing to another.
OrthoCube A semi-transparent green 3D solid box that you use to define the
boundaries of an orthographic view.
Orthogonal connection The default AutoCAD Plant 3D schematic line

behavior of connecting at 90-degree increments.
Glossary | 607
Override mode A mode in which an acquired property can be modified. A
property that is set up to acquire its value from another source is switched
from acquiring mode to override mode in the Properties palette or in the Data
Manager. See also Acquiring mode.
Pins Symbols that identify a change in a pipe line property. In the KKS tagging
standard, pins identify a change in properties (for example, Unit Number or
System Code). A pin is either open (no-fill) or closed (black fill). Open pins
mark the boundaries of a group with a common property. Closed pins identify
a break in piping sub-systems or branches in a pipe line. When using either
open or closed pins, drafters must manually change the properties of the lines
beyond the open-pin boundary. Pins are located on the Non-engineering tab
of the DIN tool palette.
Pipe A tube or hollow cylinder for the conveyance of fluid.
Pipe support A manufactured component that connects a pipe to a structure.
Schematic line A line in AutoCAD Plant 3D that represents pipe lines and
signal lines.
Spool The section of model represented by an isometric. Typically includes

starting & ending at points that are normal breakpoints when constructing
the line.
Tag A property that uniquely identifies a component.
Trim As a verb, to add hardware to a piece of equipment. As a noun, additional

information. A pipe trim is additional information (text or graphics) to further
define a piping segment. Equipment trim is additional information (text or
graphics) to further define a piece of equipment.
Validate To check a drawing or a project for errors and inconsistencies such

as unconnected components, non-terminating lines, and so on.
608 | Glossary
Index
A tags, elevation, and descriptions to
equipment 369, 375
acquire mode 605 assigning tag
acquisition 605 about 293
actuators assumed nozzles 605
adding to P&ID drawings 314 attaching
adding graphics to equipment 389
data to equipment 369 attachment points 69
drawing files to projects 300 audit
drawing status notes 258 projects 271
drawings to folders 248 auto-hide for windows 293
equipment to drawings 302 AutoCAD
existing drawing to projects 244 exporting P&ID drawings to 344
fittings 467 AutoCAD objects
instruments to P&ID drawings 306 converting to AutoCAD P&ID
lines to drawings 322 components 342
new drawing to projects 245 AutoCAD P&ID
nozzles to drawings 305 about 1
pipe 445 Help system 1
pipe supports 486 AutoCAD Plant 3D
read-only drawing to projects 244 about 1
valves 471 automatic numbering of
work history to drawings 259 components 249, 251
alignment
pipe 447
anchoring windows 293 B
annotating bill of materials 605
components 300
lines 300
annotation C
orthographic drawings 569
annotations 605 changing length
automatic 605 structural members 403
setting up for ortho drawings 231 child table. See object table 605
setting up for P&ID 131 class definitions
application menu 290 modifying and creating 57
arrows, behavior on lines 82 specifying attributes and properties
assemblies 605 for Plant 3D 193
creating and using 320 client information, changing for
assigning projects 11
tags 335, 339 Clipboard (Windows)
copying pipe 482
609 | Index
component classes 606 equipment by stacking shapes 375
component classes. See object equipment from 3D objects 383
definition 606 equipment from patterns 369
components 606 footings 425
about 302 grids 395
annotating 300 Isogen information item 554
attachment points 69 Isogen message 552
automatic numbering 249 ladders 420
converting AutoCAD objects to 342 members,structural 400
editing the block geometry of 319 plates 427
placing 300 production iso 556
scaling 69 Quick Iso 555
setting automatic numbering 251 railings 413
tagging 300, 335, 339 stairs 417
understanding 297 structural grids 395
compress projects 271 structural members 400
configuring customized views 501
drawing behavior settings in customizing
P&ID 32 pipe supports 491
drawing behavior settings in Plant reports 20
3D 140 the drawing and modeling
drawing properties 17 environment 7
end connections in P&ID 33 cutting
reports 20 members 404
symbols 68 structural members 404
the drawing and modeling
environment 7
configuring P&ID D
validation settings 592 Data Manager 606
connected pipe 467 about 282
connection grips 327 creating a customized view for
connection symbols 606 P&ID 53
connectors, configuring 179 creating a customized view for Plant
context menus. See shortcut menus 3D 150
continuation grips 327 customized views 501
control valves data table
adding to a P&ID drawing 306 filtering data 512
conversion 606 ordering columns 517
converted support 606 sorting data 516
converting data views 499, 501
equipment from 3D objects 383 Current Drawing data view 500
copying Project Reports data view 500
equipment 389 editing data 507
pipe 482 exporting data 522
creating active node and child
equipment 369 nodes 522
610 | Index
modifying data using Excel 528 docking windows 293
naming exported files 524 drawing behavior settings
read-only exported data 529 in P&ID 32
understand read-only exported in Plant 3D 140
data 529 drawing files
viewing exported data 523 adding to projects 300
exporting reports 538 creating 300
exporting to PCF (Piping Component drawing properties
Format) 527 configuring 17
importing data drawing status, refreshing 260
accept or reject changes on drawings
import 530 adding equipment to 302
import settings 530 adding existing to projects 244
importing CSV files 541 adding lines to 322
importing modified acquisition adding new to projects 245
properties 531 adding nozzles to 305
importing to tree nodes 529 adding read-only to projects 244
printing data and reports 548 adding status notes for 258
reports adding title block information 255
accepting and rejecting changes adding to folders 248
on import 545 adding work history to 259
report types 534 changing order in tree 248
viewing pending changes on checking status of 253
import 545 grouping in folders 246
viewing report logs 547 including xrefs (referenced
viewing reports 536 drawings) 242
tree view linking or copying 243
filtering data 511 linking or copying with xrefs 243
working with nodes 501 numbering 250
viewing acquisition property opening 255
data 520 organizing in projects 239
viewing read-only data 520 previewing 254–255
zooming to Plant 3D objects 505 printing 264
defining refreshing status of 254
part properties for equipment 369, removing from projects 245
375, 383 saving all in project 261
detaching setting properties 249–250
graphics from equipment 390 sharing 264
DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. tracking work history of 261
V.) 5 transmitting 264
DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. viewing read-only 255
V.) standards 297 viewing work history for 259
displaying DWF
pipe insulation 479 P&ID 606
dockable windows, controlling display DWF files
of 293 output settings 266
Index | 611
publishing 266 exploding
publishing options 268 objects,structural 424
structural trim objects 424
export and import settings
E external data mapping for P&ID 40
edge cutting external data mapping for Plant
members,structural 411 3D 140
structural members 411 exporting
editing objects,structural 428
grids 395 P&ID drawings to AutoCAD 344
members,structural 401 PCF 559
pipe 461 structural objects 428
structural grids 395 extending
structural members 401 members 408
equipment structural members 408
adding data to 369, 375, 383
adding nozzles to 369, 375, 383 F
adding reserve space to 391
adding to drawings 302 fabricated equipment
assigning tags, elevation, and creating 375
descriptions to 369, 375 family tables 606
attaching graphics to 389 field
converting 3D objects to 383 add field data 256
copying 389 create a title block 257
creating 369 insert a title block 257
creating a template from 369, 375, update a title block 257
383 update field data 256
creating and modifying 369 file locations
creating by stacking shapes 375 P&ID project data 51
creating user-fabricated 375 Plant 3D project data 148
detaching graphics from 390 files
modifying 387 linking or copying 243
moving 388 fittings 467
reorienting 388 flags 606
shapes and dimensions 375 flip grips 606
stacking shapes 369 floating windows 293
using existing patterns 369 flow arrows 606
using parametric patterns 369 adding to P&ID drawings 314
Equipment InfoTags 606 folders
equipment parameters 369, 375, 383 adding drawings to 248
equipment part properties changing order in tree 248
defining 369, 375, 383 creating 247
equipment templates creating nested 248
creating 369, 375, 383 project drawings in 246
erasing 467 removing 248
renaming 248
612 | Index
footing settings,structural 425 ISA (Instrument Society of America)
footings standards 297
creating 425 ISA symbols license 4
specifying settings 425 ISO (International Organization for
freestanding annotations 606 Standardization) standards 297
ISO symbols license 5
Isogen information item
G creating 554
gap crossings 607 Isogen message
gaps creating 552
adding to P&ID drawings 314 isometric drawings
general instruments (bubbles) dimensions 158
adding to P&ID drawings 306 labels 161
graphics paths 154
attaching to equipment 389 set up new type 157
detaching from equipment 390 settings 153
grids,structural 395 sloped lines 160
grips 287 title block area settings 166
connection 327 title block bill of materials 168
continuation 327, 438 title block layers settings 163
rotation 467 title block settings 163
substitution 461, 467 isometrics 607
check 551
final 552
H stress 551
types 551
Help
about 1
organization 1 J
JIS symbols 6
I
initialization only mode 607 K
inline components 607
about 310 KKS 607
end connections and 311
open or closed state 311 L
inline instruments
adding to a P&ID drawing 306 ladder settings, structural 420
instruments 607 ladders
adding to P&ID drawings 306 creating 420
piping 474 specifying settings 420
insulation 479 layer and color assignments
International Organization for configuring automated schemes 171
Standardization (ISO) 5 lengthening
structural members 403
Index | 613
line designation table trimming 408
configure 156 members,structural 398
line designation table (LDT) 607 menus, shortcut 286
line model 393 migrating
line numbers 434 P&ID drawings 582
selecting 466 P&ID drawings and projects 575–
line settings, setting up 62 576
lines P&ID projects 576, 587
adding to drawings 322 migration (P&ID)
annotating 300 projects 579
connecting to components 327 mitering
connecting to each other 327 members 406
converting AutoCAD objects to 342 structural members 406
define the directional flow of 329 model representation,structural 393
editing 330 modifying
grouping behavior 328 equipment 387
groups and segments 322 pipe size 462
placing 300 pipe spec 462
setting up arrow behavior 82 pipe supports 489
tagging 300, 335, 339 monitors, using dual 293
To and From information 323 moving
understanding 297 equipment 388
linked annotations 607 nozzles 388
locking
pipe 465
locking windows and toolbars 294 N
loop crossings 607 New Status dialog box 261
nozzles
M adding to drawings 305
adding to equipment 369, 375, 383
mapping marking on a piece of
P&ID and 3D sizes 357 equipment 383
mapping Plant objects 182 moving 388
marking numbering drawings 250
nozzle locations to add
metadata 383
member settings, structural 398 O
members object definition families 605
creating 400 object definition properties 606
cutting 404 object definitions 605
edge cutting 411 object snaps
editing 401 pipe 448
extending 408 object tables 607
lengthening 403 objects
mitering 406 exploding 424
restoring 412 exporting 428
614 | Index
off-page connectors 607 PIP (Process Industry Practices)
about 138 standards 297
adding to P&ID drawings 314 PIP symbols license 4
opening pipe
projects 254 adding 437
options file long (OPL) 607 aligning 447
OrthoCube connecting 449
specifying an orthographic view 563 connecting to nozzles 438
orthogonal connections 607 connecting to xrefs 480
orthographic drawing connecting with object snaps 448
adding dimensions 572 connection type 468
annotating 569 copying 482
copying to a project 568 custom parts 474
generating an orthographic erasing 467
view 562 fittings 467
linking to a project 568 formatting line numbers 434
overview 561 insulation 479
templates 562 joints 468
orthographic view line numbers 434
copying to another project 563 locking 465
saving 563 modifying 461
outline model 393 modifying size 462
override mode 608 modifying spec 462
placeholder parts 474
precision routing 448
P properties 462
P&ID drawings routing 445
adding instruments to 306 routing solutions 449
migrating 582 selecting 466
validating 591 specs 431
P&ID drawings and projects supports 485
migrating 575–576 tagging 478
validating 591 valves 471
P&ID drawings, exporting to pipe supports 485, 608
AutoCAD 344 customizing 491
P&ID drawings, using with Plant 3D 349 modifying 489
P&ID Line List 350 placing 486
P&ID projects placing on sloped piping 493
migrating 576, 587 placing
parameters for equipment 369, 375, 383 components 300
paths lines 300
configure for P&ID 51 Plant 3D objects
configure for Plant 3D 148 set up class definitions for 193
patterns plates
creating equipment from 369 creating 427
pins 608
Index | 615
printing project.xml file 261
drawings 264 projects
Process Industry Practices (PIP) 4 audit 271
production iso auditing 271
creating 556 compress 271
project data, changing 11 compressing 271
project location 238 create new 8
Project Manager existing drawings in 244
about 253, 279 grouping drawings in folders 246
previewing drawings in 255 how to audit 271
project setup link or copy files to 243
adding a new property 11 location of 238
changing details 11 new drawings in 245
class definitions for Plant 3D 193 opening 253–254
configure line designation table 156 organizing drawings in 239
configuring connectors 179 organizing files in 246
configuring layer and color package and transmit 264
assignments 171 pointing users to 238
create new isometric drawing project.xml file 261
type 157 read-only drawings in 244
creating a customized view for the removing drawings from 245
Data Manager 150 saving drawings 260
export and import settings for setup process 239
P&ID 40 starting 241
export and import settings for Plant tracking progress of 261
3D 140 properties
isometric drawing paths 154 configuring drawing 17
isometric settings 153 pipe 462
map P&ID and 3D piping setting for drawings 249–250
classes 182 setting up for P&ID 86
setting dimensions for setting up for Plant 3D 197
isometrics 158 Properties palette
setting isometric labels 161 about 281
setting isometric title block 163 property acquisition
setting isometric title block acquire and override modes 92, 202
attributes 165 between signal line groups and pipe
setting isometric title block bill of line groups 93
materials 168 copy or move components with 92
setting isometric title block drawing from multiple sources 93
area 166 initialization only 92, 203
setting isometric title block rules 90, 202
layers 163 setting up 90, 201
setting sloped lines formatting for
isometrics 160
Project Setup wizard 8
Project Status Manager 261
616 | Index
Q selection lists
setting up 101, 210
Quick Iso setting
creating 555 structural model representation 393
Quick Properties panel 285 setting up projects 239
settings
footing 425
R ladder 420
railing settings, structural 413 railing 413
railings stair 417
creating 413 structural member 398
specifying settings 413 shape model 393
read-only drawings shortcut menus 286
adding to projects 244 size mapping 357
viewing 255 sorting
relief valves work history for drawings 262
adding to a P&ID drawing 306 spec breaks
removing adding to drawings 314
fittings 467 Spec Viewer 283
reorienting specialty item
equipment 388 piping 474
reports specs
configuring 20 routing pipe 431
templates 20 spools 608
reserve space stair settings, structural 417
adding to equipment 391 stairs
resizing windows 293 creating 417
restoring specifying settings 417
members,structural 412 structural grids 395
structural members 412 structural members 398
reviewing creating 400
isometric results 558 cutting 404
ribbon edge cutting 411
about 275 editing 401
ribbon tabs 275 extending 408
workspaces and 275 lengthening 403
right-click menus. See shortcut menus mitering 406
restoring 412
specifying settings 398
S trimming 408
structural model representation 393
saving structural modeling in AutoCAD Plant
project drawings 260 3D 393
schematic lines 608 structural objects
selecting exploding 424
pipe 466 exporting 428
Index | 617
symbol lists trim 608
setting up 101 trimming
symbol model 393 members 408
symbol settings, setting up 62
symbols
components and lines 297 V
validating
T a 3D model against a P&ID
drawing 359
tag formats addressing P&ID errors 594
setting up 215 correcting mismatch errors between
tagging a 3D model and a P&ID
components 300, 335, 339 drawing 362
lines 300, 335, 339 P&ID drawings 591
tagging prompt, setting up 62 P&ID drawings and projects 591
tags 608 validation 608
assigning 335, 339 valves 467
default format templates 215
default templates 114
expressions 215 W
for a pipe line group 114 windows
format expressions 114 auto-hiding 293
format levels 113 controlling display of 293
formats 214–215 locking 294
setting formats for 112, 214 resizing 293
setting prompt for in P&ID 62 transparent 293
types of 336 work history
uniqueness 115, 216 about 292
using acquiring properties 113, 215 adding status and notes to 259
templates displaying 262
creating for equipment 369, 375, sorting 262
383 viewing for drawings 259
reports 20 Work History dialog box 261
tool palettes workspaces
P&ID 284 about 273
substitution 286 switching 274
toolbars
controlling display of 293
locking 294 X
tooltips 289
transmit,projects 264 xrefs 242
transmittal packages linking or copying drawings
setting up 265 with 243
unpacking 266 xrefs (external references)
transparent windows 293 connecting to pipe 480
618 | Index

Guia de Usuario Plant 3d

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Guia de Usuario Plant 3d

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AutoCAD Plant 3D 2010

Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 3 Organize Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Chapter 4 Work in a Project Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Chapter 6 Create and Modify a P&ID Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Chapter 7 Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D . . . 349

Create and Modify a Plant 3D Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Chapter 8 Create and Modify Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Chapter 9 Create and Modify Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Chapter 10 Create and Modify Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Chapter 11 Create and Modify Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Chapter 12 Control the Plant 3D Model Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Chapter 13 Manage Data and Generate Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Chapter 14 Generate Isometric Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Chapter 15 Generate Orthographic Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Chapter 16 Migrate Projects and Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Chapter 17 Validate P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help

Find Information Using the Landing Page

■ AutoCAD P&ID Best Practices. Provides workflow diagrams that illustrate

■ Create and Configure a Project on page 7. Provides conceptual and

■ Organize Project Drawings on page 239. Provides conceptual and task-based

■ Work in a Project Environment on page 253. Provides conceptual and

■ Understand the Drawing Environment on page 273. Provides conceptual

■ Validate P&ID Drawings on page 591. Provides conceptual and task-based

■ Work with AutoCAD P&ID Drawings in AutoCAD Plant 3D on page 349.

2 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

■ Command and Interface Reference. Provides help on commands and system

Find Information Using the Search Tab

Find Information Using InfoCenter

For more information about InfoCenter, see Find Information Using

Provide Feedback About Help

About AutoCAD Plant 3D Help | 3

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

ISO 10628:1997 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

ISO 14617-5:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for

ISO 14617-6:2002 Symbols © The International Organization for

ISO 3511-1:1977 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

ISO 3511-2:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

ISO 3511-3:1984 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

ISO 3511-4: 1985 Symbols © The International Organization for Standardization

DIN (Deutsches Institut Fur Normung e. V.)

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction to AutoCAD Plant 3D

Overview: Create and Configure the Working

Set Up a New Project

Page Information required

Page 1 of 5 Specify general settings ■ The project name

NOTE The program creates default direct-

■ The directory where you want to store

NOTE If you choose this option, your new

NOTE If you choose Metric, you can

8 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project

Page 5 of 5 Finish Whether you want to edit additional pro-

To set up a new project

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤

2 Complete the Project Setup wizard.

You now have a new working project.

Set Up a New Project | 9

1 On the ribbon, click Home tab ➤ Project panel ➤ Project Manager ➤

Configure General Settings

NOTE Your administrator can lock project files to prevent changes to

Set or Change Project Details

10 | Chapter 2 Create and Configure a Project